Drilling Operations Guidelines Manual

Drilling Operations Guidelines
1.0 Responsibilities
2.0 General Drilling Rig Safety Practices
3.0 General Drilling Practices
4.0 Directional Drilling
5.0 Tripping
6.0 Drilling Fluids And Equipment
7.0 Mud Logging And Geological Sampling
8.0 Wellbore Surveying
9.0 Drilling Operations Summary (Typical)
10.0 Casing
11.0 Cementation
12.0 Bottom Hole Assemblies
13.0 Drillstring Design And Handling
14.0 Hydraulics
15.0 Coring
16.0 Stuck Pipe And Fishing Operations
17.0 Evaluation
18.0 Well Abandonment And Suspension
19.0 Reporting And Documentation
20.0 Rig Mobilization / Demobilization
21.0 Location / Surveys
22.0 Testing
23.0 Bits / Hole Openers / Underreamers
24.0 Logistics
25.0 Wellhead Equipment
Drilling Operations Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Responsibilities
Halliburton Field Organization Chart ................................. 2
Halliburton Drilling Project Manager ................................. 3
Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator/Drilling Engineer ........... 3
Halliburton Materials Superintendent ................................. 3
Rig Contractor’s Superintendent ................................. 4
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor ............................................ 4
Rig Contractor Senior Representative ................................. 5
Halliburton Wellsite Drilling Engineer ................................. 5
Halliburton and Other Service Company Personnel ............ 7
Chapter 2
General Drilling Rig Safety Practices
Safety Responsibility ........................................................ 5
Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator ........................ 5
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor ................................... 5
Drilling Contractor’s Rig Superintendent/
Senior Representative ................................... 6
Emergency Situations Response ................................... 6
Emergency Drills and Exercises ................................... 6
Emergency Situation Response and Procedures
Plans (Rig Site) .............................................. 7
Emergency Situation Response and Procedures
Plans (Halliburton Office) ................................... 8
Incident/Accident Reporting and Follow-up Procedure ............. 8
Safety Meetings ................................................................... 8
Permit to Work System ........................................................ 8
Rig Component and Equipment Safety Requirements ............. 10
General ................................................................... 10
Derrick ................................................................... 11
Drawworks, Rotary, Hose, Swivel, Kelly ........................ 12
Crown Block, Traveling Block, Hook, Drilling Line ... 13
Slips .............................................................................. 13
Tongs .............................................................................. 14
Spinning Chain ......................................................... 15
Iron Roughneck ......................................................... 15
Elevators .................................................................... 15
Air Hoist/Tugger .......................................................... 16
Mud Pumps .......................................................... 16
Mud Pits ..................................................................... 17
Sack Store/Chemical Storage Area .......................... 17
_____________________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 12 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Electrical Installations ................................................ 17
Well Control ........................................................... 18
Drilling Lighting Equipment Certification
and Inspection ................................................ 20
General Rig Working Practices ................................................ 21
Well Servicing ........................................................... 21
Safe Practices in Handling/Mixing Chemicals ................ 24
Radioactive Materials Handling and Procedures ..... 25
Explosives Utilization ................................................ 26
Hydrogen Sulfide Safety - General ........................... 27
Shale Shakers ........................................................... 30
Mud Pumps and Mud Pits ..................................... 31
Drill Floor and Catwalk ................................................ 32
Derrick, Monkey Board, Stabbing Board ................ 32
Cranes and Pipe Rack Area ..................................... 33
General Policy for Mechanical and Electrical Work ..... 33
Tool and Equipment Utilization ................................................ 34
Hand Tools ..................................................................... 34
Hammers ..................................................................... 35
Power Tools ........................................................... 35
Air Tools ...................................................................... 35
Electric Tools ........................................................... 35
Rigging Practices ........................................................... 35
Drilling Site Preparation (Typical Land) ...................................... 35
Chapter 3
General Drilling Practices
Drilling Equipment and Materials ................................................ 2
Drilling Operational Practices and Procedures ........................... 4
General Procedures ................................................ 4
Drilling Practices and Procedures ........................... 5
Chapter 4
Directional Drilling
Glossary of Directional Drilling Terms ...................................... 2
General Requirements and Calculations ........................... 2
Directional Drilling Operational Practices and Procedures ...... 4
Correction Runs ...................................................................... 7
Correction Run Requirements ...................................... 7
General Recommendations ...................................... 7
Sidetracking ............................................................ 7
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents Page 2 of 12 August 1995
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Chapter 5
Tripping
Tripping Safety ................................................................. 2
Tripping Practices ...................................................... 2
Chapter 6
Drilling Fluids and Equipment
Drilling Fluids - Types ...................................................... 3
Spud Muds ...................................................... 3
Water-based Muds ...................................................... 3
Invert Oil Emulsion Muds ........................................... 10
Contingency Treatments ...................................................... 14
Lost Circulation - General ........................................... 14
Kick Control Barite Plug ........................................... 21
Hole Cleaning (General and Pill Requirements)........... 21
Solids Control and Equipment ........................................... 22
Operation and Optimization of Solids
Control Equipment ........................................... 22
Mud Reporting and Documentation ................................. 26
Daily Mud Report ...................................................... 27
End of Well Report ...................................................... 28
Mud and General Contingency Treatment Equipment
and Material Requirements ...................... 29
Chapter 7
Mud Logging and Geological Sampling
Mud Logging Service Levels ............................................ 2
Fully-computerized Mud Logging Service ............ 2
Standard (Noncomputerized) Mud Logging Service .... 4
Minimum Mud Logging Service ................................. 5
Selection of Service Level ............................................ 5
Mud Logging Scope of Work ............................................ 5
Chapter 8
Wellbore Surveying
Wellbore Surveying Objectives and Reasoning ........... 2
General Wellbore Surveying Recommendations ........... 3
Further General Requirements and Procedures for
Surveying ...................................................... 5
Quality Control for Surveying Instruments ...................... 6
Electronic Magnetic Multishot/Electronic
Magnetic Single Shot ................................. 6
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
MWD ................................................................. 6
Wireline Steering Tool ............................................ 7
SRG (Surface Reading Gyroscopic) Survey
(Open Hole) ............................................ 8
North-seeking Gyro (Cased Hole and Open Hole) ....... 8
Teledrift ................................................................. 9
Chapter 9
Drilling Operations Summary (Typical)
Structural Casing ................................................................ 3
Conductor Cleanout ........................................... 3
Conductor Hole and Casing ........................................... 4
Drilling Procedures ........................................... 4
Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List ...................... 5
Running and Cementing the Casing ...................... 6
Casing and Wellhead Equipment ...................... 6
Surface Hole and Casing ........................................... 7
Drilling Procedure (Straight Hole) ................................ 7
17.5-in. Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List
(Straight Hole) ........................................... 8
Running and Cementing the 13 3/8-in. Casing ........... 9
Casing and Wellhead Equipment Lists ...................... 9
Intermediate/Production Hole and Casing ...................... 11
Drilling Procedures (Straight Hole) ...................... 11
Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole) ........... 11
Running and Cementing the Casing ...................... 12
Casing and Wellhead Equipment List ...................... 13
Drilling/Production Liner Hole and Liner ...................... 14
Drilling Procedures (Straight Hole) ...................... 14
Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole) ........... 15
Running and Cementing the Liner ...................... 16
Liner Running and Cementing the Liner ...................... 18
Chapter 10
Casing
General Tubular Handling ............................................ 3
Casing Preparation ....................................................... 3
Drifting .................................................................. 3
Cleaning of Pipe and Threads ....................... 4
Inspection .................................................................. 4
Measuring Casing and Casing Tally Production ............ 5
Casing Running .................................................................. 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Casing Running Equipment .................................. 5
Running Instructions ............................................. 7
Casing OD Tolerance ............................................. 8
Chrome Duplex Alloy Tubular Goods Handling ............. 8
Introduction ........................................................ 8
Chrome Tubular Shipping .................................. 9
Rig Site Preparation and Inspection of Chrome
Tubulars ....................................................... 9
Running Chrome Tubulars ............................................ 9
Preparation and Running of a Liner and Liner Hanger ............ 10
General Information ............................................ 10
Equipment Description and Listing, Preoperational
Checklist, and Other Considerations ............ 10
Liner Running Instructions ............................................ 12
Casing Accessory Equipment ............................................ 14
Casing Centralizers ............................................ 14
Casing Scratchers (Wall Cleaners) ...................... 16
Nonrotating Cement Plug and Float Equipment ............ 16
Pressure Differential Fill Float Equipment ............ 17
Casing, Tubing, and Line Pipe Threading Compounds ........... 17
Chapter 11
Cementation
General Cementation Guidelines ................................. 3
Planning ....................................................... 3
Calculations and Volumetric Data ....................... 3
Cement Excess ....................................................... 3
General Cementation Planning and organization Checklist .... 4
Cementing System Checklist .................................. 4
Cementing Service Contractor Checklist ............ 4
Cement Unit Checklist ............................................ 5
Precement Job Checklist ............................................ 5
On-site Drilling Engineer’s Checklist ....................... 6
Responsibilities of the Drilling Supervisor ....................... 6
Cementing Operations Checklist .................................. 7
Cement Program Checklist ............................................ 8
Cement and Its Functions ............................................ 9
General Cement Theory ............................................ 9
Special Cementing Considerations ...................... 10
Standard Cement Additives ............................................ 11
Accelerators ....................................................... 11
Retarders ....................................................... 11
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Dispersants ........................................................ 12
Fluid-loss Additives ............................................. 12
Density Adjusters ............................................. 13
Defoamers ........................................................ 14
Retrogressive Strength Additives ........................ 14
Annular Mud Removal During Cementation ........................ 14
Liner Cementation ................................................................... 15
Plug Cementation ................................................................... 17
Cementing Equipment ............................................. 17
Cement Plug Job Procedure .................................. 18
Standard Practices When Setting Cement Plugs ... 18
Squeeze Cementation ......................................................... 19
Standard Practices for Squeeze Cementation .............. 19
Standard Squeeze Procedure ................................... 20
Squeeze Procedure With Retrievable Packer ............. 21
Chapter 12
Bottomhole Assemblies
General .............................................................................. 3
Bottomhole Assembly Components ................................... 3
Drill Collars ................................................................... 3
Stabilizers ................................................................... 3
Nonmagnetic Tools ............................................. 4
Mud Motors ........................................................ 5
MWD Tools ........................................................ 6
Roller Reamers ........................................................ 6
Underreamers ........................................................ 6
Hole Openers ........................................................ 6
Shock Subs ........................................................ 7
Drilling Jars ........................................................ 7
Additional Tools (Crossovers, Subs) ........................ 11
Chapter 13
Drillstring Design and Handling
Drillstring Design .................................................................... 2
Objective and Requirements .................................... 2
Buoyancy .................................................................... 2
Tension .................................................................... 3
Collapse .................................................................... 4
Torsion .................................................................... 4
Drillstring Stiffness Ratio ............................................... 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Bending Strength Ratio ........................................... 5
Fatigue ................................................................ 6
Critical Rotary Speeds ........................................... 6
Drill Pipe to Drill Collar Interface ................................ 7
Tool Joint Specification - Hardbanding ..................... 7
Wear, Care, and Handling of Tubulars ................................ 8
Make-up ................................................................ 8
General Rules of Care - Drill Pipe ...................... 8
Breaking-in New Pipe ........................................... 8
Drill Pipe Protectors ........................................... 9
General Rules of Cre - Drill Collars ...................... 9
Incorrect Torque ...................................................... 9
Chapter 14
Hydraulics
Fluid Requirements ...................................................... 2
Carrying Capacity ...................................................... 2
Pressure Losses in the Circulating System ...................... 2
Hydraulic Efficiency ...................................................... 3
Field Optimization ................................................................ 3
Operating Guidelines ...................................................... 4
Chapter 15
Coring
Core Barrel Configurations ........................................... 3
Double-tube Core Barrels ........................................... 3
Oriented-coring Assemblies ................................ 3
Aluminum/Fiberglass Inner Barrels and Fiberglass
Inner-barrel Liners ................................ 3
Sponge Coring ..................................................... 4
Precoring Procedures ..................................................... 4
Conventional Core Barrel Handling Procedures .......... 5
Picking Up and Handling Core Barrel ..................... 5
Laying Down the Core ........................................... 7
Maintenance Between Cores ................................. 8
Laying Down the Core Barrel ................................. 9
Extended-length Core Barrel Handling Procedures With
Aluminum Inner Barrels ................................. 10
Makeup Procedure for Outer Barrel ...................... 10
Makeup Procedure for Inner Barrel ...................... 11
Breakout of Inner Barrels ................................. 12
Laying Down and Cutting of Inner Barrel ........... 12
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Laying Down Outer Barrel ................................ 13
Change Out Corehead ........................................... 14
Equipment Servicing and Maintenance ................................ 14
Coring Guidelines ................................................................ 14
Operating Parameters ........................................... 14
Core Barrel Operations ........................................... 17
Core Barrel Fishing Procedures ........................................... 19
Chapter 16
Stuck Pipe and Fishing Operations
Causes of Stuck Pipe ...................................................... 4
Differential Sticking ........................................... 4
Inadequate Hole Cleaning ........................................... 4
Reactive Formations ........................................... 4
Key Seating ................................................................. 5
Under-gauge Hole and BHA Changes ...................... 5
Mobile Salt Formations ........................................... 5
Prevention of Stuck Pipe ...................................................... 5
General ................................................................. 5
Differential Sticking ............................................ 6
Inadequate Hole Cleaning ................................. 6
Reactive Formations ............................................ 7
Key Seating ................................................................. 8
Under-gauge Hole and BHA Changes ...................... 8
Freeing Stuck Pipe ................................................................. 8
General ................................................................. 8
Differential Sticking ...................................................... 9
Soluble Formations ...................................................... 10
Key Seating ................................................................. 10
Stuck Casing ................................................................. 11
Methods of Locating Stuck Point ............................................ 11
Stretch Method ....................................................... 11
Free Point Indicator Tool Method ....................... 12
Fishing Operations .................................................................. 12
Fishing Economics ....................................................... 12
Fishing Tools - Standard Wellsite Inventory ............ 13
Standard Practices ............................................ 14
Stuck Logging Tools ............................................ 16
Back-off Procedures ............................................ 16
Milling Operations ............................................ 18
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Chapter 17
Evaluation (Will be provided later) ............................................ 1
Chapter 18
Well Abandonment and Suspension
Well Abandonment ....................................................... 2
General .................................................................. 2
Openhole Plugback ....................................................... 2
Cased-hole Plugback ............................................ 2
Perforated Casing Plugback ................................. 3
Standard Practices When Setting Plugs ................................. 3
Well Suspension ................................................................. 4
General ................................................................. 4
Well Suspension General Procedure ...................... 4
Chapter 19
Reporting and Documentation
Reporting ............................................................................. 2
General .................................................................. 2
Drilling Information Management System
(DIMS) Data Base .................................. 2
Documentation .................................................................. 2
General .................................................................. 2
Daily Drilling Report ............................................. 3
IADC Report ........................................................ 3
Mud and Stock Reports ............................................. 4
Casing/Cementing Reports .................................. 4
Backcharge/Lost in Hole Report .................................. 4
API Mud Report ....................................................... 4
BHA Report ....................................................... 4
Geology Report ....................................................... 4
Mud Logger Report ....................................................... 4
Directional Surveys Report .................................. 4
Bit Record .................................................................. 5
Fuel/Lube Transfer/Inventory Report ....................... 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Chapter 20
Rig Mobilization/Demobilization
Rig Mobilization ................................................................. 2
General ................................................................. 2
Land Rig ................................................................. 2
Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit (MODU) ...................... 2
Platform Rig ................................................................. 3
Other Contractor Equipment ................................. 4
Rig Demobilization ................................................................. 4
General ................................................................. 4
Land Rig ................................................................. 4
Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit (MODU) ...................... 4
Platform Rig ................................................................. 5
Other Contractor Equipment ................................. 5
Towing ............................................................................ 5
General ................................................................. 5
Wet Tow ................................................................. 5
Dry Tow ................................................................. 6
Derrick Barge/Other Hoisting Equipment ...................... 7
General ................................................................. 7
Derrick Barge ....................................................... 7
Other Hoisting Equipment ............................................ 8
Chapter 21
Location/Surveys
Location ............................................................................. 2
General .................................................................. 2
Land Locations - General ............................................. 2
Land Locations - Desert ............................................. 2
Land Locations - Jungle/Wilderness ....................... 2
Offshore Location - Open Water .................................. 2
Offshore Location - Platform/Structure ........................ 3
Surveys ............................................................................. 3
General ................................................................... 3
Site - Land ................................................................... 4
Shallow Hazard/Sparker Survey - Offshore ............. 4
Site - Offshore ........................................................ 4
Site - Platform/Structure ............................................. 4
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Chapter 22
Testing
Testing ........................................................................... 2
General ................................................................. 2
DST Operations ...................................................... 2
Extended Well Testing ........................................... 2
Chapter 23
Bits/Hole Openers/Underreamers
Bits ...................................................................................... 2
General ................................................................. 2
Rock Bits - Mill Tooth ............................................ 2
Rock Bits - Insert ....................................................... 3
Polycrystalline Diamond (PDC) Bits ....................... 3
Diamond Bits ....................................................... 5
Other - Coring, etc. Bits ............................................. 6
Operational Procedures ............................................. 6
Hole Openers .................................................................. 11
General .................................................................. 11
Types .................................................................. 11
Underreamers .................................................................. 13
General .................................................................. 13
Types .................................................................. 14
Chapter 24
Logistics (Will be provided later) ............................................ 1
Chapter 25
Wellhead Equipment
Wellhead Equipment ....................................................... 3
Surface Wellhead Equipment ............................................ 3
General .................................................................. 3
SOW/Braden Head ....................................................... 3
Casing Spools/Casing Hanger .................................. 4
Tubing Head/Tubing Hanger .................................. 5
Xmas Tree .................................................................. 6
Subsea Wellhead Equipment ............................................. 7
General .................................................................. 7
Temporary Guide Base ............................................. 7
Permanent Guide Base ............................................. 8
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
(Continued)
Wellhead Housing ....................................................... 8
Casing Hangers/Seal Assemblies ....................... 9
Running Procedures/Testing Tools ....................... 10
Abandonment Caps ............................................ 10
Subsea Xmas Trees ............................................ 11
Mudline Suspension Equipment ............................................ 12
General .................................................................. 12
Buttweld Sub ....................................................... 12
Casing Hanger ....................................................... 12
Running Procedures ............................................ 13
Abandonment Caps/Tie-back Reentry ....................... 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
1.1 Halliburton Field Organization Chart
1.2 Halliburton Drilling Project Manager
1.3 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Drilling Engineer
1.4 Halliburton Materials Superintendent
1.5 Rig Contractor’s Superintendent
1.6 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor
1.7 Rig Contractor Senior Representative
1.8 Halliburton Wellsite Drilling Engineer
1.9 Halliburton and Other Service Company Personnel
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 7 Responsibilities
1.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
Represented below is a typical organization chart. Actual relationship will be defined on a

project by project basis.
1.1 Halliburton Drilling Organization Chart
Client
Halliburton Drilling
Project Manager
Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Halliburton Materials

Drilling Engineer Superintendent
Rig Contractor Office

Superintendent
Rig Contractor
Senior
Halliburton Drilling Field
Supervisor
Representative
Halliburton Wellsite Halliburton Service

Other Rig Other Service
Drilling Engineer Company
Crew Personnel Companies
(if applicable) Specialists & Crew
__________________________________________________________________________
Responsibilities Page 2 of 7 August 1995
1.2 Halliburton Drilling Project Manager

The Halliburton Drilling Project Manager is located at the operations base/office and has
overall responsibility for management of the drilling operation for the client’s project.
The Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator reports to the Halliburton Drilling Project

Manager. Additionally, the base and materials control functions are coordinated by the
Halliburton Materials Superintendent which reports to the Halliburton Drilling Project
Manager.
The Drilling Project Manager supports Halliburton policies and reviews and approves
proposed changes to the well program, as necessary.
Coordinates with the Client and administers Halliburton’s contractual obligations for the
drilling phase of the Client’s project.
Maintains familiarity with the aims and objectives of the well, permit requirements and
liaisons with the Exploration department and the client for any necessary changes in the
well program.
1.3 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Drilling Engineer

The Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator is located at the operations base/office and reports
to the Halliburton Project Manager.
His primary responsibilities are:
• Coordinates project requirements with operational requirements of the rig site.

Implements drilling program and recommends actions or proposed changes to the well
program.
• Coordinates response to emergency situations at the rig site (informs local government
authorities, etc.).
• Enforces Halliburton operating policies and recommends modifications to this policy
when necessary.
• Visit site as necessary and to audit rig and third parties safety/efficiency and contract
compliance.
1.4 Halliburton Materials Superintendent

The Halliburton Materials Superintendent is located at the operations base and works
closely with the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor/Drilling IS Coordinator/Project Team
(admin, finance, etc.)
The Materials Superintendent is responsible for the timely procurement and shipping of all
equipment and materials to the rig site as required. He also administers the warehousing
__________________________________________________________________________
facilities and necessary personnel for material shipments and ensures an accurate stock
control system.
He is also responsible for ensuring that all local materials related regulatory requirement
are met and inspection certificates, special documentation (eg. explosive goods
movements) DOT plackarding MSDS sheets and customs requirements are correct and
included with the materials to be sent to the rig site. He liaisons with the Drilling IS
Coordinator and the Drilling Supervisor to ensure timely delivery of equipment and
materials. The Materials Superintendent must authorize all shipments from service
companies and suppliers to the supply base.
1.5 Rig Contractor’s Superintendent

The Rig Contractor’s Superintendent is the overall Rig Contractor representative at the
local office level and must ensure that all necessary drilling contractor personnel under his
supervision are familiar with, and comply with, Halliburton's drilling practices and well
control policies. This should be regarded as a minimum standard.
It is the Rig Superintendent's duty to report directly to the Halliburton Drilling is
Coordinator at the operations base/office on all aspects of the drilling operations under his
responsibility.
It is the responsibility of the Rig Superintendent to insure that:
• To ensure that all drilling and well control equipment is in working order, regularly
maintained and properly tested to the requirements of Halliburton and that sufficient
spares and back-up materials are available at the rig site to ensure the continuous
integrity of all equipment.
• To ensure that all rig crews receive adequate training to enable them to carry out their
jobs safely and efficiently.
• Handle other items relating to the contractor’s equipment and labor.
1.6 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor

The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor is the senior designated Halliburton representative at
the rig site, and is responsible to his line manager (Drilling IS Coordinator) at the
Halliburton base/office. The Drilling Supervisor is responsible for program execution at
the wellsite. Where a Drilling IS Coordinator is not required, the Drilling Engineer will
fulfill his duties, and thus be the line manager to the Drilling Supervisor.
The Drilling Supervisor supervises the overall operation at the rig site, to ensure personnel
and equipment perform the tasks required in a safe, cost effective and Halliburton accepted
method. He is the only Halliburton representative who can authorize written detailed
instructions (derived from the drilling program) to the Rig Contractor’s responsible
representative at the field site.
During periods when no drilling related (ie, well testing) activity occurs, the Halliburton
nominated specialists advise the Drilling Supervisor. Overall supervision of the rig site
__________________________________________________________________________
remains with the Drilling Supervisor who will coordinate activity and request actions from
Halliburton and other contractors. The Drilling IS Coordinator must ensure that all parties
realize their responsibility to report all relevant details to the Drilling Supervisor during
these periods.
The Drilling Supervisor maintains communication with the Halliburton operations
base/office via accurate and concise daily verbal and written reporting of relevant rig site
events.
The Drilling Supervisor must ensure the well program is followed as closely as practicable,
without compromising Halliburton policies. Where the Drilling Supervisor feels that a
change is appropriate, the Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator must be contacted prior to
the change, unless an immediate decision is absolutely necessary.
Generally, all activities such as personnel movement, materials movement and cooperation
between the various groups of both the Rig Contractor’s, Halliburton’s service companies
and other service company’s personnel are coordinated and facilitated by the Drilling
Supervisor
The Drilling Supervisor personally supervises critical rig operations. He is assisted by the
rig site Drilling Engineer.
1.7 Rig Contractor Senior Representative

The Rig Contractor Senior Representative is the Rig Contractor primary representative at
the rig site and must ensure that all necessary drilling contractor personnel are familiar
with, and comply with, Halliburton's drilling practices and well control policies. These
should be regarded as a minimum standard.
The Rig Contractor Senior Representative consults with the Drilling Supervisor on all
aspects of the drilling operations under his responsibility. He reports to the Rig
Contractor’s Superintendent.
It is the responsibility of the Rig Contractor Senior Representatives:
• That all drilling and well control equipment is in working order, regularly maintained
and properly tested to Halliburton’s specifications.
• To ensure that the drilling plan is carried out safely and efficiently by the contractor’s
rig personnel.
1.8 Halliburton Wellsite Drilling Engineer

A Halliburton wellsite Drilling Engineer will normally only be required for critical or high
risk wells. The primary function of the Wellsite Drilling Engineer is to plan for near-term
operations, identify opportunities for improving operations, forecast upcoming events and
assist in maximizing drilling efficiency.
__________________________________________________________________________
The Wellsite Drilling Engineer will finalize plans for near-term operations such as casing
and cement jobs and up coming hole sections. In finalizing near-term operational plans, the
Wellsite Drilling Engineer will seek input from the Drilling Supervisor, the Rig Contractor
Senior Representative, Halliburton and other service company personnel and relevant office
based personnel. As a means of maximizing communication between key service personnel
involved with near-term operations, the Wellsite Drilling Engineer will coordinate and chair
wellsite planning meetings. Finalized plans will generally be distributed in a written format
to key wellsite personnel in accordance with relevant document release procedures.
Upon completion of key operations (casing and cementing, directional drilling, coring,
logging jobs, etc.) the Wellsite Drilling Engineer will generally provide a written
engineering assessment of the job which identifies opportunities for improvement and
optimization. This assessment should include input from the Drilling Supervisor, the Rig
Contractor Senior Representative as well as key wellsite service company personnel. This
assessment should be sent to relevant office based personnel involved with drilling
operations planning.
The Wellsite Drilling Engineer should develop and maintain a 48 to 96 hour forecast of
upcoming operations. In developing this forecast, the Drilling Engineer should receive
input from the Drilling Supervisor, the Rig Contractor Senior Representative and key
wellsite service personnel.
As required, the Wellsite Drilling Engineer will assist the Drilling Supervisor in maximizing
drilling efficiency. Depending on the well type, maximizing drilling efficiency might include
conducting drill-off tests, assessing wellbore cleaning programs, correlating offset
information to the current well, plotting leak-off tests, assessing mud properties, QA/QC of
directional surveys, monitoring wellbore collision avoidance efforts, assessing pore
pressure trends, performing casing and cementing calculations, performing squeeze and
remedial cementing calculations and analyzing logs.
The Drilling Supervisor and Wellsite Drilling Engineer should work together to ensure that
operational tasks are carried out at the wellsite. Depending on the area and well type,
these tasks might include:
1. Generating daily drilling reports.
2. Calculating daily and accumulative well costs.
3. Plotting drilling trends, i.e. days vs. depth, mud properties, torque and drag trends,
inclinations and azimuth, doglegs, connection and trip gas trends, etc.
4. Maintaining well control trip margins.
5. Ensuring that trip sheets are properly fill out by the driller.
__________________________________________________________________________
6. Recording slow circulating rates, BOP tests and BOP drills.

7. Maintaining POB reports.
8. Completing operational reports and returning these to the office as soon as practically
possible. Depending on the area and well type, these reports might include: final casing
tallies, primary casing cementation report, directional surveys, bit report, daily mud sheet,
mud logging report, geological report, IADC report, BHA form, and solids control report.
9. Documenting accidental drilling discharges (e.g., mud, cement, fuel, waste water
discharges) and forwarding discharge reports to relevant office personnel as soon as
practically possible
10. Filling out accident and incident reports and forwarding to relevant office personnel. as
soon as practically possible.
11. For development wells, ensuring that anti-collision scans are conducted in accordance
with collision avoidance procedures and polices.
12. Maintaining a current list of all Halliburton owned, rental and consignment equipment
at the rig site is maintained
13. Maintaining an accurate record of rig site stocks.
14. Organizing a filing system of pertinent information. Such information would include:
• Current well file, with sections on tubular tallies, cementing jobs, mud reports and
inventory, BOP and wellhead details, etc.
• Daily Drilling Report file.
• Material movements and cost (if required) file.
• Well Program (with current amendments, if applicable).
• Communications In and Out file.
• Technical/Procedures information (liner hanger procedures etc) for relevant equipment.
• Documentation of suggested operational improvements.
1.9 Halliburton and Other Service Company Personnel

Halliburton and other service company personnel at the rig site are directly responsible to
the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor.
All service company personnel are to coordinate their required services and equipment and
perform their tasks in the well program in a safe and cost efficient manner. These personnel
must advise the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor on planning and execution of their services
and obtain approval from the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should changes be necessary.
All service company personnel are also responsible for maintaining adequate stocks of their
materials and equipment, including back-up equipment if necessary, and advising the
Drilling Supervisor should additional re-stocking of materials be required.
__________________________________________________________________________
2.0 GENERAL DRILLING RIG SAFETY PRACTICES
2.1 SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY
2.1.1 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator
2.1.2 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor
2.1.3 Drilling Contractor’s Rig Superintendent/Senior Representative
2.2 Emergency Situations Response
2.2.1 Emergency Drills and Exercises
2.2.2 Emergency Situation Response and Procedures Plans (Rig Site)
2.2.3 Emergency Situation Response and Procedures Plans (Halliburton

Office)
2.3 Incident/Accident Reporting and Follow Up Procedure
2.4 Safety Meetings
2.5 Permit to Work System
2.6 Rig Component and Equipment Safety Requirements
2.6.1 General
2.6.2 Derrick
2.6.3 Drawworks, Rotary, Hose, Swivel, Kelly
2.6.4 Crown Block, Traveling Block, Hook, Drilling line
2.6.5 Slips
2.6.6 Tongs
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 36 General Drilling Rig Safety Practices
2.6.7 Spinning Chain
2.6.8 Iron Roughneck
2.6.9 Elevators
2.6.10 Air Hoist/Tugger
2.6.11 Pumps
2.6.12 Mud Pits
2.6.13 Sack Store/ Chemical Storage Area
2.6.14 Electrical Installations
2.6.15 Well Control
2.6.15.1 Diverter Drilling
2.6.15.2 Blow Out Preventer Equipment and Procedures
2.6.15.3 BOP Control System
2.6.15.4 Pressure Testing
2.6.16 Drilling Lifting Equipment Certification and Inspection
2.7 General Rig Working Practices
2.7.1 Well Servicing
2.7.1.1 General
2.7.1.2 Cementing
2.7.1.3 Hydraulic Fracturing
2.7.1.4 Acidization
2.7.1.5 Procedures and Requirements for using Nitrogen
__________________________________________________________________________
General Drilling Rig Safety Practices Page 2 of 36 August 1995
2.7.2 Safe Practices in Handling/ Mixing Chemicals
2.7.3 Radioactive Materials Handling and Procedures
2.7.4 Explosives Utilization
2.7.5 Hydrogen Sulfide Safety, General
2.7.5.1 Well Planning and Equipment Requirements for H 2S wells
2.7.5.2 H2S Monitoring and Alarms Systems
2.7.5.3 Breathing Apparatus and General Safety Equipment
2.7.5.4 H2S Drills
2.7.5.5 H2S Alarm States and Actions
2.7.6 Shale Shakers
2.7.7 Mud Pump and Mud Pits
2.7.8 Drill Floor and Catwalk
2.7.9 Derrick, Monkey Board and Stabbing Board
2.7.10 Cranes and Pipe Rack area
2.7.11 General Policy for Mechanical and Electrical Work
2.8 Tool and Equipment Utilization
2.8.1 Hand Tools
2.8.2 Hammers
2.8.3 Power Tools
2.8.4 Air Tools
2.8.5 Electric Tools
__________________________________________________________________________
2.8.6 Rigging Practices
2.9 DRILLING SITE PREPARATION (TYPICAL-LAND)
__________________________________________________________________________
2.0 GENERAL DRILLING RIG SAFETY PRACTICES

Halliburton policy is that Safety considerations are of primary importance in all phases of
the drilling operation. It also states that HES adheres to all local regulations regarding
safety and will as a minimum standard adopt industry standard good working practice.
2.1 Safety Responsibility

It is the responsibility of all drilling operations related personnel to conduct operations in a
safe manner. It is the responsibility of the Contractor’s Senior Representative and
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor that this is understood and complied with at the rig site.
2.1.1 Halliburton Drilling Coor dinator

High Drilling Department safety standards are achieved by a well managed and trained
personnel using properly selected and maintained equipment according to the planned
drilling program. Proper planning and good communications are vital if this goal is to be
achieved. It is the responsibility of the Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator/Drilling
Coordinator to achieve this in a cost effective way.
The Drilling Coordinator is directly responsible for high standards of safety at the rig site
and shall:
• Develop the safety program and specify targets for improvement. This would include
improved contingency planning and continued training.
• Monitor and review safety performance and issues, in conjunction with other
department heads.
• Inform and encourage subordinates to ensure sincere commitment to safety throughout
the whole operation.
• Personally audit the rig site safety performance, in conjunction with Rig Contractor
Safety Representative.
2.1.2 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor

The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor is responsible for implementation of company safety
policy and government regulations at the rig site. The following are some of the
responsibilities of the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor:
• All employees receive safety introduction upon arrival at the well site and are further
instructed by their supervisor while working.
• Contingency plans are tested thoroughly and drills and are fully understood.
• Injury to personnel is prevented by inspections, hazard identification and the use of safe
working practices.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Damage to equipment and the environment is prevented through inspections, hazard

identification and the use of safe working practices.
• If hazards are identified, then corrective action is taken immediately.
• That the correct safety equipment for the job is being used by all personnelall
at times.
• That all accidents and/or incidents are reported and audited.
• A permit to work system operates for all Non-routine hazardous work.
• Safety meetings are conducted on a daily basis and minute recorded. Briefer, in-situ
safety meetings including Halliburton, Rig Contractor and service company personnel
involved, should be held prior to any non-routine operation.
2.1.3 Drilling Rig Contractor’s Superintendent / Senior Representative

The Rig Contractor’s Superintendent/Senior Representative ensures that the line of
responsibility dictated by seniority amongst the rig crew functions to ensure drilling and
associated operations are conducted in a way which protects the health and safety of
personnel and the immediate surrounding environment. To this end he must :
• Instruct his subordinates with respect to work methods and ensure they follow a similar
method with their subordinates.
• Follow the Halliburton Safety policies and procedures (as set out in this document and
any other relevant documents which are noted by Halliburton) and implement his own
companies procedures.
• Conduct investigations into recordable incidents, suggest and implement
methods/practices to avoid re-occurrence and ensure all required documentation is
completed properly and distributed correctly.
• Act as chairman for the regular safety meetings.
• Ensure that regular rig equipment safety checks are properly conducted and that any
other ad-hoc required work (required by regulatory authorities) is completed in
reasonable time and to the proper standards.
2.2 Emergency Situations Response
2.2.1 Emergency Drills and Exercises

Drills are for the purpose of training personnel, demonstrating their ability to act effectively
in the simulated situation and testing the equipment used. They must be conducted safely,
and to this end are never held without notice of intent. As far as possible, they must involve
all available personnel on the rig site. Drill types conducted at the rig site are as follows:
• Well Kick/Pit drill

• Fire drills (including fire team Breathing Apparatus drills)
__________________________________________________________________________
• H2S drills
• Stretcher/Medical emergency drills
It is Halliburton’s, the Rig Contractor’s and all service company’s responsibility to ensure
that the pre-requisite training is supplied for its own personnel. For example, all rig
personnel will be trained in basic fire fighting, and rig contractor pre-designated fire teams
will have specific training, including team leadership etc. Examples of other required
training include Well Control certification for Rig Superintendent, Senior Contractor
Representative, Drillers and Assistant Drillers.
Drills reflect possible emergency scenarios and will thus reflect the contingency plan for
that scenario. The frequency of drills will depend on crew efficiency, but at least one drill
type per tower will be conducted. Specific drills will be conducted when possible hazards
are prognosed on a well (i.e. prior to the penetration of an 2H
S zones).
A Drill Efficiency Report must be compiled on the emergency drills and exercises
completed and returned to the Halliburton and Rig Contractors bases. This report will
record speed and ability assessments, along with specific notes on points which need
improvement, and the success with which previous points have been addressed. A note of
the type and quality/duration of drill must be entered on the IADC Daily Drilling Report.
Drills are not confined solely to the rig site, as specific responses to emergencies require
demonstrated capability at the Contractor’s and Halliburton base/office. The contingency
response at the base requires demonstration and testing in the same way that it does at the
rig site and is of equal importance in support of the rig operation.
2.2.2 Emergency Situation Response and Procedures Plan s (Rig Site)

Site specific major emergency response plans for fire/explosion, toxic gas/material release
(environment impacting incident) , well control, medical emergency, rig evacuation shall be
available at the rig site. They describe the incident, and the organization and response of
teams which deal with it. The plan is conceived and put in place jointly by the Drilling
Contractor and Halliburton.
A list of personnel for the rig site to contact (the order in which to contact them) and the
format and content of the contact must be clearly defined for each situation. It is
particularly important that the instructions with respect to reporting the category of
emergency are specific and defined, and that immediate contact with the base is made
regardless of time etc. It is recommended that a decision tree be constructed to guide the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor and Rig Contractor representatives as to what actions are
required for each emergency situation, with respect to contacting the base (note that the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor may be a consultant).
A list of names and numbers of phone/radio contacts (local hospital, company doctor,
materials/transport expediter, local government authorities, on-call weekend manager,
drilling IS Coordinator, service company contacts, etc.) relevant to emergencies are to be
updated as required.
__________________________________________________________________________
2.2.3 Emergency Response and Procedures Plan (Halliburton’s Office)

An emergency procedures plan detailing the planned response to all likely emergencies by
the Halliburton office personnel must be set in place prior to commencement of operations.
This plan details personnel responsibilities, substitute personnel, actions required and
formats of details required to fulfill company policy requirements and government
legislative requirements. The following points must be addressed:
• communications protocol, communications equipment and personnel, emergency

situation communications logging, referral of vital and non-vital calls.
• office personnel responsibilities
• emergency situation actions check lists for various requirements (provision of supplies
and transport, provision of emergency personnel and administrative facilities, provision
of emergency services and contacts in the field of safety and environment, authority for
notification of outside organizations, etc. by Halliburton management).
• emergency situation log format (time and actions taken, by whom, et al.).
2.3 Incident/Accident Reporting and Follow Up Procedures

Within this document, an incident is considered to be an event which could have caused
injury or illness. An accident is an event which did cause injury or illness (of whatever
magnitude). Both incidents and accidents are reportable to Halliburton.
The minimum required reporting format is that which meets local government and Rig
Contractor regulations. The Company will review this procedure. The Accident/Incident
Report form must contain the following:
• Rig location, time and date of accident or incident.

• Number of injuries/fatalities/personnel involved, if any.
• Type of accident/incident.
• Job title of personnel involved.
• Medical injuries sustained and cause of death if applicable.
• Details of the accident/incident including; what the person was doing immediately prior
to the incident, if the work was/was not conducted under the permit to work system,
how it happened, where it happened, the surrounding environmental conditions
(lighting, sea state, etc.), any contributory factors, independent eye witness statement,
if available or applicable.
• Corrective action taken
The report form must be completed as soon as practically possible and forwarded to the
Halliburton offices within 48 hours (preferably by secure fax ASAP and also by post).
A monthly summary of safety statistics should be compiled and forwarded by the Rig
Contractor, and consists of the following:
__________________________________________________________________________
• Number of personnel assigned to the rig and man hours worked

• Number of Fatalities, (if any), lost time accidents, incidents requiring medical attention
but not lost time accidents, Number of days away from work resulting from lost time
accidents etc.
A request to the Rig Contractor for compiled safety statistics of this type and in this format
can be used to assess his safety record. This may be incorporated in the Invitation to
Tender documentation, or requested prior to the finalization of a contract, and would assist
in rig selection evaluation criteria.
2.4 Safety Meetings

Three types of safety meetings are recognized:
1. Regular (normally each tour) Safety Meeting, held for all available crew and probably
after a Safety Drill (as topics arising from the drill may be on the agenda). The meeting
will review any recent accidents/incidents and encourage personnel to continually
"audit" their own particular work area as well as the overall rig. All meetings should
encourage two way interactions between Rig Supervisors and crew and should
particularly encourage Halliburton, the Rig Contractor’s and all service personnel to
take part. Personnel should be encouraged to express concerns and make suggestions.
As some personnel may not wish to express concerns and suggestions openly at the
meeting, they should be invited to forward these in writing to the Rig
Superintendent/Senior Contractor Representative.
The regular safety meeting will be led by a line supervisor and minutes will be taken by
a responsible person. The minutes will be approved by the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor and the Contractor’s Rig Superintendent/Senior Representative and
returned to Halliburton’s/Rig Contractor’s offices.
2. Operational Safety Meetings, held prior to a specific operation (e.g. casing running) for
the crew involved, to outline requirements and issues specific to the operation.
3. "On the Spot" Safety Meetings. These may be called by a responsible line supervisor
(e.g. Driller on the drill floor) to immediately correct an unsafe practice. These
meetings should bebrief but directed at educating personnel.
Note that the instigator must ensure the work area is made safe prior to the meeting
and that monitoring of the suspended activity is maintained during the meeting.
2.5 Permit to Work System

A permit to work system shall be administered by the Rig Contractor and endorsed by
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor for work such as hot work, confined space entry, explosive
handling, radioactive materials handling etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
The individual responsible for the permit system shall review, co-ordinate and monitor the
system. He shall have access to information and equipment enabling him to instruct the
applicant on required safety actions, such as occupational safety instructions on elevated
work areas, etc.
The permit shall specify what type of work is to be conducted, where it will be conducted,
when it will start, how long it should take, and details of precautions to be taken. The
permit will only last up to the end of the tour of the individual who applied for the permit
(normally maximum 12 hours) and is definitely not transferable. Once work has been
completed, the permit must be returned to the permit system administrator, so that
restrictions on other activities placed into effect to enable the work to be carried out, may
be lifted.
The supervisor responsible for the system shall confirm that the work has been
satisfactorily completed and that the work area has been left in a safe condition. All
documentation shall be retained for at least 12 months.
Under the control of hazardous energy sources, a Lock Out/ Tag Out procedure shall be
operated. The system prevents injuries due to the unexpected energization, start-up or
release of stored energy during the service or maintenance of equipment. It shall be
administered via the supervisor responsible for the permit to work system, as part of the
permit system.
2.6RIG COMPONENT AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The intent of this section is to provide general safety guidelines for familiarization purposes
and in no way supersedes the rig contractors safety standards or is intended to be
comprehensive in scope.
2.6.1 General
As rig equipment varies, the following may or may not be directly applicable to the
Contractor’s rig. However, the Rig Superintendent should ensure that equivalent safety
requirements are applied to the actual equipment on the rig.
On the rig, the Rig Contractor’s drilling crew are responsible for drilling operations and
maintenance of all components of the rig. A regular Preventative Maintenance Schedule
conducted by the rig contractor is considered to be an essential part of this activity, and is
the responsibility of the Rig Contractor Superintendent/Senior Representative and his
specialist crew (Rig Mechanic, Rig Electrician etc.). This schedule should be logged in
such a way that the Rig Contractor Superintendent/Senior Representative can easily check
the status of maintenance required, when it is next due, who conducted it last etc.
A regular inspection, weekly or more frequent if necessary, should be carried out by the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor and Rig Contractor’s Superintendent/Senior
Representative, preferably together, and would inspect the following:
• Personal protective equipment.

__________________________________________________________________________
• BOP equipment and controls.

• Lifting equipment and hoisting gear.
• Walkways, handrails, guards, ladders, gratings and loose covers.
• Warning signs and notices.
• First aid and medical facilities.
• Communications equipment and capabilities.
• Emergency response equipment.
2.6.2 Derrick
After raising a derrick, it must be visually inspected as per API Std 4E/ IADC Drilling
Manual Section L3. It should then be checked on a regular basis, and after any shock
loading due to jarring or working on stuck pipe.
Periodic checks on the verticality (plumb) of the derrick and the centrality of the rotary
table over the hole should be made to prevent eccentric loading causing derrick failure. The
integrity of the foundations should also be monitored and maintained.
Supporting lines (Guy lines) shall be installed as required by the derrick manufacturer, or
according to the API standard 4E for land based operations.
A well constructed pipe racking support designed to completely enclose the pipe. Pipe
racking fingers should have safety lines attached and secured to prevent any finger from
falling should it be broken off.
Stands of pipe should be tied back in the fingerboard as they are racked so that it does not
shift because of wind pressure or other reasons and cause unnecessary strain on the derrick
or mast.
An auxiliary means of escape is required from the principal inside derrick platform of a
standard derrick. This auxiliary means of escape should be a specially rigged line that an
employee can use if a blowout or other emergency should cut off his escape by way of the
derrick ladder. Escape lines should be located and secured to a clear area. Escape lines
typically lead from the derrick or mast to form an angle no greater than 45 degrees with
the ground. The lines need substantial anchoring, because force at the derrick and anchor
ends is very great when a large mass, such as a descending Derrickman, is suspended at
midpoint.
Every derrick should be equipped with a ladder or ladders to provide access from the rig
floor to the derrick platform and to each intervening derrick platform. No ladder should
lean backwards from the vertical. All ladders are to have guard rails.
Platforms should be provided inside the derrick at each elevation where any employee is
normally required to handle pipe or other equipment that is racked in the derrick. The
working edge of inside platforms should have sufficient clearance for reasonably safe
passage of the traveling block, and it should permit the employee who works on the
platform to work with the elevator safely. Inside derrick platforms (except the monkey
__________________________________________________________________________
board) should completely cover the space from the working edge back to the derrick
frame. The monkey board and other platforms should be secured to the derrick with bolts
or equivalent fastenings in order to resist shifting or accidental dislodging.
A climbing belt with counterbalance weight is recommended for derrickmen to assist in
ascending to the work station. Such devices may be equipped with a friction element to
prevent rapid descent.
Current practice dictates that no one work at any level above 2m or 6 ft without wearing a
derrick safety belt, complete with shoulder harness, with a lifeline no longer than 1.5 or 5 ft
securely fastened to both the belt and the derrick or mast.
Derrick safety belts and inertia reel lifelines should be maintained in good condition. They
should be carefully inspected at regular intervals, and damaged belts or lines replaced
immediately. Derrick safety belts should be adjusted by the wearer to fit as comfortably as
possible. The lifeline, whose minimum thickness should be 5/8 inch, is nylon or braided
rope and should be securely fastened to some part of the derrick in a way that allows the
worker to move as required but to have no excess slack.
Prior to operation, the stabbing board must be checked for operation and safety. The check
list should include the hoisting system, safety stops, emergency brake and safety
harness/harness mooring point. As good visual contact between Driller and stabbing board
are vital during the casing/tubing running operation, obstructions must be removed.
2.6.3 Drawworks, Rotary, Hose, Swivel, Kelly

Drawworks and rotary should not have exposed keyways or keys that could catch clothing.
Drawworks and rotary gears should be enclosed by well constructed metal guards; it is
important that these guards be in place any time the machinery is in motion. Operating
levers must be clearly marked.
The drawworks should be regularly and rigorously inspected for component wear,
operability of safety features (e.g. cooling water pressure indicator), etc. The manual and
automatic operation of the Crown-O-Matic should also be verified daily.
The standpipe end of a drilling or rotary hose should be securely fastened to the derrick by
a cable of not less than 5/8 inch diameter or by a wire of not less than 1/2 inch thick and a
clamp arrangement on the hose. The swivel end of hose should be secured by a similar
clamp and wire rope or chain arrangement attached to the body of the swivel. The cable or
chain should not be attached to the swivel gooseneck.
An air powered kelly spinner is a safer device to turn the kelly when making a connection
than is a spinning chain and is recommended. It produces a more positive turning action,
requires no physical labor, and can turn the kelly without the aid of the Floormen. In case
of a well kick, with mud flowing from inside the drill pipe, a kelly spinner can be used to
make up the kelly in the drill pipe quickly despite the flying mud.
For the inspection schedule of individual components of lifting equipment, refer to Section
2.6.16, 'Drilling Lifting Equipment Certification and Inspection'.
__________________________________________________________________________
2.6.4 Crown Block, Traveling Block, Hook, Drilling Line

Crown block assemblies on standard derricks should be securely bolted in place; the
bearing caps should be firmly bolted to prevent the sheaves from jumping out of the
housings and falling. The sheaves of every traveling block should be guarded with suitable
heavy metal nip point guards, designed to enclose the sheaves. The sheave groove should
be checked for tolerance/wear.
Traveling block sheave guards should be securely fastened to the block and arranged to
prevent an employee's hand from being drawn into the nip point, where the hoisting line
begins contact with the sheaves. Wooden bumper blocks should be installed under the
water table at the crown to prevent possible damage to sheaves or drilling line if the
traveling block is raised too high. The Crown-O-Matic (as previously mentioned) must be
operable. An audio and visual sign must alarm immediately prior to the Crown-O-Matic
operating, to warn the Driller that further raising the traveling block will cause the crown-
o-matic to operate, thus setting the brake (bringing the break handle down rapidly, which
has caused accidents in the past).
Every drilling hook should be equipped with a well constructed and securely fastened
safety latch or other device to prevent the load from being disengaged from the hook.
The drilling hook latches should be in the closed position while round trips are being made.
Safety latches on hooks should be firmly closed and locked so that a jar from the elevator
links cannot drive a latch aside and unhook the links. Manufacturers wear limit
recommendations should be checked on a regular basis for the hook assembly (e.g. elevator
link and link ear contact surface radii).
The kelly should remain in the rathole until the hook has been made secure in the swivel
bail in order to prevent the kelly bail from unhooking while lifting or lowering the swivel
and kelly.
The drilling line should be smoothly wrapped on the hoisting drum to ensure even spooling.
The end of the drilling line should be secured to the hoisting drum with a clamp fastener
equal in strength to at least the breaking strength of the line. The drill line should be
frequently inspected for worn or broken wires due to corrosion or other damage and
monitoring of ton miles for regular slip and cut must be conducted by a contractor
nominated employee. A hoisting line under load should not be permitted to be in direct
contact with any derrick member or stationary equipment. A suitable number of wraps
should remain on the drawworks drum to stop shock loading of the clamping device. The
required number of turns is noted in the manufacturers manual.
Hoisting lines (refer to API RP 9B) should be anchored on the dead end by means of a
cylinder or drum around which two or more turns can be made before the end of the line is
clamped by an arrangement at least equal in strength to the breaking strength of the line.
Suitable bolts or retainers should be provided to keep the deadline loops on the anchor
from jumping off if slack develops. The hook-load monitoring system (hydraulic) should be
regularly checked at the deadline load cell, and the measuring device (e.g. Martin Decker
indicator, with the correct number of lines on the block being indicated).
__________________________________________________________________________
2.6.5 Slips
Slips should not be kicked into place as this may result in damage to the drill pipe. Drill
pipe slips must be maintained in good condition and used on the size of pipe that they fit.
Worn slips may permit the pipe to drop, with subsequent damage to the pipe and hazard to
the employees. Mis-fitting slips may gouge, scar or otherwise damage the pipe.
Slip handles should be short enough so that they do not project beyond the inner edge of
the metal step around the top outer edge of the rotary table when the slips are in position
to hold the pipe in the rotary table. The rotary drive bushing should also be checked for
wear as this can reduce effectiveness of slips.
Air powered slips are safest to use and less apt to damage the drill pipe. They eliminate the
physical exertion of pulling and setting the slips when tripping the drill stem. Slips and dies
shall be frequently checked for wear and replaced when worn.
A dog collar must be securely fitted to support loads which may not be effectively
supported by slips, but should be removed if the item is to be racked back in the derrick..
Slip handles should be tied together if there is a likelihood of the pipe jumping and
releasing the slips (e.g. backing off).
2.6.6 Tongs
The use of tongs requires certain safety measures. Breakout and makeup tong counter
balance weights should be placed near the derrick leg and suspended above or beneath the
derrick floor. Vertical travel of about 2.5 of 8 ft should be provided, and guards should be
arranged to prevent crew members from accidental contact with lines or weights. The tong
counterbalance suspension lines etc. are classified as lifting devices and thus should be
regularly inspected and certified with color codes as slings/shackle pins etc.
Breakout and makeup tongs must be correct size, rating and snubbed with safety lines to
anchor posts attached to the substructure rather than to the derrick legs. Three cable
clamps must be used on the ends of each safety line. Safety lines should anchor the tongs
in such fashion that they cannot rotate completely around the drill pipe in the rotary. A
crew member caught within the arc of the handles can suffer serious injury. The safety
lines should be attached so as to permit handles of the tongs to have a wide angle when the
tongs are latched onto pipe in the rotary. Back-up posts should be regularly inspected, as
the consequences of failure are extremely serious.
Unless backup jaws are built in, power tongs should be equipped with safety lines similar to
those provided for regular tongs. Spinning tongs should be fitted with a safety line to hold
backup torque, whether making up or spinning out.
Air powered tongs are safer to operate than a spinning chain for making up drill pipe.
2.6.7 Spinning Chain

It is the policy of Halliburton not to use spinning chains unless absolutely necessary. If this
method of make-up and break-out is not normally used by the contractor, and no
__________________________________________________________________________
experienced person is available to throw the chain and operate the catheads, it will not be
done under any circumstances.
Spinning chains should be of the proper length, without surplus, and maintained in good
condition. The tail end should be provided with a short (16 inch) length of manila or nylon
rope to provide a handhold on the end of the chain and reduce the chance of hand and
finger injuries.
The tong end of the cathead chain should tighten when the tong lever is completely stroked
back ready to tighten the tool joint, leaving about four turns of the spinning chain on the
pipe. No one should be permitted to operate a spinning chain without first being
thoroughly instructed in its use.
Roller guards should be properly placed relative to the makeup or spinning cathead to
prevent the cathead chain from coming into contact with the Driller. The spinning line
guideposts should be mounted on lubricated bearings to ensure ease of rotation and to
minimize friction on the spinning line or chain. Spinning catheads should be adjusted to
provide the line pull required to proper tool joint makeup and for free release when
disengaged.
2.6.8 Iron Roughneck

The use of a iron roughneck for make-up and breakout of drill pipe is a much safer
operation than using conventional tongs. No dangerous safety lines are attached and all
clamping, rotating and holding of backup torque is an integral function of the system.
Jaws must be properly maintained to ensure there is no damage to the tool joints.
Operators of the roughneck must exercise care in correct placement of the jaws, closing of
the gates and keeping hands away from all moving parts. In particular, operators should
only attempt to close the jaw closest to them.
2.6.9 Elevators
Operations involving elevators is one of the major causes of accidents, with parts of the
body being trapped between pipe and elevator or in the elevator latch mechanism.
Elevators should be maintained in good condition (in accordance with API Standard 8A
and Recommended Practice 8B) and should be the right size and type for the drill pipe,
casing or tubing being handled. This should be physically checked by using a joint of pipe
and visually inspecting the elevator fit. The elevator hinge pin, hinge and latch mechanism
should be lubricated for ease of operation. Elevators bored for 18° shoulder pipe should
not be used for collar pipe, and vice versa.
Elevator links (bails) normally require very little maintenance except occasional lubrication
of the working surfaces between the links and the link arms.
Link arm wear should be checked by measuring the arm dimension supporting the links.
Also, elevators should be checked in line with the inspection of hoisting and lifting
__________________________________________________________________________
equipment policy, with MPI equipment for cracks or laminations. If the elevator bore is
worn excessively, the elevator should be reconditioned in the shop.
The elevator should be securely latched when a joint or stand of pipe is picked up, and the
Derrickman should be sure the latch has closed before allowing the pipe to swing toward
the rotary.
2.6.10 Air Hoist/Tugger

Air hoist pull capacity varies according to the effective pressure available, the number of
wraps on the drum, and the size of unit. Depending on the number of wraps on the drum,
air winch line pulls vary from about 0.5 tons or 1,000 lbs for a small unit to nominal pulls
of 5 tons or 10,000 lbs for the largest units.
For an air hoist, sometimes called a tugger, the usual wireline sizes are 1/2 inch for the
smaller units and 5/8 inch and 3/4 inch for the larger sizes. Heavy line pulls should not be
attempted when the drum is more than half full. When the hoisting line is spooled off the
drum, at least six wraps should be on the drum to avoid the line pulling out of the anchor
clamp on the drum.
Inspection of winches should address the following points:
• Check wire condition, looking for kinks, broken strands, flat spots, visible core, etc.
• Check condition of the wire termination (eye, condition and spacing of bulldog clips)
• Check condition and operation of the brake, rims and bands should be in good
condition and the brake linkage must operate freely.
• Check hook/safety catch/swivel
Air or hydraulic man riding winches should be provided with a guard over the drum to
prevent a crew member from being caught in the wireline. Such winches must be certified
for man riding. A tag indicating the winch as a man riding winch must be prominent on it,
and the SWL must also be displayed. The winch shall not have a free wheel capacity and
must operate with a fail safe brake.
2.6.11 Mud Pumps

Before any work is started on a mud pump, it shall be electrically (or
mechanically/hydraulically) isolated from its main power source by the Rig Electrician (or
Mechanic), and the local lock-out (of the DC motor of the mud pump, in the case of an
electrically powered pump) engaged. A notice must be hung, warning of maintenance in
progress. The pump shall also be hydraulically isolated from any feed, and the safety pop
off tripped.
2.6.12 Mud Pits

Steel mud pits or tanks should be provided with permanent stairs, walkways (gratings), and
handrails to permit access into the pit.
__________________________________________________________________________
Access into the pit will be conducted under the permit to work system, and standard
procedures will include isolation and tagging of the power supply to the agitators, roping
off the area where grating is removed and hanging of signs. An observer should stand by to
assist the person who entered the tank who should be instructed in the possible dangers
prior to doing so.
Mud conditioning equipment, shale shaker, desander, centrifuge, degasser, etc. should be
easily and safely accessed via the grating, but moving parts must be guarded while in
operation.
Protective clothing must be available, along with first aid facilities in the mud pit area.
2.6.13 Sack Store/Chemical Storage Area

A sack and drum storage area, for cementation and mud additives must contain a separate
enclosed and lockable area for potentially dangerous chemicals (caustic, etc.). Clear and
concise signs must show the index of standard chemical hazard symbols, for identification,
along with simple first aid instructions for personnel working in the area. A shower and eye
bath station, along with ear plugs, etc. must be available and regularly maintained.
2.6.14 Electrical Installations

Rig wiring should be installed so that it is protected from abrasion, trampling, or burning
by hot pipes. To prevent short circuits, it should be insulated to resist weather, chemicals,
and handling. It should be replaced if the insulation is damaged.
Fixed lamps on derricks should be equipped with reflectors or shields and located to
minimize glare or hindrance to vision. Lights in the derrick should be directed towards the
objects to be illuminated but away from the eyes of the Driller and Derrickman. No
floodlight should be mounted to cast a blinding light on anyone approaching or leaving the
derrick floors, the pump and pits, or the pipe rack area.
Snub chains should secure the fixtures to prevent lamps from falling should they become
detached or broken. Any hand lamp used in the area around a rig where gas may be
present should be an approved, explosion proof, vapor proof lamp with a guard. In non-
hazardous areas the same kind of equipment may be used; however, the use of an open
lamp with a guard is permissible in non-hazardous areas if they are free of explosive
vapors.
Enough electrical plug receptacles should be spaced around the rig to eliminate any need
for extremely long extension cords.
All lighting units, receptacles, and switches in the derrick and platform should be vapor and
explosion proof. They should be inspected frequently and maintained in good clean
working condition.
__________________________________________________________________________
2.6.15 Well Control

A detailed philosophy of well control procedures can be found in the Halliburton Well
Control Manual. Agreed procedures to be adopted at the rigsite will be documented prior
to operations commencing.
2.6.15.1 Diverter Drilling

A diverter system will be installed when formation strength limits the ability to shut in the
well. The system components will comply with the most recent update of API RP 53, with
relevance to both land and offshore well drilling. In particular, vent lines shall be as straight
as possible, properly supported and properly sized. The valve control system shall
automatically sequence, for simplicity of operation.
The philosophy for diversion must be fully understood by the drilling crew and the
response outlined in contingency procedures.
2.6.15.2 Blow Out Preventer Equipment and Procedures

General
BOP equipment systems shall conform to API RP 53 and Spec' 16A. A proper testing and
routine maintenance system shall be set in place.
The BOP stack(s) shall be pressure tested after installation and prior to drilling out the
casing shoe. Subsequent testing will then be conducted every 1-2 weeks, assuming
operations and governmental regulations allow. The well will not be jeopardized to
conduct a BOP test. A proper record of maintenance shall be kept for both scheduled and
unscheduled work, and kept in a BOP history file.
All BOP stack, wellhead, casing, drill pipe and tubing which is used on the well shall have a
maximum working pressure suitable (with the appropriate safety margins) for the maximum
anticipated surface pressure and temperature. Drilling operations will NOT under any
circumstances proceed until a function test of the stack is proven by a pressure test.
A suitable working platform surrounding the BOP with safety lines (inertia reel, etc.)
should be constructed.
Common points which should be addressed prior to the utilization of a stack include:
• BOP history availability

• BOP configuration
• Packing element suitability for the well planned (including potential H2S) , wear and rig
site storage
• Number of choke and kill lines (preferably 2 of each)
__________________________________________________________________________
2.6.15.3 BOP Control System

The BOP control system should be installed, tested and operated according to API RP 53
and the manufacturer’s specifications. In addition to the usual low air and fluid reservoir
level alarms, the following should be considered :
• Correct accumulator capacity

• Accumulator low pressure alarm
• Air driven hydraulic fluid charge pumps
• Electric driven hydraulic pump to be connected to the emergency generator
• Appropriate location of remote operating panel(s)
• Pressure test operating system to 3000 psi on regular basis if a by-pass valve is installed
on the unit
2.6.15.4 Pressure Testing

General points with respect to pressure testing are as follows :
• The lowest maximum test pressure component of the system determines the maximum
allowable test pressure.
• Visually inspect all equipment prior to test.
• Cordon off and hang danger notices where applicable.
• Notify all personnel of danger areas via public address via any other forms of
communication, if available.
• Never attempt to tighten, slacken or hammer on items under pressure.
• All hose connections should be jump chain or sling secured to secure the hose if a
connector fails
• Non-essential personnel to be evacuated from the danger area.
• Lines to be purged of gases/air to reduce the affects of explosive expansion if a leak
does occur. The volume tested should be minimized if possible.
• Prior to applying pressure, ensure all dummy components such as thread protectors are
removed.
• Pressure testing with plug or cup type testers must always be done with open ended
pipe and fluid filled pipe. This will rapidly indicate leak path and ensure the test tool
string is not launched by build up of pressure under the test tool.
• A low pressure test (21 bar or 300 psi is recommended) is necessary to confirm sealing.
Observe maximum initial pressures of only 14-35 bar or 200-500 psi.
• A pressure recorder should be used for all pressure tests. A pressure drop of 10% from
the initial static pressure is acceptable, provided that the reduced pressure remains
constant.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Test lines must be properly secured (ie snubbed and anchored) in case of an explosive
leak.
• Chiksans (steel hoses) with the Weco type hammer unions of various figures can be
mis-matched easily. It is recommended to standardize to one particular type (1002 or
1502).
• A pressure test will normally be conducted with water.
2.6.16 Drilling Lifting Equipment Certification and Inspection

All lifting equipment should be certified, marked with Safe Working Load and inspected
every 12 months. This applies to air winch lines, chains, hooks, swivels, shackles,
elevators, links, single joint elevators, slings or swivels attached to single joint elevators,
pulleys, sheaves, blocks, lifting eyes, chain hoists, overhead cranes etc.
The inspection of drilling lifting equipment is based in part on API RP 8B. Areas of
required practice covered include :
• Routine visual inspection in assembled condition, weekly
• Thorough cleaning and visual inspection in assembled condition after every rig move or
every month, whichever is first.
• An NDT inspection in disassembled condition as follows:
Every 6 months, Elevators, links, bails, lugs, spider, slips, tongues
Every 12 months, Kelly, Kelly cocks, Kelly Spinner, pin and box connections
Every 12 months, depending on service conditions, Traveling block, Hook, Swivel
Every 2 years, depending on service condition, Crown block and deadline anchor.
Note that if lifting equipment has been subjected to high dynamic loading, immediate
inspection is required.
The selection of wire rope (slings etc.) for lifting with adequate safety shall be guided by
API RP 9B, “Application, Care and Use” of Wire Rope for Oil Field Service'. When
operating near to the limit of loading dictated by the safety factor, care shall be taken to
minimize shock loading of the wire rope due to impacts of the object being lifted with other
objects. The roustabout crew will be informed by the crane driver in this event. Safety
factors for various wire rope are as follows :
Wire Rope Type Minimum Safety Factor

Sandline 3.0
Rotary Drilling Line 3.0
Mast Raising Line 2.5
Drilling Line When Running Casing 2.5
Drilling Line/ Working Stuck Pipe 2.0
__________________________________________________________________________
The Safety factor is calculated as follows:

S.F = { Nominal Strength wire rope/ Calculated Load }
2.7 General Rig Working Practices and Procedures
2.7.1 Well Servicing
2.7.1.1General
Operations such as cementing, perforating, well testing, fracturing, use of nitrogen and
acidizing shall be performed by Halliburton well service companies, if available.
While each Halliburton or other well service group has its own rules for safety on a
location, it must also abide by the rules of Halliburton. It is the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor’s responsibility to ensure the service group or company operates safely on the
site and in no way endangers the drilling operation or personnel while there.
Before any well servicing operation starts, there should be a planning session between the
Halliburton service company personnel, the senior rig contractor, senior representative, the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor and the Halliburton Well Service supervisor/specialist.
Points to be considered are:
• hazards of the site and of the service operation

• safe location of all equipment.
• planned scope of the work
Service equipment placement should take into account personnel safety and fire prevention.
The service company may be concerned about a clear approach for placing equipment, a
safe and clean working area, placement of stabbing board, pressure ratings of wellhead
equipment, personnel protective equipment to be used, posted information signs,
emergency equipment on hand and hazardous conditions and areas around the rig.
2.7.1.2 Cementing
The responsible person for the operation will be the service company senior representative
on site. The main safety requirements for cementing operations include:
• Requirements for securing lines and cement head applicable as per pressure testing
section.
• Positioning of HP discharge lines (not obscured or near to walk ways/ work areas etc.)
• Avoid long and/ or suspended spans of iron (steel hose) when possible on rig up.
• Use enough swivel joints on discharge lines to allow flexibility.
__________________________________________________________________________
• No one should be allowed to walk over pressured lines unless absolutely necessary.
The area containing potentially high pressured lines is to be cordoned off and a sign
posted for limited access.
• After the job, clean-up and make the area safe.
• All appropriate personnel are to utilize safety protective equipment (including hearing,
breathing and eyesight gear).
• Maintain adequate ventilation.
• Special procedures for anti-gas migration slurries as per the manufacturer’s
recommendations, with respect to mixing at the surface and circulation to surface after
the gas evolving process has occurred.
2.7.1.3 Hydraulic Fracturing

The main safety requirements for hydraulic fracturing operations include:
• The surface equipment should be hydraulically tested to a pressure in excess of the

expected maximum surface pressure.
• The piping, including vent lines, should be adequately anchored and must not transmit
hydraulic vibrations to the wellhead.
• Fire fighting equipment must be placed at strategic locations.
• Receiving vessels attached to relief or bleed off lines from the pump unit or wellhead
should be vented via a flare facility with a constant ignition apparatus.
• Combustible gas detectionequipment should be available at the pumping unit.
• Acid washing and acid fracturing operations should combine standard precautions
mentioned in the cementing and fracturing sections of this guideline. Acids and the
additives used with acid are corrosive and toxic and can cause severe burns on contact.
The fumes evolved can damage the mucus membrane even in very small quantities.
• The appropriate respirator, goggles, gloves, aprons and boots are to be available to
operating personnel and a supply of water and neutralizing agents is to be easily
available in the work area. Good housekeeping is vital as an unattended spill may cause
serious injury.
• A non-return valve should be placed as close as possible to the wellhead on the
discharge line, and a pressure test equal to maximum anticipated treatment pressure
conducted prior to the job.
• Prior to any mixing operations an announcement should be made on the address
system, warning of the danger and ordering all non essential personnel not to enter the
roped off and signed area.
• A communications system should exist between the stimulation services supervisor,
pump operator and the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor.
__________________________________________________________________________
• A hose-down team is to be available and properly protected with the appropriate

clothing to assist in the event of a spillage or accident.
• The Stimulation Services supervisor will ensure that the relevant chemical data sheets
are logged with the medic prior to the operation commencing.
2.7.1.4 Acidization
on site. The main safety requirements for acidizing operations include:
• Acid washing and acid fracturing operations should combine standard precautions
mentioned in the cementing and fracturing sections of this document.
• Acids and the additives used with acid are corrosive, and can cause severe burns on
contact. The fumes evolved can damage the mucus membrane even in very small
quantities.
• The appropriate respirator, safety goggles, gloves, aprons and boots are to be available
to operating personnel and a supply of water and neutralizing agents is to be easily
available in the work area. Good housekeeping is vital as an unattended spill may cause
serious injury.
• A non-return valve should be placed as close as possible to the wellhead on the
discharge line and pressure tested to the maximum anticipated treating pressure.
• Prior to any mixing operations an announcement should be made on the public address
system, warning of the danger and ordering all non-essential personnel not to enter the
roped off and signed area.
• A communications system should exist between the Stimulation Services Supervisor,
pump operators and the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor.
• A hose-down team is to be available and properly protected with the appropriate
clothing to assist in the event of a spillage or accident.
• The Stimulation Services supervisor will ensure that the relevant chemical data sheets
are logged with the medic prior to the operation commencing.
2.7.1.5 Procedures and Requirements for Using Nitrogen

on site.
Nitrogen (N2) presents 3 main safety hazards:
• Low temperature, affecting both personnel via cold burns and equipment.
• Displacement of air by N
2, causing impaired judgment or ultimate suffocation.
• Hazards due to the nature of energized fluid (like any vessel containing pressurized
liquefied gas.)
__________________________________________________________________________
To avoid body contact, a full set of protective clothing must be worn and will include
safety goggles or face shield, insulated gloves, long sleeve shirts and coveralls (covering
boots).
Some basic pumping requirements are:
• Keep suction pressure as high as possible above suction vapor pressure.

• Boiling occurs when the saturation vapor pressure equals the line pressure. Line
pressure must thus be kept well above the saturation vapor pressure.
Other general safety rules include :
• N2 gas will not be vented in enclosed areas

• Keep a minimum of 5 ft away from an 2Nline during venting
• Vent high pressure lines as quickly as possible after shutting down pumping
• Stake and/or tie down high pressure discharge lines and manifolds
• Trapped liquid N2, allowed to warm up, could lead to an explosion, due to the increase
in pressure. The positioning of pressure relief valves on N2 pumping units, containers
and lines ensures this cannot occur. Ensure that all relief valves are operative and
properly maintained.
• 5 minute escape packs are to be available for the N2 operators, for escape only. Self
Contained Breathing Apparatus and/or remote air supply line equipment to be available
if rescue work is required.
2.7.2 Safe Practices in Handling/Mixing Chemicals

Personnel required to handle chemicals shall have adequate training on safe practices in
handling, use and disposal.
Chemicals can be supplied both as powders and as liquids. Good quality protective
clothing should always be worn. The clothing should also be comfortable and easily
removed in case of accidents. Gloves, goggles, hard hat, safety boots / shoes and face
mask must be worn at all times when working with chemicals / additives. Any lack of
instructions on the product container should not be taken to indicate that the product is
safe.
All chemicals must bear a label of classification meeting local regulatory requirements
based on the foregoing description of usage, potential hazards and current first aid
practices. This enables consistency of labeling, storage and facilitates the development of
safe working practices.
The mixing of any mud chemicals will only occur after authorization by a responsible
person. This will prevent the accidental mixing of chemicals which are not compatible.
Storage and decanting are examples of procedures which may lead to inadvertent mixing of
chemicals. Leakage of containers can also result in accidental mixing of chemicals in
__________________________________________________________________________
storage. This will create an extra hazard when incompatible materials are stored together.
Adequate ventilation should be allowed for products that are incompatible with any other
type of product and storage should be arranged accordingly.
During or prior to the shipment of chemicals to the rig site, a copy of the manifest and
chemical content / data sheet must be sent to the rig for the attention of the Halliburton
Drilling Supervisor and Rig Contractor representative. They will ensure that the necessary
precautions can be taken on arrival at the rig and distribute the information to the Rig
Medic and Halliburton Drilling Engineer/Drilling Supervisor. On arrival at the rig site, if
chemical containers are not sound, this must be reported to the responsible supervisor, who
will decide on the required action.
2.7.3 Radioactive Materials Handling and Procedures

Basic recommended practices while using radioactive sources are contained in the ICRP
Publication Number 26 (the International Commission on Radiological Protection).
Logging sources are contained in individual transport shields. These will be transferred into
the rig site source store by the Logging Engineer. In the absence of a site source store the
sources are to be segregated and chained off in a safe area at the rigsite.
The distance required (when a site source store is not available) for segregation from
working or living areas is determined from the transport index (TI) marked on the sources
and on the shipping documents. The TI corresponds to a dosage rate in micro-sievert per
hour (mSv/hr) at a distance. The sum of the TI's should be converted to the distance
required to reduce the dose rate to 2.5 mSv/hr. A typical segregation distance for a full
logging suite is 6.4 m or 21 ft. Clear markings should surround the segregated area. See
Table 1, of this section for details of segregation distances for various TI's
The service company logging engineer is the responsible supervisor when dealing with
sources. He is the only person with authority to move sources and this must be done under
the Permit to Work system. The logging engineer and helpers must wear both gamma and
neutron personal dosimeters and exercise extreme care when transferring sources to tools
(particularly directional sources). The transfer area will be signed with the trefoil
(segmented nuclear symbol) and minimum personnel will be present.
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 1. Approximate relationship between T.I and Segregation distance.
Transport Table 1. _
Index (T.I.) Segregation Distance (meters)
(T.I. - mrem/hr 2.5 µ Sv/hr 7.5 µ Sv/hr
1m)
1 2.0 1.4
3 4.1 2.0
5 5.3 3.0
10 7.4 4.3
15 9.0 5.3
20 10.4 6.1
25 11.7 6.8
2.7.4 Explosives Utilization

All work utilizing explosives shall be conducted under the Permit to Work system, and
shall be preceded by a safety meeting of Driller/Assistant Driller/Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor/Rig Contractor Senior Representative/Explosives contractor (usually Logging
Engineer) and crew/Halliburton Drilling Engineer.
Explosives must be stored in a building or a suitable containment which is completely
separated from the living and work areas and away from flammable materials, heat sources
and radioactive materials. Explosives and detonators must be stored in separate containers,
which will remain locked at all times.
While utilizing electrically activated detonation systems the following precautions should
be taken :
• Check grounding from logging unit to rig and rig to wellhead

• Eliminate sources of AC or DC voltage, such as: electrical welding, inductive or
electromagnetic NDT, top drive, static electricity (from electrical or wind storms),
radio transmitters.
Note that on land, a 90 m or 300 ft exclusion zone should be set up to stop external
sources of transmission (taxi's, aircraft etc.) from entering. All other RF (radio frequency)
generating hazards such as commercial transmitters and power cables, whether carried on
pylons or buried, should be considered.
__________________________________________________________________________
The rig radio silence procedure should be a written list of actions instigated and supervised
by the Rig Contractor Senior Representative, and confirmed by the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor.
After the above mentioned precautions are taken, the wellhead to rig voltage shall be
observed. If AC or DC voltage exceeds 0.25 volts, all sources of electrical supply may
have to be switched off.
2.7.5 General Hydrogen Sulfide Safety

The occurrence of H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide gas) may have serious consequences to both
personnel and equipment. Regional drilling and well testing information is studied to assess
the risk and highlight the likely formation(s) which yield H2S. The casing/ drill string/ mud
programs will then be adjusted accordingly.
A contingency plan will be drawn up for the potential occurrence of H2S. Information for
the safe drilling of H2S wells can be derived from API RP 49. The following areas should
be addressed by the plan:
• Definitions of alarm states and actions taken by whom, at each level of alarm.
• Designate safe areas (briefing)
• Evacuation procedures
• Notification of authorities
• Local medical facilities
• Preventative / monitoring measures
The fact that the well is designated an H2S well in part must be conveyed to all contractors
and service companies at the earliest possible time in the planning phases of the well
program. The confirmation of that fact will also be highlighted at a pre-spud meeting.
All personnel will be fully trained in the use of life saving H2S related equipment available
at the wellsite.
2.7.5.1 Well Planning and Equipment Requirements for H 2S wells

BOP Equipment
All BOP equipment (including valves/gaskets etc) shall comply with API RP 53
specification for metallurgical requirements. Nut, bolt and flange materials shall comply
with API specification 6A, Section 1.4 (14th edition).
Choke Manifold
All components of the manifold and lines attached to it (ie. flare lines) should only contain
materials in accordance with applicable API standards, specifications and recommended
practices.
__________________________________________________________________________
Mud-Gas Separator/ Vacuum Degasser

The gas removal equipment should be able to remove H2S from the mud and gas discharge
lines must vent in a remote location at which a facility to flare is available. Note that all
flare lines (choke manifold flare line, mud-gas separator line and degasser line, if separate
from the manifold flare line) should be equipped with a method of automatic ignition.
Refer to API RP 49.
Drilling Tubulars
The grade of drill pipe and its metallurgy should be considered when designing the drill
string to minimize the effects of Hydrogen embrittlement and Sulfide Stress Corrosion.
2.7.5.2 H 2S Monitoring and Alarm System

The rig shall have a system to detect H2S in the air, which automatically alarms at a pre-
calibrated set point. Access to hand held (lead acetate "Draeger type") and electronic
personal detectors is also recommended.
All detectors must be calibrated at least once a week and sensitized more frequently, or if
malfunction is suspected.
An audio/visual alarm system should be attached directly to the monitoring system. Station
bills/ training and safety meetings etc. must enforce strict adherence to procedures once an
alarm goes off. As several false alarms may occur on occasion due to faulty equipment,
there is at times a tendency for crew members to "assume" subsequent alarms are false.
This must NOT be allowed to occur. It is the responsibility of all supervisors to ensure
personnel react in the specified fashion (as dictated by the Emergency Response Plan and
Station Bills). It is a priority to repair faulty equipment. Temporary and safe ways of
efficiently replacing the automatic system may be considered, if the fault is a localized one.
More general failures may require securing the well and shutting-down until appropriate
repairs are made.
2.7.5.3 Breathing Apparatus (BA) and General Safety Equipment

All personnel at the rig site will have allocated to them a breathing apparatus (BA)
designated as an escape set. All personnel classed as essential during an emergency (rig
floor crew, medic, Halliburton Drilling Supervisor, Rig Contractor Senior Representative,
rescue teams etc) shall be provided with a breathing apparatus suitable for work, which is
full face and positive pressure. A secondary self-contained escape facility will be available
on the work pack.
Training with the appropriate apparatus will be given at the rig site, regardless of previous
experience, and written instructions on the use and location of equipment at the rig site will
be clearly posted.
__________________________________________________________________________
The following locations should have BA equipment in appropriate storage containers:

• Rig floor, derrick monkeyboards, mud logging unit, shale shaker, pump rooms, rig
superintendents and drilling supervisor’s offices, briefing areas (if appropriate)., etc.
The number and type of BA sets will be determined by Halliburton and Contractor senior
representatives and availability will limit access to the various areas during the period
drilling and completion operation designated to be the2H S period.
The service company elected to supply the various safety equipment, such as compressors,
cascade system, manifolds and piping, BA, etc will be given adequate time to rig up prior
to entering the H2S zone. The service company representative will then maintain his
equipment, assist in training crews, and advise/assist in operations pertinent to H2S safety.
A proper training record shall be kept to ensure employee compliance and participation.
2.7.5.4 H 2S Drills
Refer to Section 2.2.1 of this guideline for general information on drills. In addition to this
the following should be done during 2HS drills:
• All personnel should don their breathing apparatus (an operability check should be
made on the cascade system, prior to utilization).
• Bug blowers (ventilation fans designed to dilute toxic gas concentration around danger
areas) will be operated.
• Buddy system implemented.
• Non-essential personnel to don their breathing apparatus and proceed to muster points
for a body count.
• Gates to the location (on a land-based job) will be closed and guarded. A red flag
warning will be displayed and all non-essential personnel briefly informed of the hazard
and turned away.
• The problem of communications with full face positive pressure breathing masks are to
be addressed in the drills, both between personnel at the rig site and between rig site
and the safe area.
• After the appropriate drills, the contingency plan for informing local residents,
authorities, etc. should be discussed. Checks will be made on all equipment used during
the drill. Any deficiencies detected in equipment and/or personnel will be rectified.
2.7.5.5 H 2S Alarm States and Actions

The following are suggested levels of alert, which are initiated at a safe distance above the
zone expected to produce H2S.
Condition 1 : H2S at 0 - 10 ppm
Warning signs posted at the entrances to the site (display yellow flag or symbol required to
the locality).
__________________________________________________________________________
Condition 2 : H2S at 10 - 49 ppm

Danger signs posted (in English and all appropriate local languages thought necessary). All
non-essential personnel don breathing apparatus and proceed to the briefing/ muster safe
area. Rescue teams in radio contact with rig should prepare to take action. H2S safety
service company employee to continually monitor equipment and update supervisors on
operability/ time before evacuation essentials etc. The problem of communication with full
face BA masks is to be considered.
Condition 3 : H2S at 50 ppm and greater
An extreme danger to life exists at this level. A red flag will be hoisted, non-essential
personnel evacuated from the site and essential personnel secure the well and prepare to
evacuate.
The evacuees should be taken to a predetermined safe place where provision for travel,
food, money, etc is organized. They shall not be allowed to express any opinions or
perceived details regarding the incident, particularly to press or interest groups of any kind.
Physical examinations aimed at detection of adverse affects of H2S on personnel will be
conducted before dispersal from the area.
2.7.6 Shale Shakers

The following procedures are the main safety precautions to be followed by any crew
member working on the shakers or in the shaker house:
When working in the shaker house,
Protective (preferably rubber) gloves and face masks should be worn, particularly when
excessive fumes are evolved from hot Oil Based Mud systems. To keep steam and fumes
in shakers to a minimum, make sure extraction fans are on at all times during circulation of
the hole. If any work is to be done on the degasser it must also be isolated and the
derrickman or driller informed as to when work starts and finishes.
While changing screens,
Under the Permit to Work system Tag Out/ Lock Out policy, isolate mud flow then turn
off shakers with safety lock on button so the driller cannot inadvertently turn on shaker. If
there is any work to be done on shaker motor or any other motor in the shakers they must
be isolated in the Control Room (if applicable) .
General Responsibilities,
The Immediate Supervisor Safety Representative is usually the assistant driller and the
shaker hand must report all unsafe situations or conditions that may arise, ie, gas alarms
machinery failures, etc. Should be reported to the driller or assistant driller..
It is the responsibility of everyone to keep the stairways from the rig floor to cellar deck
clear of all trash and clean at all times. Also the shakers and surrounding areas should be
maintained in a clean and safe working condition.
__________________________________________________________________________
The individual responsible for the shakers should be instructed to be particularly aware of
safety in his work area, with particular respect to machinery with guarded moving parts
(shaker, vacuum degasser, pumps etc.). Company service (e.g. mud logger) and the various
contractor service personnel will also be advised of hazards.
2.7.7 Mud Pump and Mud Tanks

The following are the main safety precautions to be followed by the mud engineer,
derrickman and roughneck/roustabout while working in the mud room or above the pits.
When Working in the Area,
The mud pumps must first be isolated from stand pipe and charge pumps before any work
is carried out on them. The mud pumps must then have controls isolated in the Control
Room so that they cannot be accidentally operated from any other position such as the drill
floor (Permit to Work, Lock out/Tag out). The same procedures must be carried out while
working on any other piece of equipment. Particular attention should be paid to isolating
agitators before entering pits. For work inside pits, a Cold Work /Vessel Entry Permit
must be in place and the conditions adhered to. When repairing / replacing pump modules,
beware of getting fingers or toes trapped. Always take the time to locate and use the
proper tools and lifting equipment.
The Derrickman and assistants should wear the appropriate safety clothing while mixing
chemicals such as caustic or any toxic materials. It is the derrickman's responsibility to
make sure any crew member who is mixing chemicals has proper safety equipment such as
safety glasses, rubber gloves as required, etc. (see Safe Practices in Mixing and Handling
Chemicals, Section 2.7.4).
The derrickman's immediate supervisor safety representative is usually the assistant driller
and the derrickman must report any unsafe conditions or working practices which he might
observe.
It is the derrickman's responsibility to keep the pump room in a clean and safe working
condition at all times, including keeping all gratings in good condition on the mud tanks
and access hatch covers on pumps in position at all times. It is also the derrickman's
responsibility to make sure the emergency shower and eye bath are always in good working
order and any crew member who is mixing chemicals knows how to use this equipment.
It is also the derrickman's responsibility to make sure all chemicals are stacked properly and
in a secure fashion, in consultation with the Mud Engineer and the Halliburton Drilling
Engineer.
NOTE: Oil base mud is a serious fire hazard - no burning or welding is to take place until
the area has been thoroughly cleaned and pipe work has been flushed with a mixture of
water and cleaners or purged with nitrogen. If the pipe or vessel etc. in question is unable
to be flushed, the hot work will not take place. The hot work area must be inspected prior
to hot work commencing in line with the conditions of the Hot Work Permit.
__________________________________________________________________________
2.7.8 Drill Floor and Catwalk

The following are the main safety precautions to be taken while working on the drill floor
and will be enforced by the driller and assistant driller. (Note also that the Permit to Work
system and Lock out/Tag out system will apply.) Hard hat, safety toe boots, safety glasses
and hearing protection should be worn at all times.
• If any work is being carried out on the drawworks, blocks or around the crown, the
drawworks must be isolated. This will include the Crown-O-Matic being activated to
ensure that the blocks cannot be inadvertently lowered. In addition, safety warning
notices will be posted in a prominent position in the doghouse. The same precautions
will be taken when any crew member is working on the rotary table gearbox or
electrical motor- (isolate electric motor and put on rotary brake).
• The long term effects of oil base mud are not known, so if a trip out of the hole turns
out to be wet, then slicker suits should be worn at all times along with coveralls to try
and prevent the oil base mud from coming into contact with the skin as much as
possible.
• The driller has the overall authority for safe working practices on the drill floor. This
includes any work which may be carried out by service company or any other person
on the rig floor.
• The assistant driller will report to the driller on all aspects of safety which the driller
will not be able to oversee himself such as in the pump room and shaker room.
Note: Most frequent injuries happen to crew members who are either relieving or have just
been promoted from Roustabout. The most common injuries are to the hands and fingers,
so it is the responsibility of the experienced personnel to teach the new crew members the
proper way to handle the equipment. The driller must feel free to slow down any operation
if he has several inexperienced personnel on the floor at any given time.
2.7.9 Derrick, Monkey Board and Stabbing Board

The following are the main safety precautions to be taken while working in the derrick and
will be enforced by the derrickman:
• If any work is carried out on the monkey board or stabbing board, air hoists then
secondary hanging systems must be used. In addition safety notices will be posted in
prominent areas and the personnel involved in working in the derrick will be notified (ie
mechanics / electricians, floor crew).
• A safety belt and line must be worn by all personnel working 2m or above 6 ft in the
derrick unless using a riding belt suspended by a man riding winch. Hard hats, steel
toes shoes or boots and gloves must be worn at all times.
• It is the derrickman's responsibility to keep the monkey board and surrounding areas in
a clean and safe working condition. This includes keeping all ropes and harnesses used
on the monkey board in good order.
__________________________________________________________________________
• The Immediate Supervisor Safety Representative is usually the assistant driller and the
derrickman must report any unsafe conditions or working practices which he might
observe but is unable to rectify. In addition to this, the stabbing board harness and
ropes, and safety harnesses kept at the bottom of the derrick ladder at all times is the
responsibility of the assistant driller and he will personally check these harnesses and
ropes each shift.
• Most frequent injuries while working in the derrick are fingers being trapped by
tubulars. Tugger wires whipping across the derrick may also cause injury as does
improper use of snakes while changing wires on tuggers.
• All non-routine work should be carried out under the Permit to Work system. Routine
work includes:
◊ Work up to 2 m or 6 ft above the rig floor

◊ Work on the kelly and swivel, when set back in the scabbard
◊ Installation of circulating head for casing, liners, etc.
◊ Upper kelly cock operation
◊ Operations associated with lubricators
2.7.10 Cranes and Pipe Rack Area

The most frequent injuries that occur to roustabouts are to the legs and feet, so it is the
responsibility of the experienced crew members to watch out for and teach new crew
members the proper way to handle casing, drill collars and all tubulars.
The only person allowed to operate the cranes are the crane operators or crew members
with proper crane certification in an emergency.
2.7.11 General Rules for Mechanical and Electrical Work

It is incumbent upon each individual to prevent accidents from happening to himself or to
others. Do not leave machinery or place of work in such a condition that may result in an
accident to the unwary.
Place of Work :
• To be kept well illuminated so work can be seen clearly.

• To be kept clean and orderly.
• To be roped off and warning notices posted if required, where floor plates or handrails
are removed, for overhead work, etc.
• To be gas free and well ventilated.
• To have safe ingress and egress.
__________________________________________________________________________
At Work:
• All concerned persons to be advised when / where work is to be carried out.

Relevant work permits must be obtained.
Machinery must be isolated so inadvertent start ups cannot occur.
Machinery must be electrically isolated.
Equipment must be vented before removing mountings etc.
Danger noticesmust be posted, in appropriate local languages.
General:
• If using electric or gas welding equipment or in fact any equipment that may provide a
source of ignition for a fire watch must be organized and suitable precautions observed.
• If working above floor/ground level (2 m or 6 ft), safety harnesses must be worn and
appropriate staging erected.
• Full use to be made of safety / protection aids i.e., face masks, goggles, gloves etc.
• Beware of loose clothing when near moving machinery.
• Make use of mechanical lifting appliances when necessary and applicable.
• Keep tools clean and in good working order. If you cannot repair them immediately,
withdraw them from use and report the fact to the line supervisor.
2.8 Tool and Equipment Utilization
2.8.1 Hand Tools

Tool boards should be mounted on the doghouse, pump house and derrick floor wind
wall/bulkheads to encourage keeping tools readily available and in good working condition.
Finding tools is easier if they are kept clean and arranged on the tool board at all times, and
good housekeeping helps the crew become aware of missing or ill repaired tools. Having
the right tool available for service reduces the likelihood of the improper use of tools and
consequent accidents.
A nominated crew member should inspect tools frequently and see that each tool is
maintained in serviceable condition. Any tool found to be defective should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible.
Except while they are in use, tools in the derrick should be securely tied to a rig member
(manila rope is not recommended) or placed in a toolbox that is secured to the working
platform. As soon as they are no longer needed aloft, tools should be lowered to the
derrick floor.
Wrenches, except those specifically designed for the purpose, should not be hammered
upon, nor should they be used as hammers. Tools must be used only for the purpose for
which they are intended.
__________________________________________________________________________
The use of sledge hammers in the derrick should be avoided if possible. When using a
sledge hammer for example on hose or steel couplings, extreme care should be exercised to
avoid injuring personnel below.
2.8.2 Hammers
Hammers with damaged heads or loose or broken handles should not be used but should be
repaired or replaced.
2.8.3 Power Tools

Portable power tools used in drilling operations may be pneumatic (compressed air) or
electrically powered devices. Typical injuries from power tools are burns, cuts and strains;
injuries may also include electric shock or particles in the eyes. Power tools should not be
left overhead, where there is a chance the hose or line may be pulled and cause the tool to
fall.
2.8.4 Air Tools

Accidents sometimes occur when a disconnected air hose whips about. If a hose is kinked
or worn, a wrapping of strip metal or wire can repair it, temporarily, but it is better to
install a new hose.
Most air powered tools operate on about 6 bar or 90 psi of pressure. Compressed air can
be hazardous and improper use of air under pressure can cause serious injuries.
2.8.5 Electric Tools

Grounding of portable electric tools is the best way to safeguard an employee from electric
shock. If there is a short circuit inside the tool, the current is drained from the metal frame
through a ground wire. One should never stand in water when using an electric power
tool, even if it is grounded.
2.8.6 Rigging Practices

Rigging, fittings, fastenings, and other parts in connection with cables and ropes proper
size, adequate strength and should be installed in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer and come fully certified.
Only chains certified for lifting should be used for that purpose. Slings, fittings, and
fastenings, when in use, should be inspected daily for evidence of overloading, excessive
wear, or damage. Defective slings should be removed from service.
2.9 Drilling Site Preparation (Land)

The following considerations should be taken into account, which impinge upon safety and
the preservation of the environment :
__________________________________________________________________________
• Location of the well : At least 30 m or 100 ft from ignition sources (houses, roads,
etc).
• Size of the site; sufficient to safely place all equipment needed.
• Drainage of the well site and camp site; suitable containment from drains/drainage
system to isolate surrounding area/water table from potentially harmful effluent.
• Site Sewage system and waste disposal; provisions for septic pits/waste pits/secure
disposal facilities per local authority guidelines of waste /metal/oil etc.
• Site clearance; site cleared of all combustible materials and perimeter cleared for an
additional 15 m or 50 ft around trees/undergrowth if possible.
• Site access; normally only company and contractor personnel. Site may need to be
enclosed to enforce this requirement.
• Ignition source interdiction; vehicles only allowed on site after reporting at main gate
and only spark arrested diesels within Hazardous zones 1 and 2. Gasoline fueled
vehicles are not allowed on the rig site. Other sources of ignition, such as naked flame,
unprotected electrical equipment, smoking, etc are not permitted on the rig site, except
in the living quarters.
• Local sources of water
• Atmospheric pollution and noise should be minimized as best as possible near centers
of population. A site noise level survey should be conducted if required, as noise levels
perceived in the surrounding area are affected by topography, weather, rig activity etc.
Local conditions may require the use of acoustic panels and special brake pads for the
drawworks, etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
3.0 GENERAL DRILLING PRACTICES
3.1 Drilling Equipment and Materials
3.2 Drilling Operational Practices and Procedures
3.2.1 General Procedures
3.2.2 Drilling Practices and Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 8 General Drilling Practices
3.1 Drilling Equipment and Materials
• All downhole tools will be visually inspected by the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor
prior to running in the hole. Checks will include threads, seal areas, equipment type in
correct place, gauge etc. The Rig Contractor Senior Representative will note the
condition of any downhole equipment at all times and report deficiencies to the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor.
• The drilling contractor and Halliburton Drilling Engineer maintain accurate records of
equipment and consumables. Examples including records of block line ton-miles, DP
and BHA component hours, barite, cement, water and fuel usable volumes, available
fishing tools, grapples etc.
• Dimensions of all downhole equipment are to be recorded in text and diagram form,
including fishing neck details. All downhole equipment will have a fishing tool available
at the rig site.
• A minimum of 2 valves will be used to seal any lines or outlets exposed to wellbore
pressure.
• All well control mud pit volume and mud flow monitoring equipment is to be checked
and functioning properly prior to drilling out of a casing shoe where a BOP or diverter
arrangement is rigged up. Subsequent verifiable (i.e., recorded) checks are to be
conducted daily and will incorporate any monitoring equipment installed for said
purpose (mud logging contractor’s flow and pit volume equipment, etc).
• Senior Representative confirm that all gas detection equipment is functioning (see
Section 2.7.5.2 of this guideline for H2S monitoring) and that related alarm equipment
functions properly. This is to be confirmed weekly while drilling and prior to drilling
out of casing.
• Senior Representative ensure all rig floor alarms are functioning correctly and that all
personnel, (assistant driller, driller, etc) understand the function and meaning of
alarms.
• All solids control equipment is to be used correctly, according to manufacturer’s
procedures. In particular, the shut down/ start up sequence of centrifuges etc. to be
understood by rig personnel, mud engineer, etc.
• The circulation system components (pumps, pits etc.) are to be inspected by the rig
contractor toolpusher daily.
• A scheduled maintenance record of rig equipment is to be kept by the maintenance
crew (refer also to Section 2.6.1 of this guideline). Major components of rig
equipment are to be inspected daily by the mechanic and the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor will be kept informed of same.
• A Crown-O-Matic or equivalent safety brake will be installed and operative throughout
the well. It may occasionally be disconnected while handling BHA, but strict
procedures must be followed to ensure that it is re-connected again. A daily function
__________________________________________________________________________
General Drilling Practices Page 2 of 8 August 1995
check of the Crown-O-Matic is to be made and noted in the IADC and Daily Drilling
Reports.
• Only new or premium non-hard banded or smooth grained and flush ground hard
banded tool jointed drill pipe is to be used.
• Drill pipe inspection frequency is dependent upon the drilling situation and utilization of
the pipe. A minimum requirement is yearly.
• BHA components are to be NDT tested prior to every well.
• Welding on BHA components is not allowed.
• Drilling lifting equipment is to be inspected as per Section 2.6.16 of this guideline.
• All tubulars and wellhead equipment (casing hangers, etc.) will be drifted with the
proper drift prior to being run into the well.
• The following well control (inside BOP's) equipment should be available on the rig
floor at all times and ready for installation:
◊ Full opening drill pipe safety valve equivalent in type to a lower kelly cock
◊ Surface installed inside BOP inside BOP (non-return valve).
◊ Sub-surface installed non-return valve
- Drop-In or 'Dart' subs. Ensure that the dart will pass through the kelly
and the installed lower kelly cock and the drill pipe safety valve. Check
that the dart is compatible with the sub.
- Crossovers will be available to allow attachment of the above to any
drill string pipe run into the well
- The surface installation valves will be equipped with thread protectors
and clamp on handles and stored in a purpose built rack
• A mechanically operated trip tank level indicator is to be functioning correctly at all

times and positioned to be easily visible from the drillers position.
• The following well parameters are to be monitored and recorded :
◊ Active and total mud pit volumes

◊ Mud weight in and out of the well (at least by mud balance on a regular basis)
◊ Total gas and H2S in percent and PPM respectively, recorded from the mud
flowing at the header box.
◊ Hook load/weight on bit
◊ Rotary torque and RPM (torque is to be expressed in direct units such as Ft/lbs
or at least an amps vs. Ft/lbs conversion graph must be produced at the rig)
◊ Standpipe pressure and choke manifold pressure
◊ Rate of penetration
◊ Pump SPM
__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Return flowline flow, rate monitoring type

A mud logging unit would accomplish all or some of these services, depending on the
particular well. Direct and secure communications must be available between the mud
logging unit and drill floor/ Halliburton office/ Rig contractor’s office as a minimum on the
rig site.
A circulating head with sufficient flexible lines to be available at all times
A flare line is to be rigged up and in working order in sections where hydrocarbon gas may
be encountered.
3.2 Drilling Operational Practices and Procedures
3.2.1 General Procedures

• Written instructions are to be given to the Rig Contractor’s Senior Representative by
the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor prior to drilling any new section of hole or other
discrete operation, such as cementing. These instructions will also be passed on to
other relevant personnel.
◊ Written drilling instructions will include drilling parameters and special

procedures as necessary (such as MWD survey intervals etc.). Information on
possible drilling problems and contingency procedures are to be included.
◊ Written instructions prior to any trip out will be given and include operational
sequence (flow check, survey etc), maximum parameters of trip and
contingencies for tight hole , preparation for the next operation such as a
change of bit type, downhole motor, MWD and other special instructions.
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will advise that all indications of well and
equipment deterioration are promptly reported to him (Sections 1.1, 1.2 of this
Guideline). This will enable corrective action to be taken prior to any disruption which
may adversely affect the safety, continuity or cost of the operation.
• The organization and preparation of equipment and personnel is critical for drilling rig
efficiency. This task is accomplished by and under the supervision of the Halliburton
Drilling Supervisor (refer to Section 1.1 of this guideline).
• Halliburton Drilling Supervisor advise that the relevant function/pressure tests are
conducted on the BOP system, as specified by Sections 2.6.15.2 of this guideline and
the relevant sections of the Halliburton Well Control Manual are complied with.
• The Mud logging unit must be manned at all times during drilling, testing, completion
and workover operations. Clear and precisely written instructions are to be given to
the logging crew when non-drilling operations are being conducted.
• Pre-determined minimum consumable stock items will be maintained at the rig site.
Items include LCM, barite and the required chemical additives to use it, cement and
__________________________________________________________________________
required additives, water, fuel etc. Minimum stock levels will depend on the locations
accessibility and regional supply systems. This will be determined before the operation
commences by management and provided for in the Well Program.
• Daily meetings are to be held between the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor, Halliburton
Drilling Engineer and the Rig Contractor’s representatives (Rig Contractor’s Senior
Toolpusher, Chief Engineer etc). The agenda should address the following:
◊ Current and programmed events in the near future

◊ Equipment operability
◊ Matters which are of mutual benefit to the parties and the operation in general
• The mud engineer, drilling engineer and drilling supervisor will ensure that the drilling
fluid has the required properties for the relevant drilling operations of drilling, tripping,
logging, casing or cementing. The required volumes for operations, with contingencies
for losses etc. must be addressed.
• The requirements and procedures set forth in Section 2 of this guideline regarding
General Drilling Rig Safety Practices are to be utilized by all relevant personnel. To
that end, this document (or parts of it) are to be distributed under a controlled
document release system to the personnel addressed, or concise instructions issued at
the pertinent time.
• The following elevations and additional information are to be recorded in meters/feet
and decimal parts of a meter/foot from the Rig Floor level, and displayed at the rig
floor:
◊ Top and mid-point of the various rams of the BOP stack.
◊ Wellhead elevations, including top casing head or spool, top of the wear
bushing
◊ The lowest casing shoe depth (MD and TVD) and any other significant
equipment in the well (eg. liner hanger, PBR tops, etc.)
◊ Maximum allowable casing pressure (BAR or psi) and the shoe test equivalent
in mud weight S.G. or ppg) at the last casing shoe.
3.2.2 Drilling Practices and Procedures

• The driller and his assistant will maintain an accurate tally of all drilling tubulars going
into the well. A master drill pipe tally book will be kept, which segregates different
types of drillpipe (ie. S135 vs. G105 grades). The tally will be totaled by the driller and
senior toolpusher separately on a daily basis. In addition, the record of total tubulars
on location should be kept.
If a computer data base is utilized for the tallying task, a paper copy must be maintained so
that the information is not lost in the event of a computer failure.
__________________________________________________________________________
• A master BHA record book will be kept, containing each individual component
separately, and recording length, ID (both average and minimum), OD, connection
type, component type and manufacturer if appropriate, fishing neck, serial number,
cumulative length, position and details of other devices (i.e., totco ring , stroke of
bumper sub, etc.).
• If drilling is interrupted for rig repair or maintenance (slip and cut drilling line, etc), the
drill string will be tripped in or out as required to just inside the deepest casing shoe,
where the repairs or maintenance can be made with ease at no risk to the integration of
the well.
• If temporary repairs are vital while in open hole, every effort must be made to move
pipe and circulate during the period.
• If the kelly or top drive is disconnected, a full opening drill pipe safety valve and
circulating head will be installed.
• Slow Circulation Rates must be taken as follows:
◊ At least once a tour

◊ At a bit change
◊ At a BHA change
◊ When the mud weight or theology changes significantly
◊ Prior to drilling out a casing shoe
◊ After significant changes to the circulating system, such as changing liners on a
pump, etc.
Both active mud pumps will be used for slow circulation rates, and at least 2 pump rates
will be recorded, which are relevant to the hole section being drilled (ie. considered
suitable for the hole section, mud type and well control problems possible in the section).
• Wellhead bore protectors (wear bushings) will be installed during all drilling operations
which do not specifically exclude them.
• On exploration and appraisal wells, lubrication surveys should be taken at least every
500-1000 feet or per the regulatory agency guidelines or rules and when operations
allow such.
• While drilling hole sections considered to be critical with respect to well control and/or
reservoir potential, the following should be addressed:
◊ Active mud pit system surface area kept as small as possible. Reserve tanks
should be isolated from the active system. Constant monitoring by the
derrickman in the pit room is essential.
◊ Adequate liquid mud reserves are available.
◊ Before entering the critical hole sections, check that monitoring systems in the
pits work correctly Checks will include the mud logger and drilling
__________________________________________________________________________
contractor’s equipment. The equalization/dump/isolation valves will also be

checked for integrity.
◊ Keep all transfers of whole mud and chemical/fluid additions to the active
system to a minimum while drilling. Major treatments should be made prior to
entering the zone. Major rig maintenance is to be performed inside the last
casing shoe or when well is perfectly secured. Minor maintenance can be
accomplished while drilling, with the full knowledge of the driller and the mud
loggers.
• It is the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor’s responsibility to ensure that a kick can be
controlled at all times in accordance with Halliburton procedures.
• The relevant well control drills must be accomplished and all equipment used to control
the well must be in good and certified working order.
• Flow checks will be made for the following reasons :
◊ For exploration wells, all significant positive or negative drilling breaks will be
flow checked if the break continues for more than 1.5 m or 5 ft. when in the
prospective pay intervals. When approaching an expected reservoir top, all
significant positive or negative drilling breaks must be flow checked
immediately after the drilling break is identified and after 5’ of break has been
drilled and after 5’ of break has been drilled. For appraisal and development
wells the exploration well instructions may be modified in light of prior
experience in the area.
◊ An unexplained significant rise or fall of the active mud pit system level, as
indicated by automatic monitoring or the derrickman.
◊ An unexplained increase or decrease in mud returns from the well.
◊ Unexplained decrease in mud pump pressure or increase/decrease in mud pump
SPM.
◊ Significant changes in any other parameter which may lead the driller to think
the bit has penetrated a different (possibly reservoir) interval which he has been
told to expect.
◊ Significant increase in gas, oil in the mud or mud property changes suggestive
of an influx.
• The procedure for a flow check is as follows :
◊ Stop drilling, reduce pump rate, pick up kelly.

◊ Raise the rotary bushing sufficiently above the table to view the mud level. Stop
the pumps and observe the well.
• It is the driller’s responsibility to close in a flowing or suspected flowing well. He will

accomplish this by using the specific method requested by Halliburton. To this end, the
__________________________________________________________________________
driller and the Rig Contractor’s Senior Representatives will check that all valves,
chokes, etc are correctly set up for the particular control method to be used.
• An effort will be made to maintain primary well control at all times via adequate mud
weight.
• A Pressure Integrity Test will be conducted beneath all intermediate casing shoes where
full shut-in is possible via a BOP stack. Guidance on the exact form of the test and
whether to go to leak-off or limit the test to a predetermined value of downhole
pressure, will be found in the Halliburton Well Control Manual and will be confirmed in
the Well Program.
__________________________________________________________________________
4.0 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
4.1 Glossary of Directional Drilling terms
4.2 General Requirements and Calculations
4.3 Directional Drilling Operational Practices & Procedures
4.4 Correction Runs
4.4.1 Correction Run Requirements
4.4.2 General Recommendations
4.4.3 Sidetracking
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 7 Directional Drilling
4.1 Glossary of Directional Drilling terms.

(Note that the glossary is only intended to cover terms used in this section and it is not
fully comprehensive)
high side : The top of the hole, viewed along the borehole axis
low side : Diametrically opposed to the high side
medium radius : Radius of 90 - 200 m / 300 - 650 ft, from a build rate of°-8
40°/ 30 m 100 ft
long radius : °
Radius of 300 - 900 m or 1,000 - 3,000 ft, from a build rate of 2
- 6°/30 m or 100 ft
declination : The angle between True north and Magnetic north, for the
location being considered, measured from True north.
Note that :
Atn = Amn + D
where :
Atn = Azimuth referenced to True north
Amn=Azimuth referenced to Magnetic north
D = Declination
dog-leg : Total change in hole angle due to both the deviation from vertical
and change in hole azimuth in the horizontal plane.
4.2 General Requirements and Calculations

The objective of the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor, the Halliburton rig site directional
service company supervisor and staff is to drill the well as closely as possible to the
trajectory plan specified, thus hitting the target. This involves several steps :
• Accurately determining the initial rig position

• Accurately surveying the well position downhole
• Correctly utilizing the equipment required to produce the required well path
• Continually monitoring the calculated well path against the planned path and taking
corrective action in sufficient time
__________________________________________________________________________
Directional Drilling Page 2 of 7 August 1995
The Minimum Curvature method formula to calculate well trajectory from survey points
are as follows :
cosDL = cos (I2-I1)- sinI1 sinI2[ 1-cos (A2-A1)]
∆N = ∆AHD (sinI1 cosA1 + sinI2 cosA2) RF
2
∆E = ∆AHD (sinI1 sinA1 + sinI2 sinA2) RF
2
∆TVD = ∆AHD (cosI1 + cosI2) RF
2
PHD = N cosAt + E sinAt
180 2 tan DL
RF = × × (DL in degrees)
Π DL 2
DLS = DL x section length

∆AHD
Where :
A1,2 = Azimuths of the consecutive survey stations used for the calculation
I1,2 = Inclinations of the consecutive survey stations used for the calculation
N = The horizontal plane co-ordinate of the calculated hole position, measured
true north from the origin of the local co-ordinate system
E = The horizontal plane co-ordinate of the calculated hole position, measured
east from the origin of the local co-ordinate system
∆N,E = The increment of N and E between survey station 1 and 2
∆AHD = Along hole (or measured) distance between consecutive survey stations
PHD = Projected horizontal displacement
At = target Azimuth
DL = Dog Leg
DLS = Dog Leg Severity
__________________________________________________________________________
4.3 Directional Drilling Operational Practices & Procedures
(not applicable to horizontal wells)
The chapters on wellbore surveying, BHA's, correction runs and drill string design contain
further information on directional drilling, including specific rotary build, steerable motor
assemblies, etc.
• Keep the BHA length to the minimum required.

• All sections of hole drilled initially with deflection tools should be considered for
reamed to smooth out irregularities in the hole.
• Make corrections to hole trajectory as soon as errors are noted.
• If deflection tools are to be run just below a casing seat, leave at least 30 m or 100 ft
of open hole prior to kicking off.
• WOB and RPM will be controlled by directional requirements & ROP. As ROP is
limited by hole cleaning, which must be optimum, penetration rate should be controlled.
If WOB and RPM requirements for directional control lead to an ROP in excess of the
hole cleaning ability of the mud, the latter should be improved. Prior to improvement of
mud properties or elevation of flow rate, etc, the hole should be circulated periodically
while drilling to reduce annular cuttings loading, if hole cleaning is thought to be a
problem.
• All information relevant to directional control will be tabulated and recorded for future
reference. Tables should include :
◊ BHA performance record, with BHA components, its build/turn record, the
formation name and type (detailed description), and bit type/ parameters used.
◊ The original Directional Driller’s depth log, with drilling parameters used,
toolface offset, hole inclination/ azimuth response, comments (such as hard
bands interfering with bit weight application) etc.
• When reaming or hole opening a build or turn section, monitor surveys and be alert to
signs of sidetracking.
• Reduce excessive doglegs by reaming with a stiff hole opener assembly. Monitor and
limit excessive torque. Be alert to signs of potential sidetracking.
• If very high torque is encountered when drilling a deviated hole, the following should
be considered :
◊ Add a torque reducer to the mud.
◊ On the next trip out, leave out selected stabilizers and replace drill collars with
HWDP.
◊ Investigate the mud for problems, increase the mud weight if necessary (See
section on hole instability)
◊ Replace the near bit stabilizer with a roller reamer or other suitable assemblies
• Where drill pipe wear indicates downhole metal to metal contact, the following
corrective actions should be taken :
__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Check the alignment of the derrick over the hole.

◊ Check the wear bushing
◊ Use the lowest practicable RPM or consider using a downhole motor.
◊ Use a BHA with the minimum weight
◊ Do not rotate with the bit off bottom
◊ Install rubber DP-casing protectors
◊ Casing inspection log may be considered if known doglegs exist in the cased
section and metal returns are excessive.
• Use ditch magnets and monitor recovery of metal cuttings.
• Ensure the correct co-ordinate system corrections are applied when using magnetic
survey tools. Thus, the convergence and current magnetic declination must be
specified. This is the Halliburton Drilling Engineer’s responsibility.
• Ensure that sufficient confirmed non-magnetic BHA components are used to eliminate
interference in survey results. The required amount of collars depends on:
◊ Inclination. The greater the inclination, the greater the protection required from
NMDC's.
◊ Hole Direction. The closer the hole azimuth is to magnetic East or West, the
greater the protection required.
◊ Well Location. The closer the well is to the North or South poles, the greater the
protection required.
◊ Adjacent wells.
Service companies will supply tables or a computer program to derive the required
collar length.
• If possible, kick-off the well in an easily drilled formation. The drillability of the
formation will dictate the type of equipment used to kick off and build angle.
• Where a rotary build assembly is used, it is essential to get sufficient weight to the bit,
in order to flex the lower BHA. For increased build up rate, use reduced RPM and
reduced pump rate if necessary.
• Maximum dog leg severity should not exceed "4-5" degrees per 30 m or 100 ft . (this
is to be checked with Halliburton since deep wells require less severe dog-legs and
moderate steerable assemblies are usually very accomodating.
• Avoid excessive doglegs by smooth application of parameters (ie. gradual increase and
decrease of WOB or RPM) in the build section or in minor corrections within a tangent
section. In general, take sufficient time to restrict dogleg severity to less than 1°/30 m
or 100 ft above the programmed build rate. If excessive dogleg severity is produced
over an interval, take corrective action such as :
◊ Wipe the dogleg

__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Ream the dogleg
◊ Plug back and restart the hole higher, if necessary
• Keep an up to date vertical section and plan view of the hole position and planned
trajectory. This will assist in the visual estimation of the closeness of the planned and
actual well paths, and any corrections required.
• Use a semi-packed assembly after a mud motor correction run to avoid excessive
stiffness, unless directional target acquisition constraints dictate otherwise.
Consideration should be made to a hole opener run prior to drilling ahead.
• Drillers must report and record (via the IADC Daily drilling report) the pick-up and
slack-off weights, and off-bottom free rotational weight of the string at least once a
tour, along with off-bottom and drilling torque ranges prior to tripping out or tagging
bottom after tripping in the hole.
• Mud property control is of primary importance for wellbore stability, particularly with
respect to shale lithologies. Wellbore instability is sometimes combated by increased
mud weight, and generally as the hole inclination increases, the required mud weight
for stability increases. Other reasons for wellbore instability may include borehole stress
and/or chemical interaction between the components of the mud system and the
formation.
• Where low side accumulation of a cuttings bed is thought to have occurred, while
drilling with a steerable system in the oriented mode with no surface pipe rotation, pipe
rotation may help to clear the problem. This depends on an ability to rotate the
assembly. If rotation is already being utilized, additional rotation may help alleviate the
problem.
• A low viscosity sweep, immediately followed by a high viscosity weighted sweep can
clear the hole of low side cutting accumulations. See Chapter 6 (Drilling Fluids and
Equipment) for more information on hole cleaning pills. Other techniques may include
back reaming or short trips to assist in moving/eliminating cuttings beds and allowing
them to be circulated out of the hole.
• Due consideration must be given to the well control kill mud pumping schedule on
wells with substantial horizontal displacement in build and tangent sections. The shut-
in dynamic drill pipe pressure profile must be adjusted over these sections to maintain
constant bottom hole pressure.
• Anti-collision calculations are to be updated regularly and suitable corrective actions
taken in areas where multiple wells exist.
• Drilling contractor will closely monitor drilling parameters in the event of a close
approach to a known well. The torque and ROP are obviously parameters to observe.
Others include cement in cuttings, ditch magnet metal increase, magnetic interference
affects from MWD survey tools if installed in the drill string.
__________________________________________________________________________
4.4 Correction Runs
4.4.1 Correction Run Requirements

Correction runs will be required if the following situations occur:
• Back -off procedures have been performed.
• Original target cannot be achieved.
• Deteriorating hole conditions.
4.4.2 General Recommendations

• Doglegs must be limited to a maximum of 4 degrees/30 m or 100 ft.
• Use a 2 degree bent sub in the kick-off assembly, use a 1.5-2.0 Bent Housing.
• Correction runs should be limited to 150 m or 500 ft. They should be at least 30 m or
100 ft long so that the MWD tool can detect the BHA response before completion of
the adjustment.
• The correction must be achieved and the new azimuth and inclination correctly
established during one bit run.
4.4.3 Sidetracking
• The hole and drilling fluid must be conditioned thoroughly to prevent cement slurry
contamination and other downhole problems.
• The plug must be dressed down 10 to 20 m or 35 to 70 ft to ascertain homogeneity and
integrity prior to attempting kick-off.
• Cement volumes should be calculated to allow at least 75 to 100 m or 250-325 ft of
cement above the fish or old hole TD.
• The trajectory should be planned and monitored to achieve a gradual change so that
severe doglegs do not occur.
• Surveys with the MWD tool should be taken as often as possible during the sidetrack
operation. As a rule of thumb, it is recommended to make a 3 degree overall curvature
change and, whenever possible, to limit the dogleg to that figure.
• Samples should be analyzed constantly during the kick-off, checking for the relative
percentages of cement and formation.
__________________________________________________________________________
5.0 TRIPPING
5.1 Tripping Safety
5.2 Tripping Practices
Refer to Section 3.2.1, within General Drilling Practices, ' General Procedures ', regarding
written instructions. For general equipment requirements, refer to Sections 2.6.4 through
to 2.6.9 and 2.6.16.
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 6 Tripping
5.1 Tripping Safety
The following checks and procedures are recommended:
• Before tripping, ensure the proper equipment required is in a serviceable condition

• Never make-up a connection with the rotary, using a tong as back up. This could break
the back-up wire.
• The driller should lower the string slowly while crew place the slips into the rotary
table bushing.
• Monitor the elevators carefully at the monkey board level, in case of snagging.
• Check that the Crown-O-Matic is properly installed and functioning prior to the trip
• Monitoring of mud levels, flowchecks and use of the trip tank while tripping in and out
of the hole is standard procedure. Ensure the mud logger is tracking volumes, and
check any discrepancy between drillfloor and mud logger’s instruments.
5.2 Tripping Practices
The following tripping practices should be adhered to at all times :

• The Rig Contractor’s Senior Representative must be on the drill floor before a trip is
carried out by the rig crew.
• The assistant driller and derrickman must ensure that the following points are carried
out:
◊ Check the mud system line up and that all valves are fully open or closed (as
appropriate)
◊ Trip tank fill up (from the correct pit to the trip tank)
◊ Return flow lined up to the header box and via the shakers (operating) to the
pits (or whatever specific line up is appropriate)
◊ Slug weight to specification (weight and volume required) and lined up to the
mud pump when necessary.
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will be on the rig floor when pulling out of the
hole for at least 10 stands or until the casing shoe and always until fully satisfied that
the hole is lined up and taking the correct volume of the right weight mud from the trip
tank. When pulling the first 5 stands from the hole, the fill pump will be left off, and the
wiper rubber left out, to confirm visually that the well is taking the proper amount of
fluid.
• Before tripping out of the hole, the driller will check the correct hole depth. He will
write the total number of stands and any single/double length in the master BHA tally
book, along with the depth in on the last kelly, and add this to the length of the BHA in
the hole. Account shall include the addition of or removal of any components to the
kelly etc.
• If a tight hole is experienced, the procedures laid down in Chapter 18, 'Stuck Pipe and
Fishing', of this guideline will be adhered to.
__________________________________________________________________________
Tripping Page 2 of 6 August 1995
• To avoid becoming stuck in the hole, the following should be noted :
(Note: This assumes a kelly is used. If top drive is available, it should be used to its
fullest capacity.
◊ Establish normal pick up and slack off weight on trips, so that any increase
above normal will be recognized.
◊ If the tight spot does not clear, increase the overpull in 10,000 lbs increments to
a maximum of 80% of the maximum allowable pull based on the lowest grade
drill pipe. If this is not adequate, pick up the kelly and wash/ream the tight
intervals.
◊ If using the kelly to wash and ream the tight spot, consider mud treatments to
lower fluid loss, adjust mud weight, decrease shale sensitivity and increase
carrying capacity of the mud.
• The trip tank will be used at all times for both trips in and out of the hole. Adequate
time will be given to fill or empty the tank so that an accurate volume usage can be
established. The hole will be maintained full of mud if possible, at all times. If total
losses are noted, the hole will be filled with water or diesel if using oil based mud if
necessary (keeping an accurate tally of the amount used). The assembly will not be
tripped out of the hole until a stable fluid level is established.
If losses cannot be stopped, the assembly must not be tripped out of the hole without
the authority of the drilling superintendent.
• A record sheet of the expected and actual volumes to fill the hole and the displacement
volume of the pipe will be kept while tripping out and in respectively. This record will
be set out numerically and in the form of a trip graph. The trip graph is useful as a
visual record. It can be compared between trips and used to detect repeated trends
which may indicate faulty trip tank pit volume readings or a 'hole ballooning' affect.
The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will ensure that the Rig Contractor’s trip volume
recording methods and records are adequate and that they instigate the use of a trip
graph, if not already in use.
When a mud logging unit is in use, a cross check is to be made with the mud logger’s
record of trip tank volume.
• While tripping pipe, flow checks should be made at the following points:
◊ When the bit is just off the bottom prior to tripping.

◊ When the bit is at the casing shoe.
◊ Prior to pulling the drill collars through the BOP.
◊ When the calculated pipe displacement volumes do not compare with the
measured displacement volumes while tripping in or out of the hole.
__________________________________________________________________________
• The flow check will be conducted prior to slugging the pipe or dropping a survey
instrument barrel. When OBM is in use, a 15 minute flow check is required. When
WBM is used, a 5 minute flow check is adequate.
• Where the swab and surge pressures could be close to causing an influx or fracturing
the formations, swab and surge calculations must be made. Tripping speeds must then
be chosen to keep the swab and surge pressures below the critical values. Ensure that
the driller pulls each stand smoothly using the entire optimum pull time.
• When the reservoir is exposed, kick drills should be carried out, with the bit inside the
shoe. Refer to the Halliburton Well Control Manual.
• When circulation is stopped, and after all lines have drained from the flowline to the
first observation point of the flowline (gumbo trap or header box), a continued small
flow of fluid is often noted, without any subsequent influx (gas, oil, formation water).
A mechanism which possibly explains some of the occurrences of this phenomenon
called ' Hole Ballooning affect'.
• The suggested mechanism is that when circulation is stopped, annular friction pressures
are removed and the hole returns to its "un-ballooned" state thus causing flow from the
well. The flow quickly stops. This is particularly apparent in deep slim holes.
• On SCR rigs, sufficient generators are to be running while tripping, as time required to
start a generator could be vital if the pipe sticks.
• BHA component handling is to be conducted in such a way that no loose connection is
run beneath the rotary table, to avoid the possibility of tools being lost in the hole.
• Ensure that the driller applies the correct make-up torque to all connections. The
recommended bit, drill pipe, collars, etc. make up torques should be made available.
The tong torque gauge will be checked for function and that it is correctly calibrated
for the length of long arm in use.
• The Driller will also ensure that tool joints are positioned at the correct height above
the slips to prevent pipe bending.
• Care must be taken when handling jars. The safety clamp will be removed and installed
strictly as per the manufacturer’s specification. Particular care is to be taken if more
than one jar is placed in the string.
• Use a drill collar safety clamp on all drill collars without zip lift grooves.
• The Maximum permissible tensile load of the weakest point in the string shall be
known by the Driller. Refer to section 13.0 for determinization of this point.
• Mud logging personnel are to monitor trips for volume and report any discrepancies to
the driller and Halliburton Drilling Supervisor immediately.
• When the drillstring is out of the hole, the drill collars should be racked in such a way
that the drill pipe can be run into the hole first, without any delay.
• When the drillstring is out of the hole, a well cover plate must be placed in position to
prevent any junk, from falling into the hole, and the blind rams are to be closed.
• While the assembly is out of the hole, the trip tank will be used to continuously monitor
the hole.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Any time a trip is interrupted, the installation of a drill pipe safety valve is
recommended (have two available with the proper connections on the floor at all
times).
• A weighted slug (usually 2 ppg heavier than the mud in the hole), should be pumped
into the drillstring to ensure that a dry trip is made. Where OBM is being used, pump
the slug after pulling the first 3 stands.
• If drill pipe is pulled wet, the mud inside the pipe will be returned to the hole using a
mud bucket and draining the mud bucket into the bell nipple. Fill volumes therefore
should be the same as for dry pipe.
• It is the responsibility of the driller to close the well in, if a kick is indicated or
suspected.
• When drilling with Oil Based Muds (OBM), the solubility of gas in OBM can cause
dangerous situations (uncontrolled gas release around the rig site) unless operational
procedures are modified to account for the phenomenon.
• Drilling with water based muds, where trip gas is likely to be high can lead to a similar
uncontrolled release of gas at surface.
The following techniques are recommended for situations where large amounts of gas are
expected to be circulated to surface.
• On Trip in the Hole :
• On reaching bottom(or start of circulation on way to bottom) circulate bottoms up until

sample is within 600 m or 2,000 ft of surface.
• Close BOP's and circulate through a fully open choke, via the Mud Gas Separator until
any possible trip gas is out of the hole.
• Open BOP's and continue operation.
Trip out of Hole :
◊ Circulate bottoms up after drilling is completed, monitoring the gas levels from
the well.
◊ Flow check. Do not pump a slug for the first 3 stands. Do not survey. Make a
short trip (hole conditions will indicate length) to at least the top of the
reservoir section.
◊ Flow check. Run in the hole. Once back on bottom, circulate bottoms-up to
within 600 m or 2,000 ft of surface, or until there is any increase in pit volume,
gas etc. indicative of gas expansion .
◊ Close the BOP and continue circulation through a fully open choke via the Mud
Gas Separator until any possible trip gas is out of the hole.
__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Open BOP - check for flow - continue to pull out of the hole providing no
influx has been seen (a viable option could be to go back into the hole and
condition until hole indicators are more favorable).
• If the drillstring is likely to remain totally or partially empty of mud when running in the
hole (due to floats, small bit nozzles etc.) the correct displacement must be tracked and
the string filled frequently (collapse pressure and a safety margin). An accurate record
of the fill up volume utilized to fill the string is required.
• Drill pipe must not be drifted while in hole.
__________________________________________________________________________
6.0 DRILLING FLUIDS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 Drilling Fluids, Types
6.1.1 Spud Muds
6.1.2 Water Based Muds
6.1.2.1 Bentonite Mud (Dispersed, Non - Inhibited)
6.1.2.2 Gypsum/Polymer Mud (Non - Dispersed, Moderately Inhibited)
6.1.2.3 KCl/ Polymer Mud (Non - Dispersed, Inhibited)
6.1.3 Invert Oil Emulsion Muds
6.1.3.1 Definition and Basic Technical Description
6.1.3.2 General Formulation
6.1.3.3 Physical Properties And Typical Parameters Of IOEM
6.1.3.4 Potential Problems and Solutions with IOEM
6.2 Contingency Treatments
6.2.1 Lost Circulation General
6.2.1.1 Mud Weight Reduction To Cure Losses
6.2.1.2 LCM Pills : Solid and Soluble Temporary Liquid Preparations
Non Reservoir
Reservoir
6.2.1.3 LCM Pills : Soft
Diatomaceous Earth (high fluid loss)
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 29 Drilling Fluids and Equipment
Oil/ Bentonite (gunk)
Oil/ Bentonite/ Cement
Fresh Water/ Organophilic Clay (for OBM)
6.2.2 Kick Control Barite Plug
6.2.3 Hole Cleaning (General And Pill Requirements)
6.3 Solids Control and Equipment
6.3.1 Operation and Optimization of Solids Control Equipment
6.3.1.1 Flowline Located Traps
6.3.1.2 Shale Shakers
6.3.1.3 Settling Tanks
6.3.1.4 Hydrocyclone Devices (General)
6.3.1.5 Desander
6.3.1.6 Desilter
6.3.1.7 Mud Cleaner
6.3.1.8 Centrifuges
6.3.1.9 Vacuum Degasser
6.4 Mud Reporting and Documentation
6.4.1 Daily Mud Report
6.4.2 End of Well Report
6.5 Mud and General Contingency treatment Equipment and

Material Requirements
__________________________________________________________________________
Drilling Fluids and Equipment Page 2 of 29 August 1995
6.1 Drilling Fluids, Types
6.1.1 Spud Muds

Spud muds are used for large surface holes which are drilled with relatively low annular
velocities and require high viscosity to lift and suspend cuttings. These muds have a high
YP/PV ratio, to attain the necessary characteristics.
• Where formations allow, a part native mud system may be employed.

• Where drilling without returns in top hole, water is the drilling fluid, with sweeps of Hi-
VIS pre-hydrated bentonite occasionally, to assist hole cleaning.
Composition of Prehydrated Bentonite:
Fresh water .159 cubic meters or 1 bbl (water with less than
5000 mg/l chlorides)
Soda Ash (Na2CO3) 0.7 kg/m3 or 0.25 ppb
Bentonite 85 kg/m3 or 30 ppb (pilot test if in doubt).
Caustic Soda (NaOH)1.4 - 2.8 kg/m3 or 0.5-1.0
ppb (pH adjusted to 10.0 -10.5)
Recommended Viscosity 100 - 120 seconds/quart
NOTE: Soda Ash is used to reduce the calcium ion content of the water to
100 mg/l. Care should be taken not to over treat the drill water.
Contingency Supply of Guar Gum / Xanthan Gum

A viscosifing polymer may be kept on the rig as a contingency should there be rapid
requirement for high viscosity mud. Care should be taken to avoid Caustic Soda additions
as Guar Gum rapidly thins in a high pH environment. If kept for more than 12 hours, a
bacteriacide should be added. Its main advantage is in speed of mixing but it has no
beneficial wall cake properties.
6.1.2 Water Based Muds

Prior to discussion of some of the WBM systems, the terms which are applied to clay
particle mechanics will be briefly discussed here, as confusion often occurs between the
terms.
Dispersion: Each clay particle can be envisaged as a pack of cards. Dependant on the
solution chemistry (pH etc.) the individual cards separate from the pack. The platelets
disperse.
• When clay is dispersed into individual platelets, these associate in several ways
◊ Aggregation : Face to face association

__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Flocculation : Edge to face association

The rheological properties associated with these phenomenon are :
• Increased viscosity from dispersion followed by flocculation. Decreased viscosity from
Aggregation and de-flocculation
6.1.2.1 Bentonite Mud (Dispersed, Non-Inhibited)

This section covers fresh water and seawater / prehydrated bentonite mud systems, referred
to respectively as CMF and CMS.
This is the basic mud system in use on land /and or offshore wells where shale inhibition is
not required.
The mud system’s main advantages are low cost and easy maintenance, along with a high
solids tolerance. The disadvantages are its lack of sensitive clays inhibition and its
susceptibility to chemical contaminants (salt, anhydrite, cement).
• Addition of lignosulfonate deflocculates (neutralizes charges on) the solids, resulting in

PV/YP/GELS reduction.
Reduce viscosity by lowering solids per unit volume with addition of water and/or fresh
mud. Premixes are required to maintain the desired properties.
Recommended Composition
CMS Muds
Caustic Soda 0.8 - 2.8 kg/m3 or 0.28-1.0 ppb (pH 9.5- 10.5)
Bentonite 30 kg/m3 or 10.5 ppb
Bentonite to be prehydrated and then added such that bentonite concentration in
the whole mud corresponds to 30 kg/m 3.
CMC-LV 5.5 - 8.5 kg/m3 or 2-3 ppb (optional, dependent on required

fluid loss)
CMC-HV 8.5 kg/m3 or 3 ppb
Barite As required for weight.
CMF Muds
Caustic Soda 0.8 - 2.8 kg/m3 or 0.28-1.0 ppb (pH 9.5- 10.5)
Bentonite 5 - 85 kg/m3 or 19-30 ppb
CMC-LV 5.7 kg/m3 or 2 ppb (optional, dependent on required fluid loss)
Soda Ash 0.4 kg/m3 or 0.15 ppb or every 100 mg/l reduction of
dissolved calcium required to decrease the fresh water calcium
to 100 mg/l.
__________________________________________________________________________
Barite As required for weight.

The formulations for CMF and CMS muds given above should yield the following
properties:
Density - 1050 kg/m3 or 8.8 ppg (without Barite)
VIS - 45 to 50 sec/qt
PV - 15
YP - 25
Gels - 2/5
API F.L. - less than 10
pH - approx 10.0
Add lignosulfonate as required after drilling commences. Maximum effective
concentration is 20 kg/m3 or 7 ppb. Lignosulfonate is acidic however, but is effective at
pH 9.5 - 10.5. Therefore Caustic Soda additions are also required (also reducing the
effects of corrosion);
Caustic Soda - 1 drum (50 kg or 100 lbs) per 5 sacks (25 kg or 50 lbs)
Lignosulfonate.
Treatment:
Increase weight - dilution/solid control.
(If the system is to be run weighted, then MBT should be run lower)
Increase viscosity - up CMC
-HV or bentonite (also F.Loss)
Decrease viscosity - lignosulfonate, dilution
Decrease fluid loss - down bentonite or CMC
-LV.
Increase pH control - up caustic soda
Decrease PV - dilution/dump sand traps.
Increase YP/GELS - CMC-HV for YP. XCD-polymer very effective for YP and
gels.
Decrease YP/GELS - water/fresh mud/lignosulfonate
- dump sand traps.
Decrease MBT - dilution.
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 1.6 General Properties of a CMS or CMF mud system
Property 17.5" hole 12.25" hole 8.5" hole

Density As per program As per program As per program
PV at FL As low as poss <50 As low as poss <50 As low as poss <50
temperature
YP at FL 20 - 30 20 - 25 18 - 22
temperature
Gels at FL temp 10 sec < 15 10 sec < 15 10 sec < 15
10 min <40 10 min <40 10 min <40
Fluid Loss (API) < 10 ml 6 - 8 ml 3 - 5 ml
Sand low as poss', < 2% low as poss', < 2% low as poss', < 2%
MBT < 30 ppb bentonite < 30 ppb bentonite < 30 ppb bentonite
eq eq eq
pH 9.5 - 10.5 9.5 - 10.5 9.5 - 10.5
Calcium < 300 mg/l < 300 mg/l < 300 mg/l
If green cement is expected, then leave the pH lower to counter the effects of cement
contamination. Pre-treatment with Sodium Bicarbonate would also be of help. A treatment
of 0.7 kg/m3 or 0.25 ppb of Sodium Bicarbonate is adequate.
Salt water contamination will also increase viscosity and fluid loss. The salt cannot be
removed chemically. Treatment consists of :
• Dilution and/or dispersion with Lignosulfonate

• Addition of Fluid loss reducer (CMC-LV).
The Bentonite mud systems can be extended to higher temperature and longer small
diameter hole sections by the addition of sulfated resins (e.g. Resinex). They provide
rheological stabilization at higher anticipated bottom hole temperature and improved
HT/HP fluid loss by way of a thin and impermeable filter cake.
Normally, the Hi-Temp system is derived from the CMF mud. However, the following
general composition applies :
Water
Bentonite variable kg/m3
CMC-LV 8.5 kg/m3 or 3 ppb (dependent on required fluid loss)
CMC-HV 1.4 kg/m3 or 0.5 ppb
Caustic Soda 0.8 kg/m3 or 0.28 ppb (pH 9.5- 10.5)
__________________________________________________________________________
Resinex/Hi-Temp 8.5 - 11.5 kg/m3 or 3-4 ppb

In practice, the resins should be added slowly over at least 2 circulations. The affect on
down hole mud cake is not instantaneous, and thus any change over to the system must be
achieved prior to entering the zone which requires use of the system.
6.1.2.2 Gypsum/Polymer System

General
One of a family of Calcium treated muds, the Gypsum/Polymer system is a mildly inhibitive
system used for drilling shales and massive anhydrite sequences. The origin of its inhibitive
qualities depends on the partial dissolution of calcium in the mud (from the Gypsum,
CaSO4.2H2O). This dissolved Ca2+ exchanges with Na+ in the clay structure, with a
resulting increase in the attractive force between clay plates.
Thus :
• For newly drilled hole, the calcium inhibits dispersion

• For clay already dispersed in the mud system, an aggregation process occurs, which
will 'ultimately' reduce viscosity. The process goes via a flocculation phase, producing
the well known viscosity "hump". This will occur when converting a CMF system to a
gypsum/polymer system. Consideration should be given to breaking over the system to
Gypsum/Polymer over 2 - 3 circulations.
General properties are :
Density < 1300 kg/m3 or 10.9 ppg

PV +/- 20
YP +/- 10 - 15
Gels 8/12
Fluid Loss+/- 10 ml
pH 9.5-10.5
Excess Gypsum 5.5 - 9 kg/m3 or 2-3 ppb (600 - 1,200 mg/l calcium). As a result of the
aggregated (non-dispersed) nature of the fluid, fluid loss control is not given by bentonite,
but is supplied by polymers, eg. PAC and starch. PAC polymer is a protective colloid
which inhibits shale swelling by adsorption.
__________________________________________________________________________
Recommended Composition (dependent on well temperature etc.):
Water
PAC 4.3-5.7 kg/m 3 or 1.5-2.0 ppb (fluid loss control)
XC Polymer (Xanthan Gum) 0.8-1.4 kg/m3 or 0.28-0.50 ppb (viscosifer)
Starch 5.7-11.4 kg/m3 or 2-4 ppb (fluid loss control and shall
control)
Caustic 2.8 kg/m3 or 1 ppb
Gypsum 11.4-17 kg/m3 or 4-6 ppb
Notes on running the gypsum/polymer system

:
• pH should not be increased above pH of 10.5 as calcium solubility will be reduced.
• Alkalinity will decrease with gypsum additions.
• A defoaming agent is required while mixing the mud..
• A bactericide is require, if starch products are used.
• The system is only mildly inhibitive, and if used in a gumbo section, massive dilution
will be required.
• The excess gypsum must not be allowed to deplete, or further gypsum additions will
lead to another viscosity 'hump' being encountered.
6.1.2.3 KCL/Polymer System (Non - Dispersed, Inhibitive)
General
If hydratable clays are expected, then the Ca2+ from gypsum provides insufficient inhibition.
The problems related to insufficient inhibition (gumbo in younger formations and
sloughing/caving in older) would still occur even after massive dilution treatments to
control MBT level. A KCl system has a greater degree of inhibition than other water based
fluids due to the nature of the potassium ion. As KCl has a high solubility, it can be used in
a concentration between 0 - 23 kg/m3 or 0-8 ppb. The KCl provides inhibitive K+ ions.
The K+ ions exchange with the Na+ ions present in the clays to minimize the amount of
water that can be absorbed by the clays. This ion exchange process helps to stabilize the
hole sections containing hydratable clays. Further inhibition can be provided with hydration
suppressant additives.
Polymer can be used to provide a further inhibitive affect, although in better known areas it
may not be required. This polymer (hydrolyzed co-polymer of Polyacrylamide and
Polyacrylate) works by forming a viscous gel like coating on the formation and
encapsulating around cuttings, to slow the water entry into the shale. The amount of
__________________________________________________________________________
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide may be dependent to some degree on mud rheology, as it tends

to act as a viscosifier.
Other properties (viscosity and fluid loss) are controlled by XC polymer and starch/PAC
respectively. Starch is used as the primary fluid loss control agent. Starch is stable up to a
temperature of 107°C or 224°F. PAC can be used to provide fluid loss control, without
increasing viscosity, to a temperature of 150°C or 300°F.
The system is a non- dispersed system, and dispersants should not be added, unless control
of the properties by dilution has become uneconomical.
Formulation
Water fresh or seawater, but with a maximum

Calcium level of 400 mg/l
Caustic (pH 9.5 - 10.5) 2.2 kg/m3 or 0.75 ppb As required
3
KCl 57 - 115 kg/m or 20-40 ppb as Inhibition
instructed
Starch 5.7 - 11.5 kg/m3 or 2-4 ppb Fluid loss (or PAC-LV)
XC Polymer 1.5 - 2.8 kg/m3 or 0.5-1.0 ppb Viscosifier
(or PAC-HV at 1 - 2 kg/m3 or 0.35-0.9
ppb)
Hydrolysed 2.8 kg/m3or 1 ppb Encapsulation inhib'
Polyacrylamide
PAC-LV 8.5 kg/m3 or 3.0 ppb (see starch Fluid loss
above)
The above formulation will yield the following mud properties :
Density - 1080 kg/m3or 9.0 ppg
MF VIS - 45 to 50
PV - 15 to 20
YP - 20 to 25
pH - 9.5 to 10.5
API F.L. - less than 10
K+ - 52 g/l (with 10 kg/m3 0r 3.5 ppb KCl)
For log evaluation purposes, it is desirable that the KCl is maintained at a constant
concentration when drilling through a reservoir section.
Running and maintaining a KCl/Polymer system
__________________________________________________________________________
The initial KCl brine is usually supplied in solution at approximately 23 kg/m3 or 8 ppb
(density 1140 kg/m3 or 9.5 ppg). This will be diluted back to the required concentration,
but an excess (possibly 14 kg/m3 or 5 ppb) should be used on the first circulation, as a
drop in KCl concentration is often noted.
The hydrolyzed polyacrylamide should be mixed by shearing prior to pumping, or
allowance made with coarse shaker screens on the first circulations.
When MBT levels reach 55 kg/m3 or 20 ppb bentonite, rheology becomes difficult to
control. The mud is treated with new volume.
• The system is sensitive to build-up of drilled solids, especially fines and requires
efficient solids removal equipment (see MBT restriction above)
• Sensitive to build up of calcium eg. from drilling cement or contamination with calcium
brines. This makes polyacrylamide encapsulator degrade rapidly. Cement
contamination is treated with sodium bicarbonate.
The KCl system's greater inhibitive quality has to be balanced against its greater cost
(about twice as expensive as gypsum/polymer) and lower tolerance to reactive drilled
solids (gypsum/polymer will tolerate approximately 55 kg/m3 or 20 ppb MBT as opposed
to 20 kg/m3 or 7 ppb MBT).
6.1.3 Invert Oil Emulsion Muds (IOEM)
6.1.3.1 Definition and Basic Technical Description

IOEM is a type of oil based mud (OBM) in which the continuous phase is oil, but with a
minimum 10% emulsified water within it. The continuous phase is exposed directly to the
well bore. The base oil can be of various types, including diesel and various different
grades of low toxicity oils.
The discontinuous (internal) phase is brine, which provides some of the rheological control
and fluid loss characteristics. The brine phase exists as droplets within the oil phase, and
like solids within a mud, imparts the basic viscosity. Thus the greater the water content, the
higher will be the inherent viscosity of the system. The activity of the brine phase (ideally
balanced with the formation water activity) is usually controlled by calcium chloride
(sodium chloride can be used).
The emulsification of oil and water is accomplished by the physical mixing of the fluids
with primary and secondary emulsifiers, which stabilize the water droplets in the oil. The
Primary emulsifier (of the fatty acid type) requires lime to function, and an excess of lime
is maintained for this reason.
Viscosity is provided by an oil dispersible (amine treated) clay, which is resident in the oil
phase. The performance of these additives depends on their ability to swell in the base oil
as well as water. This swelling is promoted by a higher aromatic and napthemic content.
The viscosifiers are also more effective on raising YP in muds with lower oil/water ratios.
__________________________________________________________________________
Fluid loss control is provided by asphalt, gilsonite and oil dispersible (amine treated)
lignite.
Oil wetting agents are designed to keep the water phase separate from the cuttings within
the mud system and suspend the solids in the oil phase. As most minerals which form
cuttings are negatively charged, positively charged molecules are used for this purpose.
Normally, the hydrocarbon 'tail' of the compound dissolves into the oil phase and an amine
attaches to the cutting.
As the numerous advantages and disadvantages of OBM are well documented elsewhere,
they are not covered here.
6.1.3.2 General Formulation

Base Oil 160 litres or 1 bbl
Primary Emulsifier Absolute value varies with product, but +/- 5.7 kg/m3 or
+/- 2 ppb
Secondary Emulsifier Absolute value varies with product, but +/- 22.8 kg/m3 or
+/- 8 ppb
Lime 14 kg/m3or 5 ppb
Calcium Chloride To provide the required WPS.
Fluid Loss Controller System dependent, may not be used, due to toxic nature
Viscosifier 11.4 - 23 kg/m3 or 4-8 ppb
Barite As required
Oil wetting agent This agent may be separate or the action may be provided
by the secondary emulsifier
The general order of mixing IOEM is normally laid down in the mud companies procedure.
But if volume is urgently required, a single pit mix can be accomplished. However, the
preferred order is as follows :
• Fill a pit with the required base oil

• Add the primary viscosifier and gun to mix thoroughly
• Make up the brine phase of the mud in a separate tank and then add to base oil
relatively slowly, under maximum available shearing conditions (high pressure shearing
line, if possible)
• Once mixing of brine and base oil complete, simultaneously add lime and the secondary
emulsifier. Continue to shear for maximum emulsion stability
Add the viscosifier, and shear until required rheology (at least sufficient to suspend
barite) is achieved.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Add weighting agent to required mud weight and shear for as long as possible prior to
displacement.
6.1.3.3 Physical Properties and Typical Parameters of IOEM

• Oil/water ratio depends on:
◊ System used
◊ Mud density
◊ PV
With increased mud weight, the stability of the emulsion becomes more difficult to
maintain. It also becomes more difficult to prevent water wetting of the solids in the
system. See Table 2.6, for general information on mud weight vs. OWR. Note that whilst
drilling salts, it is advisable to carry a higher oil/water ratio than these mud weights
suggest, as salt water flows and water pill spotting will be compensated for in advance.
Table 2.6 Typical Oil/ Water vs. Mud Weights for IOEM.
Oil / Water ratio Mud Weight kg/m3 or

ppg
50/50 To 1200 or 10.0
51/49 - 55/45 1205 - 1320 or 10.1
56/44 - 59/41 1325 - 1440 of 11.1-12.0
60/40 - 65/35 1445 - 1560 or12.1-13.0
66/34 - 69/31 1565 - 1680 or 13.1-14.0
70/30 - 79/21 1685 - 1920 or 14.1-16.0
80/20 - 90/10 1925 - 2280 or 16.1-19.1
Water Phase Salinity (WPS)

Water Phase Salinity (WPS) can be produced by both Calcium Chloride and Sodium
Chloride, although the maximum WPS from Sodium Chloride is 180,000 mg/l. One
advantage of using NaCl is that mud testing procedures are less liable to error, due to the
presence of multiple salt phases.
WPS is typically 150,000 - 170,000 mg/l in the water phase alone. This figure is not a
whole mud figure.
Viscosity
The standard temperature for YP, PV and Gels determination is 50° C or 122° F, but
significant circulation temperature departure should lead to a different but consistent value.
MF viscosity is of little relevance for property specification, due to temperature variation.
__________________________________________________________________________
Typical values are given in the Table 3.6
Table 3.6 Recommended ranges of PV and YP for differing mud weights (taken at
50°C), assuming the typical Oil/Water range vs. Mud Weight.
YP Range PV Range Mud Weight kg/m3

5 - 12 18 - 38 To 1200 or 10.0
7 - 14 30 - 45 1205 - 1320 or 10.1
8 - 15 35 - 54 1325 - 1440 of 11.1-12.0
8 - 16 38 - 62 1445 - 1560 or12.1-13.0
9 - 17 45 - 73 1565 - 1680 or 13.1-14.0
9 - 18 54 - 95 1685 - 1920 or 14.1-16.0
10 - 21 72 - 143 1925 - 2280 or 16.1-19.1
• HTHP Fluid loss

Carried out normally at 35 bar differential or 500 psi and a minimum 90°C or 194°F.
The temperature should be increased to whatever BHCT is estimated to be, in
reasonable stages. The filtrate should always be oil. The appearance of water indicates
emulsion breakdown at bottom hole conditions, and should be treated with emulsifier.
• Mud weight should be reported at the temperature it was taken at.
• Emulsion Electrical Stability (ES)
This is only an indication of emulsion stability. Trend data showing steady decrease in
E.Stab may be taken to indicate an emulsifier treatment is required. The following
statements are general :
◊ A minimum ES voltage for a well sheared (circulated) mud system is normally

500 v
◊ A new mud system's ES should progressively increase from a value (possibly
lower than 500 v) as the water droplets reduce in size and viscosifiers become
more effective.
◊ Where rapid dilution is normally required (17.5" hole section), momentary ES
readings may be as low as 300 v, without problems occurring.
6.1.3.4 Potential Problems and Solutions with IOEM

Water Wetting Of Mud Solids
__________________________________________________________________________
A "grainy" appearance of the mud, water in the filtrate and electrical stability decrease can
all be indicative of water wetting of solids. As severity of water wetting increases, the
cuttings may tend to stick together and be noticeably softer. Increased barite removal will
also be noted at the solids control equipment.
The situation may result from insufficient treatment of emulsifiers and/or oil wetting agent,
or the following
• Elevated ROP in large diameter hole sections

• Rapid weight up allowing insufficient time to mix the required wetting agents
• A water flow
Salt Drilling
As IOEM tends to drill a true gauge hole, and salt exhibits plastic creep deformation, their
is a tendency to stick the drill string. This occurs most frequently at connection time, and
can be avoided by drilling off completely prior to picking up (with pumps running) and
then reaming the new open hole prior to making the connection.
If the drill string becomes stuck, it is frequently at the bit and may be freed by pumping/
soaking a 4.8 cubic meters or 30 bbl water pill with 2% by volume drilling detergent.
Magnesium brine flows can destroy the emulsion by reacting with the lime in the mud
system. An excess of lime should thus be carried. Note however that some types of
emulsifier based on polyamide are not affected by the magnesium.
Water Flows
In high weight / high oil/water ratio mud systems, water luflux will result in an initial
localized large reduction in OWR. A resultant increase in viscosity and decrease in
emulsion stability will occur. With reference to this affect and the magnesium brine affect,
if drilling in an area noted for kicks, the following is recommended :
• Maintain high levels of oil wetting agent and emulsifier in the system
• Maintain a minimum of 8.6 kg/m 3
or 3 ppb excess lime concentration.
6.2 Contingency Treatments
6.2.1 Lost Circulation General

Prior to attempting to cure lost circulation, an attempt to categorize the loss zone type is
vital, as the curative methods used depend on this. Losses may be due to natural or drilling
related causes, some of which are as follows :
• Coarse sand and gravel beds with extreme permeability, usually shallow.
• The majority of losses occur to natural fracture zones, and can occur at very low
differential fluid pressures. Drilling process induced fractures are similar in nature.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Cavernous formations, normally found in limestone and dolomite areas.

• Excessive overbalance in an interval, which may be natural or due to production
depletion of a zone.
Normally, the possibility of encountering such zones will be noted in the drilling program,
and a suitable LCM can be chosen.
Location of the loss zone is an issue which also affects the method used to cure lost
circulation. This, along with other aspects (eg. reporting of lost circulation etc.) is covered
in the chapter on drilling problems, within this guideline.
An important issue to note concerns the tools (MWD, LWD, Motors, etc) within the
BHA, and the restrictions they apply to usage of LCM, as well as bit nozzle size for
granular solid LCM's. To a degree, these restrictions depend on the severity of the lost
circulation, as the choice between loosing a hole and a malfunctioning MWD is clear. The
MWD contractor normally provides a pressure relief sub within the BHA, which can be
utilized to circulate, if the string becomes blocked.
6.2.1.1 Mud Weight Reduction to Cure Losses

Where total losses, the hole will be filled with water or base oil (which ever is appropriate
and available) until a fluid column is returned to surface. The recorded volume and density
of the fill up fluid, and the estimated depth of the loss zone can be used to calculate the
maximum allowable mud weight tolerable at the loss zone. If this does not cause a problem
with balancing pore pressure in the open hole, the mud weight can be reduced to this level.
6.2.1.2 LCM Pills : Solid and Soluble Temporary Liquid Preparations

The following description of solid LCM and liquid temporary pills assumes that the loss
zone to be treated is not of the cavernous or large fracture zone types (thus usually not
high loss rate), as this LCM would probably not be appropriate. Distinguishing between the
types of zone basically depends on 2 factors :
1. Loss rate and type (static or dynamic)

2. Well information (geological, from cuttings and from previous well
information, including core/ well test data etc.).
As a general rule, care should be taken to avoid getting the LCM plug setting string
differentially stuck while attempting to cure losses. This involves minimizing the periods
when the string is motionless (longitudinally and rotationally).
The solids used for this type of LCM pill rely on superficial bridging of pore and minor
fracture planes, which for the loss zone. The following basic types exist :
Flake mica
__________________________________________________________________________
cellophane
Granular nutshell
calcium carbonate
salt
Fibrous glass fiber

wood fiber
animal fiber
= Suitable for OBM

= Not suitable for OBM (usually due to an adverse affect on
emulsion stability)
The liquid preparations are supplied by various companies, and thus limitations are not
mentioned.
As noted the type of LCM used depends on the mud system, but also on the interval
containing the loss zone (reservoir or non-reservoir). The following separates the treatment
options into reservoir and non- reservoir.
Non - Reservoir
Generally, it is thought that LCM concentrations in excess of 45 ppb in an LCM pill will
not provide further benefit. Similarly, a circulating systems LCM concentration of 15 - 20
ppb is thought to be the maximum required.
• Seepage losses (≤= 1.6 cubic meters / hr or 10 bbl/hr)

Add fine mica to the circulating system at 100 kg/hr or 220 lb/hr while monitoring
results on loss rate.
• Losses at 1.6 - 3.2 cubic meters / hr. or 10-20 bbl/hr

A pill consisting of 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb fine mica and 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb medium
mica of 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb liquid
• Losses in excess of 3.2 cubic meters / hr. or 20 bbl/hr_
• A pill consisting of : 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb fine mica
40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb medium mica
40 kg/m3or 15 ppb pre-blended fibrous and

granular LCM (Kwikseal)
__________________________________________________________________________
If this is unsuccessful : 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb fine/medium mica
70 kg/m3 or 25 ppb blended medium and coarse

fibrous and granular LCM
Another option is to use a fine cellulose product fiber in place of fine mica at the same
concentration. Note however that temperature limitations (in this case 120°C or 250°F)
apply to some products. Refer to the product data sheet.
Prior to using these pill formulations, consideration should be given to the following :
MWD tool. Coarse grade LCM should not be used. Refer to manufacturer for the
acceptability of fibrous LCM's
Displace the pill around the open hole annulus at a slow rate (eg. 750 lpm or 250 gpm).
If the loss zone location is known, allow the LCM to 'soak'.
If an LCM zone is thought likely in the hole section to be drilled, bit nozzle size should
be a minimum of 16/32". If this is too large, a circulating sub should be incorporated in
the BHA.
Reservoir
Note that it is vital that the Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator is contacted prior to using
LCM remedies in the reservoir section.
Two optional treatments types follow, which are based on predominantly liquid treatments,
or on calcium carbonate. Note that their are two grades of calcium carbonate, with marble
types used in the instance where erosion resistance is required (such as when the material
is to be repeatedly circulate).
Option 1.
• Loss rate < 3.2 m3 / hr. or <20 bbl/hr
Liquid casing: 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb
• Loss rate > 3.2 m3/ hr. or >20 bbl/hr
OM seal 40 kg/m3or 15 ppb
Liquid casing 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb
The cellulose fiber and OM seal are partially acid soluble, or can be flowed back easily.
These specific products should not be used at BHST of greater than 120 °C or 250°F.
Option 2. (calcium carbonate)

• Seepage Loss (< 1.6 cubic meters / hr. or <10 bbl/hr)
• Add 50 micron (median particle size) CaCO3 to the circulating system at 110kg/hr or
250 lbs/hr. Monitor for loss rate.
• Loss rate (1.6 - 3.2 cubic meters / hr. or 10-20 bbl/hr)
__________________________________________________________________________
• Pump a pill with : 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb 50 micron CaCO3

• kg/m3 or 15 ppb 150 micron CaCO3
• Loss rate (3.2 - 6.4 cubic meters / hr. or 20-40 bbl/hr
• Pump a pill with : 40 kg/m3 or 15 ppb 50 micron CaCO3
kg/m3 or 15 ppb 150 micron CaCO3
kg/m3 or 15 ppb 600 micron CaCO3
With respect to calcium carbonate LCM, the material is acid soluble and the bit nozzle size
should allow clear passage of the coarsest grade of LCM. This can be checked by using a
small amount of the LCM, and putting it through a nozzle. However, care must be taken to
suspend the LCM adequately, as delays while pumping the LCM may lead to drop out and
nozzle plugging. A circulating sub should be considered in these instances.
6.2.1.3 LCM Pills - Soft (Gunk, Gunk-Cement etc.)

These types of plug or not routinely used, and are considered to be for serious or
moderately serious lost circulation situations, usually associated with cavernous or
fractured zones.
They are frequently used in combination. For example, a cement plug may be placed after a
gunk plug, as the gunk plug will provide backing for the cement, thus stopping it being
pushed away into the formation.
The drill out procedure for all the plug types is the same. Break circulation well above the
plugged zone and gradually work down, using minimum hydraulics.
High Fluid Loss Slurry (diatomaceous earth / fine grade fibrous LCM)he term high fluid
loss refers to the mechanism by which the plug produces its gelled structure down hole. In
this instance, as opposed to the clay swelling mechanism of gunk plugs, the fluid which
initially suspended the diatomaceous earth is lost to the formation, leaving the semi- solid
gelled mass infilling the fracture. This type of slurry is beneficial for both natural and
induced fractures where the "bridging" mechanism alone, provided by granular solid
LCM's would be unsuccessful. The plug induces high pressure drop along the fracture.
Drilling solids should then provide any further bridging required. Refer to Table 4.6 for
slurry formulation.
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 4.6 Formulation for a diatomaceous earth LCM Slurry.
Slurry Density Diatomaceous Barite Sea or Fresh

(kg / m3 - ppb\g) Earth (kg / lb) (kg / lb) Water (l/ gal)
1080/9.0 22.7/50 0 150/40
1200/10.0 19.3/43 30/66 145/38
1320/11.0 17.6/39 55/121 140/37
1440/12.0 16.2/36 80/176 133/35
1560/13.0 14.8/33 105/232 128/34
1680/14.0 13.3/33 130/287 120/32
1800/15.0 12.0/27 160/353 116/31
High Fluid Loss Slurry Placement Method

The placement method is designed to inject the slurry into the "fracture", and leave it in
place, and not to simply bridge off the surface of the fracture. Such a superficial "fix"
would rapidly be removed.
• Mix 8-16 cubic meters or 50-100 bbl of slurry

• Locate bit at top of loss zone
• Circulate to condition and perform injectivity, if appropriate.
• Displace slurry with mud out of drill string, to balance
• If returns are obtained, close an annular preventer and squeeze/hesitation squeeze.
Once all the slurry is in place, attempt to hold pressure for at least 30 minutes.
• If no returns are noted whilst pumping the slurry, and if the hole cannot be fill, a second
slurry should be placed.
Additional Notes On High Fluid Loss Slurries

• Up to 30 kg/m3 or 10 ppb of "fine" fibrous LCM can be beneficial in the slurry. Nothing
coarser than this should be used, as it may prevent the slurry entering the fracture zone.
• Where the technique is to be used while drilling with OBM, precautions should be
taken to ensure mud does not contaminate the slurry, and vis-versa. A base oil spacer
should be pumped ahead and behind the slurry.
• The slurry can bepumped through a bit
__________________________________________________________________________
Oil/ Bentonite Plug for Water Based Mud Systems

This plugging method depends on the fact that bentonite will not yield in oil. However,
when fresh water comes into contact with a high concentration oil/bentonite slurry, it forms
a solid plaster like material which blocks off the loss zone.
Procedure
1. Flush pit, lines, cement unit with base oil (diesel as available) to ensure their is no
possibility of water contaminating the slurry prematurely.
2. Note that the time taken to clean out a set gunk plug from a surface tank is substantial.
3. Position the work string (preferably open ended drill pipe) approximately 10m or 30 ft
above the loss zone.
4. Mix 85 kg/m3 or 30 ppb of Bentonite (preferably sacked bentonite) in the base oil to
produce a viscous fluid.
5. Pump 4.8 cubic meters or 30 bbl of fresh water.
6. Pump 1.6 cubic meters or 10 bbl of base oil.
7. Pump the gunk slurry.
8. Pump 1.6 cubic meters or 10 bbl of base oil.
9. Displace the plug to the bottom of the drill string.
The squeeze operation should proceed as follows :

• If the hole is full, squeeze at 20 - 35 BAR or 300-500 psi.
• If the hole is not full, first attempt to fill the hole (if that is appropriate). If the hole will
not fill, close the annular preventer and pump down the annulus at the same time as
pumping the gunk to the formation.
• Allow four hours for the gunk plug to set.
Oil/ Bentonite/Cement Plug for Water Based Mud Systems
If the gunk plug does not succeed, a 8 - 16 cubic meters or 50-100 bbl oil/bentonite/cement
plug should be attempted. Follow the same procedures as those for a gunk plug, except
mix the following: mix 57 kg/m3 or 20 ppb of bentonite and 57 kg/m3 or 20 ppb of cement
into the base oil. It is also beneficial to pump down the annulus with or without returns, as
when returns occur the slurry should preferably not be allowed too far up the annulus of
the work string.
Fresh Water/ Organophilic Clay Plug for OBM Systems
When using an OBM, the reverse of an oil/ bentonite plug can be used. The organophilic
clay is an oil dispersible clay, used as a viscosifier for OBM, which will yield in the
presence of oil. The clay is mixed into water and pumped in a similar fashion as was the oil/
bentonite plug.
A formulation for one barrel of unweighted water/ organophilic clay slurry is as follows :
__________________________________________________________________________
Water .115 cubic meters or 30 gal

Caustic 0.7 kg or 0.25 ppb
Dispersant 1.6 kg or 0.5 ppb
Organophilic Clay 115 kg or 40 ppb
Follow the procedures and precautions for mixing an oil/bentonite plug, with the
important exception that the lines/tanks etc are flushed with water and rig wash, followed
by water, to remove the residue of OBM.
6.2.2 Kick Control Barite Plug

Generally, where a high pressure kick zone exists below a weak zone, it is preferable to
first kill the lower zone, then treat the loss zone above. This can be accomplished by
spotting a Barite plug in the lower section of the hole, of adequate annular height to
hydrostatically kill the lower zone while not affecting the upper zone. This bottom hole
annular pressure may be insufficient, but its secondary affect, which is to form a mechanical
flow block may kill the well.
6.2.3 Hole Cleaning

A very brief consideration of hole cleaning is given here, to indicate desirable properties of
mud in certain situations.
• Hole angle is extremely important.
◊ At angles < 30 degrees, the fluid tubular velocity transports cuttings in the mud,
and the consideration of slip velocity is valid
◊ At angles from 30 - 90 degrees cuttings beds form on the low side of the hole.
At 50 - 60 degrees in particular, cuttings tend to fall back down the hole, and
cause annular pack-offs more easily. The method of cuttings transport where
cuttings beds are formed is either bulk translation of sheets of cuttings, or "
saltation ". The saltation method of cuttings transport, whereby the cutting
moves in a sequence of short 'hops' above the hole bottom, in the high fluid
shear layer immediately above the cuttings bed is promoted by low viscosity
fluids with high annular velocities, which promote turbulence. The use of large
diameter (eg. 6 5/8") drill pipe and pipe rotation promote these mechanisms.
Minimum of 60 RPM is recommended, although greater values are more
beneficial. The larger diameter drill pipe has 2 main advantages in this respect.
◊ Larger ID reduces the restriction on pump rate due to mud pump maximum
operating pressures at a flow rate.
◊ Greater annular velocities for a flow rate due to the diameter.
__________________________________________________________________________
For wells deviated below 30 degrees inclination, hole cleaning models are usually based on
a specified maximum allowable annular cutting concentration, which is a function of ROP,
mud flow rate and slip velocity.
Inclined well hole cleaning (greater than 30 degrees inclination) relies on the calculation of
a so called cuttings transport index. These subjects are considered outside the scope of a
drilling manual.
• The practice of circulating a carbide lagged bottoms up plus 20% , prior to a trip, while
rotating the pipe, in wells with greater than 30 degrees inclination is strongly advised.
Monitoring of the quantity of cuttings at the shaker whilst drilling and during the
circulation of bottoms up is also advisable.
• With particular respect to circulating the shakers clean, it is recommended to jet out
the header box at the start of the bottoms up circulation so that the cuttings in the
surface flowline system do not give a false impression that cuttings are being removed
from the well, there by extending circulation time unnecessarily.
Hole Cleaning Pills
• For wells deviated below 30 degrees, the use of conventional high viscosity/ high
weight pills is recommended to assist cuttings removal
• For wells deviated above 30 degrees, thin (i.e. base oil) fluids pumped in turbulent
flow are the best way to remove cuttings beds, in association with pipe rotation. The
low viscosity pill should be immediately followed by a high viscosity/ high weight pill to
assist in suspending the cuttings while they are being carried to surface.
• The recommended volume for both the high and low viscosity pills together are :
17.5" hole : 8 - 1.6 cubic meters or 50-100 bbl(i.e. 4 cubic meters or

25 bbl/4 - 8 cubic meters or 25-50 bbl / 8 cubic meters
or 50 bbl)
12.25" hole : 4.8 - 9.6 cubic meters or 30-60 bbl
• It is strongly recommended that the initial hole cleaning pill volumes be at the lower
end of these ranges initially. This is recommended due to field experience, which
indicates that annular pack -offs can occur due to lifting excessive cuttings with one
larger pill.
6.3.1 Operation and Optimization of Solids Control Equipment
6.3.1.1 Flowline Located Tr aps

Flowlines, "gumbo" traps and shaker header boxes are to be cleaned at the required
frequency, depending on ROP, cuttings type etc, to ensure the system functions correctly.
__________________________________________________________________________
Jet lines should be installed in the header box, and be effective. The cleaning of all systems,
which may involve dumping tank contents will be monitored strictly if OBM is used.
6.3.1.2 Shale Shakers

• Adequate stocks of various sized shaker screens will be available to optimize the size of
screens used, which is usually a trial and error process. The variables which influence
selection include mud type and rheology, ROP, flow rate, and formation type.
Generally, screen size is chosen to give maximum cuttings removal without overloading
the screens, when circulating at full drilling rate with normal mud properties
established. Thus, for example, if the mud is not initially shear thinning enough due to
low initial temperature on breaking circulation, a lower initial circulation rate may be
considered, rather than changing screens twice.
• The top screen of a double deck shaker is normally used as a 'scalping' screen, with a
coarse mesh, used to remove the large cuttings and save the finer lower deck screens
from damage or swamping.
• The fluid front should cover approximately 60% of the screens. This allows adequate
distance for solids to be 'dried' by movement over the remaining screen area.
• If sand screen blinding occurs, a finer mesh size should be used if further distribution/
re-distribution between other shaker devices does not solve the problem. Note that
rectangular mesh screens are less likely to blind off than square mesh screens.
• Prior to new polymer based mud systems (WBM and OBM) being sheared and thus
mixed properly through the bit, a coarse mesh dressed shaker should be used. This will
stop losses due to screen blinding by polymer lumps.
• Shaker screens must always be cleaned thoroughly after ending circulation and at
connections. They should also be inspected regularly for breaks in the mesh
(particularly the lower screens)
• Never run shakers without fluid flow over them.
• Coarse mesh screens discharge drier cuttings than fine mesh screens.
6.3.1.3 Settling Tanks

Sand Traps should never be by-passed in normal drilling operations. Sand traps are to be
dumped on a regular basis when using WBM.
Sand traps should have as large an area as possible and should not be used as suction
compartments, as this disturbs the settling action of the solids. The base of the tanks
should be angled at about 45° towards a large dump valve.
6.3.1.4 Hydrocyclone Devices

The following applies to desanders, desilters/mud cleaners.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Suction tanks must be agitated and screened off to prevent the entry of large cuttings
aggregates, which could block the cone inlets
• The optimum feed rate and head must be achieved by the feed pump assigned to the
unit.
• The number of bends, swages, and reducers in the line feeding the cones header should
be minimized. Bends in the line feeding the header are undesirable, as they upset the
mud flow and thus distribution to the individual cones.
• Most cones have a quoted optimum hydraulic head of 23 m or 75 ft. The optimum
inlet pressure is given as :
Optimum Inlet (bar) = Optimum feed head (m) * MW (Kg/l) * 0.0981
• The cones should be operated under spray discharge. See Table 6.6 for a hydrocyclone
trouble shooting guide
• Note that the table indicates that spray discharge is desirable, and that excessively dry
underflow (rope discharge being one example) is undesirable.
• The efficiency of hydrocyclone devices can be checked by weighing the feed and
overflow weights, and by inspecting the cone discharge volume and weight/dryness.
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 6.6 Hydrocyclone Troubleshooting Guide
Underflow Possible Cause Cone Wear Pattern Remedy

Spray Discharge Grooving over lower None. Correctly set
2" of cone up
Rope Discharge Overload of solids in Sharp grooving 1/3 Increase apex size
feed and/or of way up cone and until spray discharge
undersized cone apex erosion of cone top is achieved, if
(partially plugged) due to cuttings in unsuccessful, remove
overflow and clean blocked
cone/ flush feed
Continuous Flow Low outlet velocity Excessive wear at Strip and clean feed
Discharge possibly resulting cone apex header and
from blocked feed regulate/service pump
header or feed pump to provide required
poorly set up +/-75 ft head
Plugged Discharge Underflow plugging Sharp grooving 1/2 Disassemble cone,
due to solids way up cone and clean out blockage
overload or erosion of the cone and reset apex size
underflow opening top due to solids in
too restricted overflow
6.3.1.5 Desander
The main use for desanders is to maintain low mud weight in top hole sections while using
WBM. It prevents overloading the capacity of desilters/ mud cleaners. The desander is not
to be used with OBM.
6.3.1.6 Desilter
Desilters, in conjunction with desanders, should be used in low weight mud top hole
sections. If the mud weight is to be raised, use barite rather than drilled solids.
The cones need periodic adjustment to ensure an even setting of each apex. This is
achieved using water. The apex of each is fully opened, at which time the discharge should
be a thin curtain like spray from each cone. The cones will then be adjusted until only a
periodic drop of water occurs. However, over adjustment will lead to plugging, when mud
is used.
Desilters should not be used with OBM.
__________________________________________________________________________
6.3.1.7 Mud Cleaner

Mud cleaners are essentially of no use if the shakers will accept fine (120 mesh or finer)
screens. The unit can be used as a desilter, and the underflow processed by a centrifuge.
Mud cleaners were initially designed to process weighted WBM. The barite was to return
to the mud system via the screen underflow. However, the silt sized drill solids discharged
by the cones are returned to the mud system with the barite.
6.3.1.8 Centrifuges
• Centrifuge efficiency is affected predominantly by the feed flow rate (directly affecting
the retention time), but is also influenced by the following adjustments, in decreasing
order of importance :
• Bowl speed
• Conveyor (scroll) differential speed
• Pool depth
• Efficiency is also affected by:
• Mud Viscosity
• The feed rate capacity is significantly reduced by mud weight increase, and may
unbalance the bowl
Only positive displacement (mono pump) type pumps should be used to feed the
centrifuge, adjustable in the region from 2.4 - 24 cubic meters / hr. or 600-6,000 gph.
A mechanical over-torque sensor must be fitted and should shut down the bowl motor and
feed pump automatically when excessive torque conditions occur.
A tandem centrifuge system can be used to both clean colloidal solids and retrieve barite.
6.3.1.9 Vacuum Degasser

The vent line should be run up the derrick, to be vented safely on offshore operations.
Degasser operation must be checked daily whilst drilling, and it will always be run prior to
and during circulation of bottoms up.
Both centrifugal and vacuum degassers are available, the details of which should be found
in the manufacturer’s operating manual.
6.4 Mud Reporting and Documentation

The following records and reports must be maintained and updated by the Mud Engineer as
indicated.
• Daily Mud Report.
• End of Well Report.
__________________________________________________________________________
6.4.1 Daily Mud Report

The Daily Mud Report is the only document which routinely records the measured
properties of the mud in full, as derived by the mud engineer. The procedures used to
derive the results given and the actual properties reported will as a minimum follow the
API practices :
Testing OBM - RP 13B-2
Testing WBM - RP 13B-1
Report form format - RP 13G
As a guide, the following are to be present :
Volumetric Breakdown
The following data is required, for a particular depth and time :
• volume of fluid present at surface and down hole by individual tank and hole section,
as appropriate
• fluid densities by location, as above
• type(s) of fluid
Volume Summary
This section is used to report the best estimate of the volume of fluid made, lost or
transferred. Each type of fluid should be reported separately.
• received and cumulative received.

• volume made and cumulative volume made.
• mud losses (downhole, surface, other) and cumulative mud losses (downhole, surface,
other).
A volumetric balance is to be made of the total system volume (surface + subsurface), and
any disparity is to be investigated and as far as possible resolved at the rig site.
Tabulated Mud Properties Report
The relevant mud properties (system dependant) measured by the mud engineer are to be
noted on the Daily mud report.
Chemical Inventory
An accurate and up to date inventory of all mud chemicals at the rig site is to be kept. The
report will show chemical at the start of the report period, chemicals used or written off
during the report period and chemicals remaining at the end of the period. A costing of
each chemical used will also appear in this section, to assist in providing a daily cost of
materials used.
Solids Removal Equipment
__________________________________________________________________________
This section will include the following :
• A list of all solids control equipment at the rig site.

• The time each piece of equipment was used (state not used if applicable)
• An estimate of the efficiency of the device (from measurement or observation)
• If applicable, the reason why equipment may be desirable but is not in use (i.e. due to
equipment failure or inefficiency)
• The size of screens used, if equipment uses screens, and a running tally of how many
screens (type and mesh size) are used on the well.
Outstanding Chemical Requirements
Detail all outstanding chemical requirements for next materials movement, and indicate
priority.
Operational Remarks
This section is for brief operational remarks and predominantly mud treatment remarks
from the mud engineer. Note that the remarks should outline the operation and phase of
drilling etc.
They should be written to inform both personnel seeking information who are and are not
directly involved with the operation (eg. a researching drilling engineer seeking historical
mud information). Thus, rather than " built 167 cubic meters or 1050 bbl of 1140 kg/m3 or
9.5 ppg gypsum mud ", the reasoning should be included, e.g. " built 169 cubic meters or
1050 bbl of 1140 kg/m3 or 9.5 ppg gypsum mud due to bacterial deterioration of original
mud system ".
Mud Costs
Report the daily and cumulative mud costs for the well and separately record the on site
engineering costs.
Well Specific Information
Well identifier, operator and contractor, well location, rig type and name, date, drill stem
and wellbore geometry, and drilling parameters relevant to the mud system.
6.4.2 End of Well Report

The Mud contractor shall complete a detailed End of Well Report, based on the hole
section summaries. The report shall contain at least a summary of the daily mud properties,
the phase reports of each section, breakdown of total costs, operational remarks and
recommendations to improve conditions in future wells and a complete breakdown of
chemical consumption and inventory.
__________________________________________________________________________
6.5 Mud and General Contingency Equipment and Material

Requirements
The absolute required minimum of equipment depends on the specific well to be drilled.
However, bulk storage and mixing facilities are to be available for bentonite and barite. The
barite mixing capacity should meet the requirements for the maximum anticipated mud
weight increase for well control purposes, in a reasonable time. This time should be
checked by testing the rigs actual equipment. The bentonite and barite volumetric storage
capacity should meet the needs of the hole section with the greatest demand, prior to re-
supply.
The volume of usable mud above the mud pump suction line, contained in the active and
reserve mud pits must be maintained above a minimum volume to ensure there is sufficient
mud to keep the hole full when tripping pipe out of the hole. It should not exceed the levels
at which the automatic monitoring systems can measure when the drill string is run back in
the hole and circulation has commenced.
A reserve of liquid mud should be available for emergency use. The weight of this mud
reserve should be maintained at a suitable level for the prevailing pressures.
Adequate provision will be made for the mixing and conditioning of the mud, and will
include facilities to separate the mud from drilled solids and entrained gases.
Adequate stock levels of mud materials should be available at the rig site.
Local resolutions or expected well conditions will determine minimum requirements.
__________________________________________________________________________
7.0 MUD LOGGING AND GEOLOGICAL SAMPLING
7.1 Mud Logging Service Levels
7.1.1 Fully Computerized Mud Logging Service
7.1.2 Standard (Non-Computerized) Mud Logging Service
7.1.3 Minimum Mud Logging Service
7.2 Selection of Service Level
7.3 Mud Logging Scope of Work
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 6 Mud Logging and Geological Sampling
7.1 Mud Logging Service Levels

The functions of a mud logging unit include the evaluation of well geological and well
engineering data. Activities are generally conducted from a skid mounted mobile cabin
(unit) located at the rig site. The levels of service offered by various mud logging
contractors vary in detail. The various levels of service can be merged, as no definite
distinction exists. For example, Computer services based on out-dated, but operational
computer systems, are still available. Cost considerations and the required information will
determine the level of service adopted.
7.1.1 Fully Computerized Mud Logging service

Computerized data monitoring and processing of engineering and geological data, from
within a high specification (usually North Sea Offshore specification) unit would include
the utilization of a sophisticated computer data base system, to enhance future utilization of
information for planning purposes, such as bit selection, BHA performance, etc.
The Computerized Service and Products

Service products would include computer generated mud logs, pore pressure evaluation
logs, drilling engineering logs, daily geological and engineering reports, data plots and
prints and analog chart records (manually and automatically annotated). Examples of extra
plot types include trip plots, graphically representing hook load, trip tank volume, etc.
An engineering calculations package may be available, including the following :
• Mud hydraulics calculations (system pressure losses, AV's etc)

• Bit hydraulics
• Swab/ surge analysis
• Exponent analysis
• Well control calculations
• Overburden gradient and fracture pressure gradient estimation
• Directional drilling analysis (hole position estimation & plotting only, normally. More
sophisticated BHA analysis, torque & drag etc, will be provided by the directional
drilling contractor) .
• Other specific software, such as gas ratio analysis.
__________________________________________________________________________
Mud Logging and Geological Sampling Page 2 of 6 August 1995
Formation Evaluation
The formation evaluation service includes standard cuttings collection and analysis,
continuous total combustible gas analysis and chromatographic gas analysis. Sample
collection, processing, description, storing and shipping when required will be at the
request of the clients geological department. The computer generated mud log will include
all standard information, eg.
• Cuttings lithology %, description & interpretation of lithology

• Visual porosity
• Drill rate
• Continuous analog total gas curve and trip/connection gases
• Chromatographic data
• Oil show description
• Date versus depth information
• Cored interval description
• Mud data (at least every interval where significant changes occur)
• Bit data, along with drilling parameters
• Tight hole information
• Deviation surveys and TVD
Mud logging Unit Sensors and Unit Internal Monitoring Systems

The mud logging unit remote sensors are at various locations on the rig for monitoring
purposes, and include
• Depth/ ROP monitoring system

• Hookload sensor
• Back pressure manifold and standpipe manifold pressure sensors
• Rotary table and top drive (if applicable) RPM sensors
• Rotary torque sensor
• Return flow sensor (various types)
• Mud Pit room sensors, including a full suite of active/ reserve pit volume sensors, mud
weight and temperature (can also have resistivity etc.) .
• Solids control/ flowline located tank sensors, for pit volume, mud weight, temperature,
gas extraction from mud, atmospheric detection of 2HS.
• Trip tank pit volume
• Mud pump SPM
__________________________________________________________________________
Various other sensors are available, depending on requirements such as (multiple remote
atmospheric H2S detection, H2S potential detection in the mud, CO2 detection)
Great variability exists within the mud logging unit as to the systems used to monitor the
sensor outputs. Generally however, the following exists :
• Charts for continuous analog recording of sensor and computer calculated data. These
charts are frequently sophisticated stand alone computers, or are directly controlled by
the computer.
• Visual displays, via CRT screens, of information
• A data base recording computer, usually to hard disk, with tape streamer back up.
• Total combustible gas expressed as % C1 equivalent and Chromatography outputting
direct to a computer.
Miscellaneous Special Services

Some companies also offer integrated MWD/ LWD services, surface and downhole drill
string vibration analysis, onsite core analysis and various other facilities.
7.1.2 Standard (Non- Computerized) Mud Logging Service

Electronic or mechanical/manual monitoring and processing of engineering and geological
data from within a locally certified unit is provided in this type of service.
Service products include a hand drafted mud log and geological report, along with analog
chart outputs.
Limited engineering calculations are available, usually relevant to the mud logging task
only (such as bottoms up volume/ strokes calculations, carbide gas lag corrections etc.)
The formation evaluation service is essentially the same as the fully computerized service,
with the exception that the log is hand drafted. The equipment used to measure gas may be
different.
The mud logging remote sensors will be a limited suit, as follows :
• Depth/ ROP monitoring system (not necessarily the same as Computer unit equipment).
• Optional hook load, RPM, torque, pressure sensors.
• Combustible gas extraction system in header box or other suitable place
• Active and optional reserve pit volume sensors, trip tank sensors.
• Mud pump SPM
Monitoring systems within the unit include:
• Analog charts, input direct from the sensors (ie. not via a computer)
• Total gas and chromatography detector outputting to an analog chart recorder.
__________________________________________________________________________
Manning levels vary depending on individual requirements and specific well type, but
normally one man per 12 hour tour, subject to local regulations. This level of manning does
not allow for 24 hr total occupation of the unit, and this must be taken into consideration
when choosing the service level, or manning level at a unit service level.
7.1.3 Minimum Mud Logging Service

A basic total gas detection and optional sample description service may be all that is
appropriate. This may be conducted from a portable non-specialized cabin, or via a stand
alone gas detector with read out located in the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor’s office (eg.
accommodation module) .
7.2 Selection of Service Level

The selection of mud logging service level required is primarily a function of well type and
the requirements of the geological and drilling departments of the Client and Halliburton.
Thus, for example, a development well may be in a well known area, thus suggesting only a
basic or minimum service requirement. But, the new well may be a long reach horizontal
well drilled with technologies not familiar to the Client, who may wish to have maximum
information and may thus choose a computerized service.
7.3 Mud Logging Scope of Work

The Mud Logger will remain in close touch with the operation, via communication with the
Drilling Supervisor. He will inform the Drilling Supervisor immediately of any parameters
monitored by the mud logging unit equipment, which could affect the safety and/or
efficient running of the operation at the rig site. If the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor is not
available, the Rig Contractor’s Superintendent/Senior Representative will be informed.
All contractually agreed logs and reports will be kept up-to-date as far as possible, and will
be completed to Halliburton’s and the Client’s specified format (scale, units of
measurement etc) .
The exact requirements for sample catching will vary according to the well, but top hole
wet & dried samples will normally be taken at 10 m/30 ft intervals, and from 150m/500 ft
above the expected location of a reservoir, the interval will decrease to 3 m/10 ft.
Note that specially preserved geochemical composite samples will be taken at a specified
interval (every 30 m/100 ft through reservoir and source rock sections) , and mud samples
will be taken at any notable change of mud properties and if a hydrocarbon show is noted
in the mud.
The samples will be collected in an appropriate bag and will be marked permanently with
depth interval, well name and number. They will then be stored and shipped in a suitable
strong ammo or similar type box, marked with the required identification. A shipping
manifest is to be made out and signed by the geologist prior to departure of the samples.
__________________________________________________________________________
The mud loggers will assist (as required) in the catching, description, marking, boxing and
shipping of core samples.
The formation evaluation logger will immediately inform the geologist if any hydrocarbon
shows are detected (fluorescence, cut, oil in mud, sudden increase in gas readings,
unexpected appearance of marker horizons indicating entry or close proximity within the
primary or secondary targets) .
If a computerized service is in use, the drilling, tripping and other monitors are to be
operative at all times when the appropriate activity is taking place at the rig site.
Malfunctioning equipment, or requirements for additional back-up logging service
equipment are to be reported to the Drilling Supervisor at the rig site.
Daily and weekly calibration of mud logging equipment is to be carried out by the Mud
Loggers. In particular, efficiency checks are to be carried out on the gas trap system
(providing the gas sample to the unit form it's location in the ditch) by way of gas tracer
tests, as well as sample injection at the gas detector.
A multiple sensor alarm system, if provided, is to be fully utilized. It will preferably be a
dedicated piece of equipment, and must closely monitor pit volumes and total gas readings,
in particular.
__________________________________________________________________________
8.0 WELLBORE SURVEYING
8.1 Wellbore Surveying Objectives and Reasoning
8.2 General Wellbore Surveying Recommendations.
8.3 Further General Requirements and Procedures for Surveying
8.4 Quality Control for Survey Instruments
8.4.1 Electronic Magnetic Multishot/Electronic Magnetic Single Shot
8.4.2 MWD
8.4.3 Wireline Steering Tool
8.4.4 SRG (Surface Reading Gyroscopic) Survey (Open hole)
8.4.5 North Seeking Gyro (Cased Hole and Open hole)
8.4.6 Teledrift
___________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 10 Wellbore Surveying
8.1 Wellbore Surveying Objectives and Reasoning

The objective of a wellbore surveying program is to define the trajectory path of the
wellbore, to a certain required accuracy. The reasons for this are :
• Ensure the geological target volume is entered, and approached at the optimum
azimuth and inclination.
• Define the target for a relief well, in case of a blow-out
• Avoid collision with previously drilled wells and define the well path for future wells to
avoid
• Accurately follow the planned trajectory path of a well, in order to avoid drilling
problem horizons, and follow the general well design path (eg. ensuring that elevated
pore pressure horizons are not encountered prior to planned casing setting depths).
Individual wells will each have particular requirements. For example, development wells
will require extremely accurate gyro surveys, where as an exploration well may require less
accurate tools run less frequently. The following section thus provides guidelines for
survey requirements.
Figure 8.1 Survey types referred to in this Section
Survey Identifier Survey Identifier Type description

EMMS Electronic Magnetic Multishot
EMSS Electronic Magnetic Single Shot
MWD Measurement While Drilling
NSG North Seeking Gyro
SRG Surface Reading Gyroscopic
INS Inertial Navigation Surveyor (eg. FINDS).
__________________________________________________________________________
Wellbore Surveying Page 2 of 10 August 1995
8.2 General Wellbore Surveying Recommendations.

Table 8.2 Recommendations for Exploration and Appraisal Wells with
Inclination less than 10 degrees
Hole Section Open Hole Cased Hole

(defined by
casing used)
Survey Type Survey Survey Type Survey
Interval Interval
Surface and MWD 35 m/ 120 ft None
Intermediate and EMMS max
Casing TD (every
OR stand)
EMSS
and 150 m/ 500 ft
EMMS and trips
TD (every
stand)
Production MWD 35 m/ 120 ft None
casing or Liner and EMMS max
TD (every
OR stand)
EMSS
and 150 m/ 500 ft
EMMS and trips
TD (every
stand)
Refer to Section 8.3 following, for clarification.
___________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8.3 Recommendations for Exploration and Development wells with

Inclination greater than 10 degrees
Hole Section Open Hole Cased Hole
Survey Type Survey Survey Type Survey

Interval Interval
Surface String MWD 10 m/ 30 ft over NSG 30 m/ 100 ft or
Build section less
30 m/ 90 ft max or (some
MWD over tangent continuous)
section INS
Continuous
Intermediate MWD 10 m/30 ft over NSG 30 m/ 100 ft or
String Build section or less
30 m/90 ft max' INS (some
MWD over tangent (13 3/8" csg) continuous)
section Continuous
Intermediate Casing or Liner set at Top of the Reservoir
Production EMSS 150 m/500 ft NSG in wells 30 m/100 ft or
Casing or and and Trips with inclination less
Liner EMMS > than 45 (some
TD (every degrees continuous)
stand)
No Intermediate Casing or Liner set at TOP of the Reservoir

Production MWD 30 m/ 90 ft max NSG 30 m/ 100 ft or
Casing or or to top reservoir less
Liner EMSS 150 m/ 500 ft (some contin')
and trips
EMMS when TD (every
hole inclination stand)
> 45 degrees
Refer to Section 8.3 following, for clarification.
__________________________________________________________________________
8.3 Further General Recommendations and Procedures for Surveying

If there is no risk of entering a high pressure or hydrocarbon bearing zone in the hole
section being drilled, inclination only surveys are adequate for hole inclinations of 0 - 3
degrees. These could be furnished via Totco or Teledrift inclination only MWD. As implied
by the above, azimuth measuring is also required at inclinations greater than 3 degrees.
Where MWD (inclination and azimuth) surveys have been taken by more than one tool, at
the recommended frequency, in a hole section, and all Quality checks found to be positive,
an independent survey is NOT required.
With reference to Figures 8.2 and 8.3, the following also applies :
• All cased hole surveys should, where possible, have a 300 m/ 1,000 ft overlap with the
previous cased hole survey
• Where high collision risk occurs in the top hole, it is recommended that the MWD not
be run in the BHA until collision risk is passed. This is to ensure the SRG tool lands as
close to the bit as possible.
• An EMMS shall be dropped at TD on wells with inclination greater than 45 degrees, to
ensure a survey result is obtained, IF the NSG survey is unsuccessful in cased hole.
• On reaching TD of a well, it is acceptable to drop a EMMS (and thus removing the
requirement for a NSG cased hole survey) IF the following applies :
◊ The previous casing is set less than 60 m/200 ft above the reservoir, and;
◊ The previously set casing was successfully surveyed with a NSG (or
equivalent accuracy tool), and;
◊ The hole inclination for the interval to be surveyed to TD is less than 45
degrees
In cased hole surveys, where the inclination is likely to cause depth control problems
(probably greater than 45 degrees inclination), a CCL should be run in combination with
the survey tool string.
On 0 - 10 degree inclination wells, where there is no risk of collision, MWD surveying
should be used if economically favorable.
If EMSS surveys are used in the surface hole section, (ie. inclination greater than 3
degrees), and MWD surveys are required in the next hole section, then a cased hole survey
should be run in the surface casing.
On 0 - 10 degree inclination wells, where MWD tools are not considered economically
favorable, and EMSS is used, the frequency of surveying should be dependant upon the
well path and the formations between the bit depth and the target.
Thus, if the projected well path falls near to the target center and the formations/ dips etc.
are relatively uniform and predictable with respect to trajectory hold, the survey interval
___________________________________________________________________________
may be the maximum of 150 m/500 ft and bit trips. If the projected target and/or
formations expected are not as favourable as above, a lesser interval (possibly 45-60 m/150
- 200 ft) may be required.
While running MWD surveys, a survey barrel landing ring, with a 0.33 m/ 6 - 12" long
extension tube (to prevent rotation of the ring) will be positioned in the BHA for EMSS
survey check shots, or in case of MWD failure.
A minimum of 2 Non Magnetic Drill Collars will be run above the MWD, and any other
BHA components within the sphere of influence, (stabilizers etc) will be of certified non-
magnetic material.
When utilizing a steering assembly, for inclinations of more than about 5 degrees, use
gravity (high side) tool face. For inclinations of less than about 5 degrees, use magnetic
tool face.
8.4 Quality Control for Survey Instruments

As the mechanical inclination only "Totco" tool is well known, it is not necessary to detail
quality checks for it.
8.4.1 EMMS/EMSS
Consideration should be given to running all magnetic survey instruments (except the
MWD) in tandem, although this may be considered unnecessary for land based operations.
With respect to 'Tandem' EMMS results, the following QC guidelines are recommended:
1. A complete set of data should exist for each probe
Either : 2a. Divergence between probes should be less than 1.5 m/ 300m or 5 ft/
1,000 ft
Or : 2b. Inclination results should compare to within 1 degree. For wells
with inclination greater than 10 degrees, the azimuth results should
compare to within 2 degrees.
8.4.2 MWD
The tool should be surface tested, immediately below the rotary table. The criteria for
successful testing (apart from correct pulsing) are :
• Inclination close to zero degrees

• Gravitation field reading should be close to the nominal 'g'.
For a basic description of the way in which inclination and azimuth are derived from the
tool, refer the section on Wireline Steering Tools below. The tool internal equipment
__________________________________________________________________________
utilizes the same basic physical principles and similar electronics to derive a toolface,
inclination and azimuth.
A check shot should also be taken at an established bench mark on the trip in hole (at a
point below the shoe) and at the last survey point above bottom, prior to drilling ahead.
If a discrepancy of greater than 0.5 degrees inclination and greater than 2 degrees azimuth
exists, then a EMSS should be dropped. If, after comparison with the single shot result,
there is still doubt about the MWD, drilling should only continue if :
• It is an Exploration/ Appraisal well, with an inclination of less than 10 degrees, and
EMSS shots are taken as per Table 2.8.
• The reservoir has already been penetrated, and special constraints do not exist on
trajectory.
If the above are not satisfied, the BHA should be tripped and the MWD replaced. When
using the MWD in Toolface (steering mode, with no surface rotation of the drill string)
mode, for wellbore inclinations of less than 5 degrees, use the Magnetic toolface reading.
For wellbore inclinations of greater than 5 degrees, use the Gravity (high side) toolface
reading.
8.4.3 Wireline Steering Tools (Non-Gyro type, but with Surface Read Out)
Examples of this tool are Sperry Sun’s “Sperry Steering Tool” and Scientific’s Drilling
Control’s “EYE’ tool (Electronic Yaw Equipment). Where wellbore directional constraints
require steering with the survey tool as near to the bit and motor as possible (dis-allowing
the use of MWD), but where magnetic interference or survey accuracy requirements do not
require a Gyro/Interial survey system, a wireline steering tool can be employed. other
applications include checking NMDC’s for hot spots. The tool provides a constant surface
read-out via a wireline to the tool, but it may not be employed with drill string rotation.
The measuring system is essentially the same as that employed by the MWD tools:
• 3 orthogonally oriented solid state magnetometers, to resolve the 3 components of the

earth’s gravitational field vector relative to the tool
• 3 orthogonally oriented solid state accelerometers, to resolve the 3 components of the
earth’s magnetic field vector relative to the tool
From these measurements, the magnetic or gravity high side tool face can be computed,
along with the inclination from the accelerometers and azimuth from the magnetometers 0
of the borehole axis. The tool face is computed from the orientation of the scribe line on
the survey instrument and correcting this for angular deflection between it and the
orientation of the scribe line on the bent sub assuming that the survey tools’s mule shoe is
properly seated in the UBHO and thus oriented via the mule shoe key.
___________________________________________________________________________
For wellbore inclinations of less than 5 degrees, use the magnetic toolface reading for
steering. For wellbore inclinations of greater than 5 degrees, use the gravity high side
toolface reading for steering.
8.4.4 SRG (Surface Reading Gyroscopic) Survey , Open Hole

These tools (eg. Sperry Sun SRO) are electronic developments of the older, but still
utilized Film Reading Gyros. The inclination and azimuth is derived via output from a
single axis gyro stabilized platform, which maintains a horizontal reference.
In practice, the tools require a number of corrections to compensate for inherent
limitations, the main of which is 'Drift'. Drift, with reference to gyro surveying, is the
movement (change in azimuth) of the gyro spin axis about a vertical axis due to
imperfections and torque in the system. The torque generated by the system is a function of
dogleg severity, temperature variation etc. Drift surveys are taken while surveying the
wellbore, as well as prior to the survey run.. The drift rate depends on the type of tool used
(ie. Tilt scale or level rotor gyroscope).
This type of tool is not of the North Seeking variety. It thus requires an original foresight
azimuth, such that future azimuth readings can be indicated relative to true north.
The SRO is run in the same manner as the Wireline Steering Tools, but cannot remain in
the drill string during circulation, as the gyro instrumentation is too delicate.
Check the following :
• The surveyor has used the correct foresight (telescopically aligned from the rotary table
prior to the run), and is using the correct reference azimuth.
• The time between drift checks should not exceed 15 minutes. Each drift check should
last approximately 2.5 minutes. Note that the SRO is a single shot tool essentially,
when used in open hole, and the drift check requirements should be specific to this type
of gyro (rather than the multishot type).
• The recorded drift at a drift check should not exceed 0.4 degrees (approximately
equivalent to 10 degrees per hour). The recorded drift while surveying should also not
exceed 10 degrees per hour. 8.4.5 North Seeking Gyro (Cased Hole and Open
Hole)
8.4.5 North Seeking Syro (Cased Hole and Open Hole)

This tool utilizes the same gyro principles as a standard gyro survey tool, with the
exception that it 'seeks' or orients itself relative to true north, thus eliminating the need to
optically orient the tool relative to a foresight.
Two basic types of north seeking gyro are available:

1. Gyro stabilized platform containing a 2 degrees of freedom gyro, whose spin axis is
maintained horizontal and aligned to true north, such as Schlumberger's GCT.
__________________________________________________________________________
2. The 'Rate Integrating Gyrocompass' resolves the rate of angular motion of the earth
into horizontal and vertical components. The horizontal component of earth rate,
although decreasing by the cosine of latitude, always points to true north. An
accelerometer also measures the acceleration of the earth’s gravity. This is maximum
when the accelerometer input axis is aligned along the gravity vector, and is a minimum
when the input axis is perpendicular to the gravity vector. The gimbal containing the
accelerometer and gyro is rotated through 360 degrees, in 90 degree stages, producing
two output signal curves (sine waves). Comparison of these waves, at a particular
latitude results in a unique solution for inclination and azimuth.
The following quality control checks are relevant :

• The inclination reading on the in-run should vary by less than or equal to 0.25 degrees,
in comparison to the Out-Run reading, at a station.
• The azimuth readings on the In-Run should vary by less than or equal to 1.0 degree in
comparison to the out-run reading,when inclination is greater than 10 degrees.
• Wireline depth control differences should ideally be less than or equal to 0.5 ft / 1,000
ft between the in-run and out-run. However, this may not be achieved, and further basic
checks to conduct are :
• Compare the in and out run survey results for 'Depth Shifts' of comparable data.
• Compare results with open hole surveys.
• The gyro recorded temperature should not exceed the maximum workshop calibration
temperature.
• The primary calibration requirements of the temperature and drift should not exceed
the manufacturers specified tolerance. Refer to the surveying contractor for
confirmation of this criteria being fulfilled.
• The drift rate (after electronic tuning is applied), should be less than 0.05 degrees per
hour (SDC Finder tool specification).
• The North seeking accuracy should be less than : 0.2 degrees / Cos { Latitude }
8.4.6 Teledrift
The Teledrift tool is a simple mechanical inclination only survey tool. It provides surface
read out via mud pulse telemetry, and thus requires no wireline. It is contained within a sub
in the BHA, which houses no batteries or turbine power units etc. It is thus rugged and less
prone to failure. A major advantage is that it does not require an operator. The tool is
easily utilized, adjusted and maintained by the rig crew.
Field adjustment to the tool can be made to vary the range of inclination reading ability.
The range of angle settings is from 0.5 degrees to 3.5 degrees, and up to 7.5 - 10 degrees
in a total of 15 possible angle range settings. At each setting, up to 7 pressure pulses, each
of 0.5 degree can be generated.
___________________________________________________________________________
The pulse's are graphical read out via a chart recorder on the rig floor, providing the result
of the survey. A diaphragm pressure transmitter supplies the pressure pulses generated at
the Teledrift sub to the chart recorder. Each pulse represents a 0.5 degree increment within
the range setting. The tools accuracy is +/- 0.5 degrees,
The tool is effective and simple to use, and is recommended in top hole situations, on
'vertical' wells, where planned deviation is to be less than 3 degrees.
Basic Operating Instructions
The Basic Teledrift operating procedure is as follows, assuming the survey is taken prior to
a connection. :
• Stop rotating, pull off bottom. Set brake and stop pump
• Turn on Teledrift chart recorder.
• Wait for 2 minutes.Do Not reciprocate or rotate the pipe.
• Start 1 pump smoothly and quickly to an approximate flow of :
gpm for 9 1/2" or 8" string
gpm for 6" string or less
• Maintain constant flow rate until survey is complete. The first pulse will appear within
15 seconds of pump start up, followed by any other pulses at up to 30 second intervals.
• Do not rotate tool during survey, unless absolutely necessary, to a maximum of 30
RPM.
• Once all pulses are received, make a connection, or resume drilling, dependant upon
whether the survey is taken before or after a connection.
• Turn off the Teledrift chart recorder.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.0 DRILLING OPERATIONS SUMMARY (TYPICAL)
9.1 Structural Casing
9.1.1 Conductor Clean Out
9.1.1.1 Equipment List
9.1.1.2 Clean Out Procedure
9.2 Conductor Hole and Casing
9.2.1 Drilling Procedures
9.2.2 Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List
9.2.3 Running and Cementing the casing
9.2.4 Casing and Wellhead Equipment
9.3 Surface Hole and Casing
9.3.1 Drilling Procedure (Straight Hole)
9.3.2 17.5" Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole)
9.3.3 Running and Cementing the 13 3/8" Casing
9.3.4 Casing and Wellhead Equipment Lists
9.4 Intermediate / Production Hole and Casing
9.4.1 Drilling Procedures (Straight Hole)
9.4.2 Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole)
9.4.3 Running and Cementing the Casing
9.4.4 Casing and Wellhead Equip ment List
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 18 Drilling Operations Summary
9.5 Drilling / Production Liner Hole and Liner
9.5.1 Drilling Procedures (Straight Hole)
9.5.2 Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole)
9.5.3 Running and Cementing the Liner
9.5.4 Liner Running Equipment Check List
__________________________________________________________________________
Drilling Operations Summary Page 2 of 18 August 1995
9.1 Structural Casing

The spud and installation of structural casing may be accomplished in 3 ways:
Drilling hole, installing and cementing structural casing

Driving structural casing and cutting as appropriate.
Excavation and installation of a short structural casing
The choice of procedure is dependent upon

Sub-soil properties (driving conductor in soft material drilling in hard rock)
Presence of problem drilling zones (losses in particular)
Expected loading on the structural casing due to subsequent casing strings and
wellhead/BOP's.
In some cases, structured casing may not be required and conductor casing or surface
casing is used instead as the first casing string.
9.1.1 Structural casing clean out

After the conductor has been cut at the appropriate height, to allow for future wellhead and
BOP's stack-up requirements, a conductor clean out (and possibly drilling BHA) run is
required.
9.1.1.1 Equipment List:

Subsurface
Bit c/w nozzles
Hole opener
Float or Bit sub c/w float
Steel DC's
X/O DC to HWDP
Surface
Bit Breaker
DC lifting plugs
DC slips
DC elevators
DC safety clamp
DC and DP dope
__________________________________________________________________________
9.1.1.2 Clean Out Procedure (For Driven Structural Casing)
Install the diverter and bell nipple on the starter head (or welded flange, etc) on the
conductor. This set up could consist of :
• Bell nipple and flow line

• Low pressure riser
• Bag Type Diverter
• Diverter spool with diverter lines
• Flange connection, welded to the Conductor
• Make up clean out assembly. Clean out to the structural casing shoe. Limit circulating
activity at the structural shoe, to avoid undermining.
• Ensure that the bit or hole opener passes the structural casing shoe, to check for
deformation, prior to POH (if it is intended to drill a pilot hole) . A tapered mill
assembly can be used to clear any obstruction.
9.2 Conductor Hole Drilling and Conductor Casing
9.2.1 Drilling Procedures

If it is intended to drill with a bit or bit / hole opener combination to the conductor casing
point:
1. Drill ahead to TD with clean out assembly. Control ROP, if needed, to avoid hole
problems. Pump sweeps if needed to clean the hole.
2. Drop survey tool. Make a wiper trip to the structural casing shoe, circulate hole clean
and POH to run casing.
If a pilot hole is to be drilled:
1. M/U BHA, drill pilot hole to TD, taking surveys per program. Circulate and condition
mud prior to logging, and log hole per program, if required.
2. M/U hole opening BHA either with a bit, if needed, or a hole opener. Take check
surveys at approximately the same depth as on pilot hole. Avoid inadvertent
sidetracking. Drill to section TD, circulate hole clean, drop survey tool. Conduct wiper
trip, and/or displace hole to weighted Hi-Vis mud and POH to run casing, if needed.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.2.2 Conductor Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List

Subsurface
Bit c/w nozzles
Bit or Float Sub c/w float valve assembly
Steel DC's
NB stabilizer, bored out for a float (optional)
String Stabilizers (optional)
Drilling Jars, c/w basket and safety clamp
HWDP, (optional)
X/O's possibly between collar sizes and to DP
Hole opener c/w nozzles
Totco ring (Baffle plate, crows foot, etc.)
Wellbore surveying equipment
Complete set of fishing tools (optional)
Drill Pipe
Hydril (or Equivalent) Retrievable Drop-In IBOP (optional)
Surface
Bit breaker
DC lifting plugs
DC slips
DC elevator
DC safety clamp
DP slips
DP elevator
Spare lower kelly cock
Drill pipe safety valve and suitable pressure tested cross overs
Inside BOP valve
DC and DP dope
Drop in dart for IBOP (optional)
__________________________________________________________________________
9.2.3 Running And Cementing The Conductor Casing

The exact sequence of events and procedures are strongly effected by the equipment used.
For example, a single top wiper plug may be used during cementation of the conduction
casing, whereas a stab-in float shoe is assumed here.
1. Rig up and run the conduction casing to the shoe setting depth, having checked the
stab-in float shoe for operation and thread-locked the shoe joint as required. Suspend
casing from the rig floor at the setting depth.
2. Make up and run a centralized float shoe stinger assembly and run in to the casing on
DP, utilizing a false rotary plate and extra set of drill pipe elevators for string support.
3. Ensure that the casing is full. Stab into the float shoe and circulate at least 120% of DP
contents, observing for returns from the casing DP annulus (indicative of a leaking
stab-in adapter) . The string can be re-stabbed and checked. If a leak still occurs, the
problem is to be rectified prior to cementing.
4. Pump spacer ahead (scavenger slurry etc), followed by cement slurry per agreed recipe.
If no returns of cement are noted, top out cement job should be considered.
5. Monitor for back flow from the float shoe, unstab and check for flow prior to
circulating the DP clean of cement residue. POH.
6. While waiting on cement to harden, nipple down the flowline, etc. Wait on cement as
necessary for design compressive strength development. Then back out the landing
joint.
7. M/U the wellhead housing. Nipple up the drilling spool, tie down flange and BOP
equipment (diverter system).
8. Perform pressure tests as required.
9.2.4 Conductor Casing and Wellhead Equipment

Casing
Casing shoe joint(s) c/w stab-in adapter
Casing
Stab-in sub c/w X0 to DP connection
Centralizer (as required) c/w stop collars and nails to suit
Sundry casing/ cementing accessories as required
Casing drift, if required
Casing swage c/w suitable casing thread and pump-in fitting
Casing Dope
Thread Lock
__________________________________________________________________________
Casing slips
Casing elevators
Power tong and rig tong back up.
Wellhead
Casing head housing
Drilling spool (if BOP outlet not used)
Blowout preventer diverter system
Wear Bushing
Wear Bushing running/retrieval tool (may be optional)
9.3 Surface Hole Drilling And Surface Casing
9.3.1 Drilling Procedures (Straight hole)

1. M/U BHA and RIH to TOC. Perform a casing pressure test as per program.
2. Function test the diverter system if installed. Drill out cement and shoe and clean out,
any rat hole. Drill a minimum of 10 ft of new hole, circulate and condition the mud,
pull back into the shoe and perform a formation integrity test, if required.
3. Drill surface hole, taking wellbore surveys. Perform wiper trips as the hole dictates, and
ensure mud properties are maintained by proper use of solids control equipment.
4. Ensure that maximum ROP is maintained while still providing adequate hole cleaning
for the flow rate and mud properties in use.
5. Drill to the surface casing shoe depth. Circulate bottoms up. Drop survey. Strap the
pipe on the trip out. The requirement for a surface casing rathole is dependent upon the
positional requirements of the shoe and desired position of surface connections.
6. Circulate and condition the mud and hole for logging, if required. Wipe the hole as
necessary. Log the hole per program requirement.
7. Make a check trip and circulate bottoms up (monitoring for gas etc) prior to running
casing, if required.
8. Remove wear bushing.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.3.2 Surface Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole)

Subsurface
Bit c/w nozzles
Bit or Float Sub c/w float valve assembly
Steel DC's
NB stabilizer, bored out for a float (optional)
Pony DC
String Stabilizers (optional)
Steel DC's
Drilling Jars, c/w basket and safety clamp (optional)
MWD tool and back up's, and ancillary equipment, if required (ie. restrictor subs, X/O's,
drill pipe solids strainer)
NMDC's as required
HWDP (optional)
X/O's between collar sizes and to DP
Totco ring (baffle plate, crows foot, etc.)
Wellbore surveying equipment, including running gear
Complete set of fishing tools (optional)
Drill Pipe
Junk Sub (optional)
Kelly mud savers (if OBM in use)
Circulating head (optional)
Bottom hole and string roller reamers (possible alternative to stabilizers in gauge problem
areas)
Retrievable Drop-In IBOP (optional)
Surface
Bit breaker
DC lifting plugs
DC slips
DC elevator
DC safety clamp
DP slips
__________________________________________________________________________
DP elevator
Inside BOP valve
DC and DP dope
Drop in dart for IBOP (optional)
9.3.3 Running And Cementing The Surface Casing

1. Prior to running casing, prepare and drift pipe as per procedures laid out in the chapter
on casing running.
2. Rig up and run the casing. Check float collar and float shoe for operation. Thread lock
the bottom joints from the shoe through the top connection on the float collar.
3. Monitor returns for losses. Ensure casing is filled at least every 5 joints run. Limit the
running speed of casing according to surge calculation. Break circulation at the
conductor casing shoe, and change out to casing spider equipment prior to entering
open hole as necessary.
4. Pressure test surface cementing lines to the cement head manifold.
5. Pump spacer ahead, drop top plug, mix and pump cement slurry (s) per approved
cement recipe, release top plug and launch with spacer behind using cement pump.
6. Displace cement with rig pump or cement pumps at optimum rate for good
cementation (bonding and turbulence) and monitor for losses. Slow pumps near end
of displacement (calculated at 97% efficiency theoretical or measured efficiency) and
bump plug.
7. Pressure test casing. Check float equipment is holding. WOC as necessary for design
compressure strength. Set slips.
8. Back out the landing joint and nipple down the BOP’s.
9. Nipple up the casing spool and the BOP's.
10. Function test the BOP's. Pressure test the BOP's and casing spool. Pressure test the
Choke Manifold Standpipe manifold, inside BOP's and required cross overs. Conduct
an accumulator test as required.
11. Lay out unnecessary BHA equipment.
9.3.4 Surface Casing and Wellhead Equipment Lists

Surface casing c/w protectors and slings etc.
Planking
__________________________________________________________________________
Casing pup joint(s) (if required)

Casing joint c/w cement float shoe
Casing joint c/w float collar
Spare float collar and float shoe (optional)
Centralizers and stop collars
Dual plug dropping cement head c/w appropriate X/O to the casing OR quick connector
2 Sets of cement wiper plugs, top and bottom
Circulating swage
Casing dope
Stabbing guide if appropriate
Thread lock
Casing slips
Casing Elevators
Side door elevator
Slip type spider (elevator and slips)
Casing drift
Clamp on thread protectors
Casing power tongs, c/w spare jaws and power packs
Casing hanger
Wellhead equipment check list

Casing spool
Adapter spool, or flange to BOP’s.
Wear bushing
Wear bushing running / retrieving tool
BOP test tool
Valves for side outlets on the casing spool
Companion flanges (blanks for the side outlets)
Ring gaskets for flange connections
Stud bolts suitable for casing spool, adapter spool, etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.4 Intermediate / Production
9.4.1 Intermediate / Production Hole

1. M/U BHA and RIH to TOC. Perform a casing pressure test. Drill out cement and shoe
and clean out rathole. If drilling out with a stabilized assembly, avoid excessive rotation
on the wiper plugs. Drill a minimum of 10 ft of new hole, circulate and condition the
mud, pull back into the shoe and perform a formation integrity test as required.
2. Drill intermediate / production hole, taking wellbore surveys. Perform wiper trips as the
hole dictates, and ensure mud properties are maintained by proper use of solids control
equipment.
3. Check drilling breaks for flow below any abnormal pressure transition.
4. Ensure that maximum ROP is maintained while still providing adequate hole cleaning,
for the flow rate and mud properties in use.
5. Drill to the intermediate / production casing point. Circulate bottoms up. Drop
survey. Strap the pipe on first trip out of the hole. The requirement for rathole is
dependent upon the positional requirements of the shoe.
6. Circulate and condition the mud and hole for logging. Wipe the hole as necessary. Log
the hole per program requirement.
7. Make a check trip and circulate bottoms up (monitoring for gas etc) prior to running
9. Change out top pipe rams to casing rams and pressure test bonnets. (optional)
9.4.2 Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight Hole)

Subsurface
Bits complete with nozzles and installation tools as required.
Core heads and core bbl as required
Steel DC's
NMDC's
NB stabilizers, bored out for float valve (optional)
Pony DC
String stabilizers (optional)
HWDP (optional)
Totco ring, (baffle plate, crows foot, etc.)
__________________________________________________________________________
MWD tool and back up's, and ancillary equipment (i.e. restrictor subs, X/O's, drill pipe
solids strainer)
X/O's as needed
Wellbore survey equipment, including heat shield if needed
Fishing tools (optional)
Drill Pipe
Junk Sub (optional)
Circulating head
Retrievable Drop-In IBOP (optional)
Surface
Bit breaker for rock bits and PDC's
Core head breaker(s) if required
DC slips
DC elevator
DC safety clamp
DP slips
DP elevator
Inside BOP valve
DC and DP dope
Drop dart for IBOP (optional)
9.4.3 Running And Cementing The Intermediate / Production

1. Prior to running casing, clean threads and drift pipe as per procedures laid out in the
chapter on casing running.
2. Rig up and run the intermediate / production casing. Check floats for operation. Thread
lock the bottom joints from the shoe through the top connection on the float collar.
Ensure casing is filled at least every 5 joints.
3. Monitor returns for losses. Limit the running speed of casing according to surge
calculation. Break circulation at the surface casing shoe, and change out to casing
spider equipment prior to entering open hole as necessary.
__________________________________________________________________________
4. Circulate the capacity of the casing or bottoms up, which is greater.

5. Pressure test surface cementing lines to the cement head manifold.
6. Pump spacer ahead, drop top plug, mix and pump cement slurry (s) per approved
cement recipe, release top plug and launch with spacer behind using cement pump.
7. Displace cement with rig pump or cement pump at optimum rate for good cementation
(bonding and turbulence) and monitor for losses. Slow pumps near to the bump strokes
(calculated at 97% theoretical or measured efficiency) and bump plug.
8. Pressure test casing. Check float equipment is holding. WOC. Set slips.
9. Back out the landing joint and nipple down the BOP's.
10. Nipple up the casing / tubing head spool, adapter spool, and the BOP's.
11. Function test the BOP's. Pressure test the BOP's and casing / tubing spool. Pressure
test the choke manifold, standpipe manifold, inside BOP's and required cross overs.
Conduct an accumulator test as required.
12. Lay out unnecessary BHA equipment.
9.4.4 Intermediate / Production Casing and Wellhead Equipment Lists

Casing Running Equipment Check List
Intermediate / production casing c/w protectors and slings etc.
Planking
Casing pup joint(s)
Casing joint c/w float collar
Spare float collar and float shoe
Dual Plug dropping cement head c/w appropriate X/O to the casing OR quick connector
2 Sets of cement wiper plugs, top and bottom
Circulating swage
Casing dope
Stabbing guide if appropriate
Thread lock
Casing slips
Single joint elevator
Side door elevator
Slip type spider (elevator and slips)
__________________________________________________________________________
Casing drift
Casing power tongs, c/w spare jaws and power packs
Wellhead equipment check list
Casing spool
Adapter spool, double studded
Wear bushing
Wear bushing running / retrieving tool
BOP test tool
Valves for side outlets on the casing spool
9.5 Drilling / Production Liner Hole and Liner
9.5.1 Drilling / Production Line Hole Drilling Procedures (Straight Hole)

1. M/U BHA and RIH to TOC. Perform a casing pressure test if the plug bump test was
of insufficient pressure, or the plug did not bump. Drill out cement and Shoe and clean
out the rat hole. If drilling out with a stabilized assembly, avoid excessive rotation on
the wiper plugs. Drill a minimum of 10 ft of new hole, circulate and condition the mud,
pull back into the shoe and perform a formation integrity test as required.
2. Drill drilling / production liner hole, taking wellbore surveys. Perform wiper trips as the
hole dictates, and ensure mud properties are maintained by proper use of solids control
equipment. Ensure flow checking, circulation for geological samples and coring etc are
conducted to programmed requirement. Ensure that ROP is maintained while still
providing adequate hole cleaning, for the flow rate and mud properties in use.
3. Drill to the well Final Depth. Circulate bottoms up. Drop survey. Strap the pipe on
first trip out of the hole.
4. Circulate and condition the mud and hole for logging. Wipe the hole as necessary. Log
the hole per program requirement.
5. Make a short trip and circulate bottoms up (monitoring for gas etc) prior to running
7. Change out top pipe rams to casing rams and pressure test bonnets.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.5.2 Drilling / Production Line Hole Drilling Phase Equipment List (Straight
Hole)
Subsurface
Core heads as required
Bit Sub
Steel DC's
NB stabilizers, bored out for float valve (may not run float)
Pony DC
String Stabilizers
Jars, lifting sub and safety clamp
HWDP
MWD tool and back up's, and ancillary equipment, if required (i.e. restrictor subs, X/O's,
drill pipe solids strainer)
X/O's
Wellbore survey equipment, including heat shield as required
DP
Circulating sub, c/w redress kit and balls
Circulating head
Core barrel assembly, and spares, if required
Coring ancillary equipment (saw, blades, inner barrels if required, wax bath, end caps, etc)
if required
Extra Subsurface equipment for Liner clean out etc.
Steel DC's
X/O
Casing scraper(s)
Fishing Tools for (optional)
__________________________________________________________________________
DP
Circulating head
Liner dressing mills
Surface
Bit breaker for rock bits and PDC's
Core head breaker(s)
Lifting plugs
DC slips
DC slips
DC elevator
DC elevators
DC safety clamps
DP slips
DP slips
DP elevators
DP elevators
XO’s
Inside BOP Valve
DC and DP dope
9.5.3 Running and Cementing the Drilling / Production Liner

The following procedures refer to the running and cementing of hydraulic set liner with
liner top packer. Actual procedures would be sent to the rig as and when the specific type
of liner hanger assembly has been selected.
1. Following logs, make a wiper trip, if necessary, and circulate at least twice bottoms up
prior to pulling out of hole. Take off-bottom torque readings at the casing shoe. Drift
the drill pipe either on the way out or on the way in with the liner.
2. Pick-up and run the shoe, float collar with baffle, if required, one or two joints of liner
then the landing collar. Pipe lock connections as required. Check float valves by raising
and lowering the string.
3. Run liner filling approximately every 5 joints and fill completely when last joint is in
slips.
__________________________________________________________________________
4. Pick-up hanger assembly and make up on liner. Start with chain tong.
5. Leaving rotary slips set on liner, pick-up 3-5 ft to check if setting tool and all
connections are all made up correctly.
6. Note liner weight. Lower hanger assembly through rotary and set drill pipe slips on the
lift nipple. Do not set slips on packer sleeve.
7. Circulate contents of liner - maximum pressure 48 Bar or 700 psi.
8. Run liner on drill pipe filling at least every 10 stands.Do not use kelly to fill pipe.
9. On reaching casing shoe, circulate. Make up plug dropping head onto the cementing
kelly and make up chiksan lines before entering open hole.
10. Space out string to place cementing head +/- 3 m or +/- 10 ft above rotary table when
shoe is on bottom.
11. Lock elevators and pick-up cementing kelly and plug dropping head, wash down, tag
bottom and mark pipe. Note pick-up and slack off weights. Do not exceed maximum
running pressure.
12. Increase circulation rates slowly to a maximum of 70 bar/1,000 psi.
13. Set liner as per original equipment manufacturer’s guidelines.
14. Line up cementing unit and test lines. Mix and pump cement as per program.
15. Release pump down plug, pump any spacer and displace with rig or cement pumps.
Slow pumps 800 to 1600 liters/5-10 BBLS before pump down plug reaches wiper
plug. Wiper plug will shear at +/- 70 bar /1,000 psi over circulation pressure. Note
pump efficiency at shear. Slow down pumps before total displacement. Bump plugs
with 70 bar over final displacement pressure or +/- 140 bar/2,000 psi.
16. Bleed off and check for backflow.
17. Pull out or circulate as required, if circulating, move the pipe regularly to help displace
any cement around the drill pipe. Test the packer if required.
18. Pull out of hole.
__________________________________________________________________________
9.5.4 Drilling / Production Liner Running Equipment Check List

Liner hanger assembly (and back up)
Liner hanger running tool assembly
Plug dropping cement head and heavy duty swivel assembly
Cement kelly c/w drive bushing.
Spare casing collars
Casing c/w protectors and slings etc.
Planking
Casing pup joint(s), if required
Spare float shoe
Full set of cementing plugs
Drill pipe wiper plugs
Rigid bodied centralizers, if required
Circulating swage
Casing dope
Stabbing guide
Thread lock
Casing slips
Casing elevator
Side door elevator
Casing drift
Casing power tongs, c/w spare jaws etc and power packs, and torque/turn computer
equipment
__________________________________________________________________________
10.0 CASING
10.1 General Tubular Handling
10.2 Casing Preparation
10.2.1 Drifting
10.2.2 Cleaning of Pipe and Threads
10.2.3 Inspection
10.3 Measuring Casing and Casing Tally Production
10.4 Casing Running
10.4.1 Casing Running Equipment
10.4.2 Running Instructions
10.4.3 Casing OD. Tolerance
10.5 Chrome Duplex Alloy Tubular Goods Handling
10.5.1 Introduction
10.5.2 Chrome Tubular Shipping
10.5.3 Rig Site Preparation and Inspection of Chrome Tubulars
10.5.4 Running Chrome Tubulars
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 19 Casing
10.6 Preparation and Running of a Liner and Liner Hanger
10.6.1 General Information
10.6.2 Equipment Description And Listing, Pre- Operational Check List,

And Other Considerations
10.6.3 Liner Running Instructions
10.7 Casing Accessory Equipment
10.7.1 Casing Centralizers
10.7.2 Casing Scratchers (wall cleaners)
10.7.3 Non-Rotating Cement Plug and Float Equipment
10.7.4 Pressure Differential Fill Float Equipment
10.8 Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Thread Compounds
__________________________________________________________________________
Casing Page 2 of 19 August 1995
10.1 General Tubular Handling

Recommended general tubular handling guidelines are as shown below:
• If bundled casing has to be loaded into a holding bay or area without being separated
into individual joints, great care is to be exercised, such that impact or over-stacking
does not damage the tubulars or bundling slings.
• Lay down successive rows of casing, supporting them with suitable plank stripping.
Stack each layer of plank stripping vertically above the previous layer (a minimum of
three equally spaced plank supports per layer) .
• The collars attached to the shoe joints will normally arrive to the location hand tight
(usually paint marked as such) . If this has not been accomplished, it can to be done at
the drilling location but backing off collars is much easier and safer at pipe yard or mill.
The correct torque should be applied when making up the shoe joint collars again, and
re-drift as appropriate in case any over- torquing has caused a restricted ID.
• All accessories should be made up on the casing pin ends to ease fishing operations.
10.2 Casing Preparation

For the purpose of these guidelines, Premium pipe will be considered any pipe with a
connection incorporating a built-in gas tight Metal-to- Metal seal.
10.2.1 Drifting
Always drift the pipe before processing the casing further. The drift dimensions as a
minimum will conform with API RP 5A5.
8 5/8" casing and smaller : Mandrel length 6"
9 5/8" casing and larger : Mandrel length 12"
The O.D. and length of the drift itself should be checked prior to the job.
The drift crew should remove pin and box protectors unless the protectors are open ended,
and carefully insert the drift from the Box End, without contacting the thread or seal area
(where Premium threads are used) . Do Not allow the drift to free-fall out of the pin end,
as damage may occur to the pin end of the joint, or one below it. The drift is to be guided
out by hand.
Any pipe which fails to drift should be rejected. It is to be marked with a red paint band at
the box end and mid point on the joint, and have the words 'NO DRIFT' clearly marked on
in red paint.
The O.D. of the drift itself should be re-checked at the end of any drifting operation, and
the drift replaced if necessary, prior to the next job.
The pipe will normally be measured and paint marked prior to drifting. Thread cleaning and
inspection need not be accomplished until close to the expected casing run time. Casing
__________________________________________________________________________
may be shipped to the rig with environmental safe thread compounds on a corrosion
inhibitor.
10.2.2 Cleaning of Pipe and Threads

Having completed the drifting of the pipe, and prior to thread cleaning, the pipe body
should be blown through with compressed air to remove any debris and dry out the
interior.
• Prior to running, ensure that all threads are thoroughly clean and free from dirt or
grease and doped with thread compound. They should be kept dry and protected with
cleaned protectors, wherever possible, from the time they are cleaned to the time they
are used.
• With steam cleaning and air blast facilities, clean the threads and protectors (both pin
and box) with a high pressure steam jet, followed by an air blast to dry the items.
• With high pressure water, clean the threads and protectors. A de-watering solvent
(e.g. 'Houghtoclean 500') should then be applied to the threads and seals using a soft
clean brush.
Diesel or paraffin should NOT be used for thread cleaning, since if not thoroughly
removed, a lack of lubricant adhesion to the threads and seals will result. The diesel also
attracts foreign debris, which can be encapsulated in the thread roots, resulting in galling.
Connections must be dried thoroughly, to prevent thread and seal corrosion.
10.2.3 Inspection
Cleaning and drying will be of a quality that will allow all features of the connection to be
visible, including any counterbore features of the pin/box, and externally to approximately
1" into the pipe body, beyond the pin thread.
The threads and seal areas should be inspected for damage or manufacturing flaws. Check
for loose couplings. Refurbish damaged threads where possible. If the thread is too
damaged to repair, clearly mark it with red paint, noting the defect type and location.
If buttress threaded casing is being inspected, the triangle can be marked with a
longitudinal paint line for easier location on the rig floor when making up the coupling. The
presence of a whole triangle (or more than one triangle) should be noted, as this will be
indicative of manufacture quality.
Only very slight surface corrosion of threads and seal areas (easily removed by brush or
emery paper) can be accepted on premium connection.
A environmentally safe thread compound should be applied to the connections and
protectors, after the thorough cleaning and drying process (as above) is completed.
• Protectors must be correctly fitted when moving pipe. Only Elastomeric/Composite

material protectors are to be supplied with premium connection pipe.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Use a storage compound on the threads for when it is intended to store the tubulars at
the rig site for more than a 10 day period. (Kendex Orange, Rust Veto AS or Atlas
Bradford Premium are examples of these corrosion protective greases). The storable
compound must be completely removed prior to running casing.
10.3 Measuring Casing and Casing Tally Production

Casing is to be strapped in meters/feet and decimal parts of a meter/foot. The rack tally
measurements are to be carried out twice, independently, by different people. Any
differences are to be resolved prior to laying down the next row of casing for processing.
The rack tally should have any 'No Drift' or other non usable joints clearly marked and
removed/laid out such that these joints are not used in the production of the running tally.
The casing joint rack tally numbering system (either shoe joint is number one or the last
numbered joint) is of no consequence.
The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will then produce a casing running tally, with details of
centralizer placement, thread lock, positioning of particular casing joints (multiple casing
types) and cumulative lengths. The running tally will be distributed to the Driller, Crane
Operator and Lead Roustabout prior to the casing run.
Other required information on the running tally include, joint number to enter open hole,
buoyed string weight per foot, hang off point elevation, metal displacement, depth of any
relatively severe dog legs, general inclination data if the well is deviated and the depth and
nature of any hole problems encountered while drilling the open hole section.
The total number of full length casing joints, and casing pup joints at the rig site should be
noted on the running tally, and the number expected after the run is completed will be
indicated. It is imperative that once the casing run is apparently complete, a basic check of
the number of joints at the rig site is completed. All casing joints will thus be stored in an
agreed place (including defective joints) to facilitate the check.
10.4 Casing Running
10.4.1 Casing Running Equipment

Casing running equipment checks should include the following :
__________________________________________________________________________
a. Power Tongs
Check the overall condition of the tong unit, and the tong dies in particular. If not
already done, the load cell can be calibrated by suspending a known weight from it
and then equating this with the corresponding torque taking the effective lever arm
into consideration.
The tong specifically should have torque output tested up to the maximum
anticipated for the job, and (if torque/turn is to be used) the output of the
computer displayed torque should be checked with the tong load cell reading. The
tong should incorporate a power fluid dump valve, which automatically cuts make-
up when the maximum torque for the connection is reached.
The 3 main contractors (BJS, Weatherford and Franks) provide a special Chrome
tubular Tong, which is based on their basic tong, but the Jaws and the rotating head
arrangement are different for each contractor.
BJS
The standard Speedmaster tong is equipped with aluminum smooth surfaced
jaws, but dependent on required torque, can be fitted with steel jaws, with flat
topped pyramidal teeth, or standard teeth. The contact area is large on the jaws
and no marking of the pipe results.
Weatherford
The Standard tong with integral backup is used. The Jaws are much longer than
conventional jaws and are faced with a non-marking material. The jaws facing is
fabricated from a hard elastomer with strengthening provided by fine steel
fibers.
Frank's
The tong unit is basically the same as the standard tubular tong. The Jaws
however consist of a fluid filled element, faced with non-metallic friction
material, similar to emery cloth.
b. Elevators and Slips
Both sets of equipment should be in good working order. Refer to the section on
Lifting Equipment. In particular the slip (and elevator, if applicable) dies are to be
checked. Perform a trial latch on the casing before the job commences, to ensure
the elevators fit correctly (casing may be oversized) .
With respect to Chrome tubular slips, two approaches appear to be current, of
which the first detailed below is more common at present.
Chrome 22 dies are used in a conventional slip to replace the dies normally
used. The dies have flat-topped pyramidal teeth. The idea is that these minimize
the damage to the pipe and reduce the ferrous 'contamination' at the contact
point on the tubular.
__________________________________________________________________________
A relatively new innovation is, in effect a side door type elevator, which takes
the load on the coupling shoulder. This however lowers the coupling tensile
load bearing capability, and requires special couplings.
c. Stabbing Guide
Check this piece of equipment if applicable. The guide should fit snugly over the
box, and extend to at least the inside of the shoulder, in order to prevent the pin
nose seal from being damaged. Use of a stabbing guide when running premium
connections.
10.4.2 Running Instructions

The following instructions should be adhered to while running all tubulars:
1. Tubulars should be transferred to the catwalk with both protectors in place.

2. Install a Klampon protector (e.g. Klepo) to the pin end prior to picking up the joint
into the V-door. If Klampon protectors are not available, leave on the regular pin
protector.
3. Care should be taken to prevent damage to the pipe when moving from the piperack to
the rig floor.
4. Inspect the threads and seal areas (if applicable) on the rig floor, and refurbish as
required.
5. Apply uncontaminated (environmentally safe) casing thread compound to all boxes and
seal areas. Also apply to the pin seal area and bottom half of the pin. Apply the dope
when the joint is in the V door, NOT when the joint is in the rotary.
Where repeatedly high shoulders are indicated by torque/turn, dope application should
be extended to cover the whole pin.
A 2" paint brush should be used, taking great care not to contaminate the dope via
dirt/water on the brush from the rig floor.
6. Stab the joint carefully, using the correct stabbing guide if appropriate.
7. Engage the power tong and rotate slowly to make up the first few threads (connection
dependent) . The connection should then be made up in high gear (not greater than 10
RPM) , and low gear engaged prior to shouldering out. Apply the final torque at 1 - 3
RPM.
On Buttress couplings, ensure that the casing is made up to the correct torque. The
routine to obtain the correct average power tight make-up torque is to bring the face of
the collar (top surface of the upward facing box) to the bottom of the triangle on each
of the first 10 joints of casing after the shoe joints, and establish the average make-up
torque of these. This average is then applied to the remaining joints, with spot checks
on the triangle position every 10 subsequent joints.
__________________________________________________________________________
On Premium connections, a graphic torque/turn analyzer (JAM, Salvo or Data Trek) is

recommended to confirm correct make up for all tubing and casing up to and including
9 5/8". The system should include 'Over-Torque' sensing and automatic speed control.
Sustained final torque should be applied for 3 seconds, to ensure that the final torque
recorded is the Static torque rather than the dynamic torque.
8. Care should be taken when setting slips and lowering the elevators to prevent shock
loads and impact damage.
9. Ensure that after filling up the casing, that dope has not been washed away from the
box connection. If this occurs, re-clean and dry the connection and apply fresh dope.
10.4.3 Casing O.D. tolerances

The standard API tolerance on casing O.D. (on all grades of pipe) is ±1% on OD and -
.5% on OD. Casing centralizers are currently manufactured to fit the 1% tolerance.
However, for some proprietary grades and sizes of pipe, there are tolerances, which are
manufacturer driven. This additional metal may require special handling equipment. For
example, 13 3/8" 72 ppf HC95 and HC110 casing, with 12.25" drift has an additional OD
of 0.08" above API, making the maximum OD = 13.589".
10.5 Chrome Duplex Alloy Tubular Goods Handling

Chrome tubular goods are here defined as mainly Chrome 22, although some operators
treat Chrome 13 in a similar fashion.
Chrome tubulars are generally shipped in racks, as later described, but the power tongue
jaw assembly may be the standard type for Chrome 13, with a modified flat crested
pyramidal tooth jaw insert (dies) used. It is recommended that the modified jaw assembly
and inserts be used for Chrome 22.
10.5.1 Introduction
Where reservoir fluids are expected to contain CO2, H2S and/or have a high Chloride
content, special alloy tubulars may be specified for use. Any action during the storage,
handling and running of the casing which leads to localized hardening or mild steel
inclusions can lead to localized sulfide stress cracking, hydrogen embrittlement and
corrosion. It is thus imperative that more care is taken with these tubulars than regular
Carbon steel tubulars.
At all times, when handling special alloy Tubulars, contact with other metallic equipment,
such as slings, wire brushes etc. should be avoided.
Special treatments are applied to the thread surfaces of the tubulars, and is vital to prevent
thread and seal galling. This treatment includes electrolysis and electrolytically deposited
coatings of Zinc or Copper with Nickel. Once made up, the threads cannot be re-made,
without re-treatment.
__________________________________________________________________________
10.5.2 Chrome Tubular Shipping

• Chrome tubulars should preferably be transported on custom built racks to minimize
movement and impacts during transport.
• Tubulars should be divided by non-metallic, non-absorbent dividers.
• Non-metallic slings or steel slings with non-metallic wraps to wrap around the casing
can be used.
• Tubular handling should be should be witnessed by an Halliburton Drilling Supervisor,
if possible.
10.5.3 Rig Site Preparation and Inspection of Chrome Tubulars

A pre-job briefing should be held with the handling crew to indicate the different
methods required when handling the Chrome tubulars.
• Rack tubulars, separating with plank stripping and ensuring that the tubing does not
come into contact with steel supports.
• Remove the thread protectors, using only plastic or wooden mallets as necessary.
Remove desiccant packages and drift the pipe with non metallic drift.
• At all times, avoid hammering and other violent impacts to the tubulars. The hardness
of the tubulars is strictly controlled and impacts can cause localized hard spots, leading
to the SSC (Sulfide Stress Cracking).
• Compressed air blast the body of the pipe to remove moisture and any scale. Note that
there should NOT be any scale if the tubing was cleaned and coated correctly.
• Clean the threads as per regular casing instruction previously noted. However, DO
NOT use a wire brush. Use a non-metallic bristled brush.
• Inspect the threads and seal areas as per regular casing. Mark rejected joints and
layout.
• If the tubulars are to be left for more than 3 days prior to running, lightly dope the
threads with environmentally safe thread compound and replace the cleaned thread
protectors.
• If the tubulars are to be stored on site for more than one month, and they do not
already have a preservative compound on the threads, the preservative must be applied.
This must be thoroughly removed prior to running.
10.5.4 Running Chrome Tubulars

• Check all casing running equipment as per conventional casing. Pay particular attention
to the dies as scratches on the Chrome pipe can lead to stress corrosion. Provide
wooden or rubber matting on the catwalk, V-door and rotary table area to avoid
unnecessary contact between steel plating and the tubulars. A wooden lined trough can
be used as a ramp when pulling tubulars up to the rig floor.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Pin end protectors should be left in place while pulling the joint up the rig floor. Only
quick release protectors without a metal tensioning clamp can be utilized (such as the
Klepo air inflatable type) . Casing hooks should not be used unless the protectors are in
place.
• Always use the correct stabbing guide. Keep it clean and ensure it is aligned properly
for each stabbing operation.
• Clean the threads with high pressure water and air blast them dry thoroughly prior to
applying the dope as per instructions specific to that type of connection. The factors
affecting the dope application include, connection type, O.D., metallurgy and dope
type. This detailed information should be in the Well Program.
• Proceed as per instructions for the regular casing.
10.6 Preparation and Running of a Liner and Liner Hanger
10.6.1 General Information

As many different types of hanger are available, a general overview follows, for both
hydraulically set and mechanically set hangers. Specific information will be found in the
manufacturer’s published data.
Generally, a liner hanger and setting tool will arrive at the rig, pre assembled and inspected
by the service engineer who will supervise the running of the equipment. A full inventory
listing, with valid certificates should accompany the equipment, as it will be wrapped in
protective shipping materials (densotape, bubble wrap etc.) . Certificates showing pressure
tests conducted on the 'stacked up' assembly should also be available, or pressure tests on
site may be required. If possible, the assembly and testing of liner hanger and setting
should be witnessed by a Halliburton representative.
10.6.2 Equipment Description and Listing, Pre-Operational Check List and Other
Considerations
The Liner Hanger Equipment broadly divides into the following :
1. Hanger assembly (single or dual cone) with/without integral annulus isolation packer
and PBR.
2. Liner hanger running tool assembly, c/w cementing pack-off, liner wiper plug etc.
3. Cementing manifold complete with swivel and flag sub (ball dropping sub if hanger is
hydraulically set) .
The Liner Handling Equipment:

Side door elevators
Single joint elevators, complete with swivel sling
__________________________________________________________________________
Rotary hand slips

Safety (dog) collar
(if Non-Upset casing is to be run, then YC elevators and slip spider are required)
'Klampon' type protectors
Power tong dressed for the appropriate casing
Hydraulic power unit for above
Torque turn unit
Spare casing collars
X/O's as required
Liner polishing/dressing mills
Casing spear casing with pack off and stop ring
Centralizers, scratchers and stop collars (as appropriate)
Casing drift
Casing and pup joints as required
Environmentally safe thread compound
Thread lock
Circulating swedge
Liner setting ball (if applicable) and liner wiper plug dart.
Check and inspect the assemblies for the following :

• Weight and grade of the hanger
• Required sub assemblies are present and dimensions
• PBR size and pressure rating
• Correct liner wiper plug is installed for the liner tubular size.
• Size and number of liner wiper plug shear pins installed and estimated shear out
pressure. This information should be available on the documentation of the liner, and
should tally with the program figures.
• Seals and packer element for damage (scoring etc.) .
• Hanger and (if applicable) packer slips for damage (cracks etc.) .
• Free passage of the setting ball (if a hydraulically set hanger) through the assembly
(including the wiper plug) .
• Ensure that the ball should pass through the minimum I.D. of the setting string, and
remove any unnecessary restricted I.D. tools from the setting string, if not already
done.
__________________________________________________________________________
• j Check, if possible, the release mechanism of the running tool from the hanger.
• k Pressure test the plug dropping head against the kelly cock to the casing pressure
test pressure
• Check shoe track equipment as per normal
• Check the condition and rating of the cement manifold swivel to confirm it is heavy
duty.
• Prior to running the liner, make up the cementing manifold to the cement kelly and lay
out on the pipe rack ready for use.
Other considerations
• The exact liner length will depend on the space out constraints and the pipe length at
the rig site. However, the sump should normally not exceed 2.5 m/8 ft and the top of
the tie-back packer element should not be less than 1.5 m/5 ft below the nearest casing
connection.
• The minimum overlap within the previous casing will normally be 90 m/300 ft. This
may be more or less, dependent on casing design and zonal isolation for testing.
• The required setting depth of the top of the landing collar should be checked with the
client office prior to the pre-liner running clean out trip. The requirement for sump may
for example change based on the requirement to drop TCP guns.
• One or more liner pup joints may be required, and a gamma ray pip tag may be
installed.
• The centralizer program will be in the general drilling program. Gauge the centralizers
prior to running
• Fill the liner every joint

• Use the stabbing guide
10.6.3 Liner Running Instructions

Ensure the service engineer makes up the assembly. Exact instructions depend on the
system used. Generally however, start threads with a chain tong, do not apply torque over
the hanger assembly, only to the top and bottom subs. Paint mark any critical connections
to ensure backing out does not occur.
• Drift the drill pipe running string on trip out the hole to run liner.
• Circulate the liner contents through the complete assembly, once run. Observe pressure
limits for hydraulically set hangers.
• Note the up and down weights of the assembly.
• When running in on DP, use the drill pipe wiper rubber and ensure that the string does
not turn in the table.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Check up and down drag at the casing shoe.

• Continue to run the liner in open hole. Space out such that adequate rathole is available
to tag bottom with the cement manifold and kelly made up. Tag bottom and then pull
back to liner setting depth.
• Note that if tight spots are encountered, work and carefully circulate the liner, limiting
the circulation pressure to less than the setting pressure, to avoid premature setting.
• Rig up and pressure test cementing lines, and circulate either, whichever is the greater
of the following :
• Bottoms up plus 20%
• 120 % of the string contents
NOTE that sufficient chiksan swings should be rigged up to allow pick up clear of the
PBR.
• Check string weight with and without circulation.
Hydraulically set liner hanger(non-rotational)

• If a hydraulically set liner is being employed, drop the setting ball. Monitor the flag
indicator sub closely for a sign that the ball has dropped. While pumping the ball down
(at 320-475 liters/min/ 85 - 125 gpm or as advised) , reciprocate the string recording
up and down string weights.
• Ensure the liner is on depth prior to seating the setting ball. Once the ball has seated,
increase pressure to the required slip activation pressure and slack off the total weight
of the liner.
• Shear out the seat in the landing collar.
• Release the running tool from the liner hanger.
• Pick up to confirm that the running tool has released (but not too far, which could
shear off the liner wiper plug) . If the annulus isolation packer is mechanically set by
dogs on the running string from within the packer, this will also limit the distance the
string can be raised.
• Prior to cementing, set down weight on hanger with running tool. The weight required
to set down depends on the pump off force generated when shearing out and bumping
the liner wiper plug.
• Break circulation and cement as per approved program. Note that the drilling ECD
should not be exceeded.
• Check for back flow
• Pull back and set down weight to energize the annulus isolation pack-off .
• Pull until of the running string pulls dry or the bottom is 5 to 10 stands above of the
liner top and reverse circulate as required. If the well is significantly deviated,
__________________________________________________________________________
consideration should be given to reciprocation whilst circulating, to clear the low side
of cement.
10.7 Casing Accessory Equipment
10.7.1 Casing Centralizers

Properly installed centralizers ensure adequate stand-off between the casing and wellbore,
in order that an effective seal can be made by the cement between casing and wellbore.
Check appropriate regulations to assure compliance.
Properly installed centralizers assist in the following :
• Prevent drag while RIH with casing
• Minimize differential sticking
• Centralize casing in the wellbore and thus reduce channeling by aiding mud
removal.
Basic types:
• Spring Bow
• Semi-rigid
• Rigid bladed
The spring bow type have the advantage of accommodating hole enlargement, whereas the
rigid type provide a more positive stand-off in gauge hole. Reference to a caliper log will
indicate which type is appropriate in a hole section. If the hole section is critical, a mixed
centralized string can be used.
__________________________________________________________________________
Centralizer Placement
Centralizers are placed in the following intervals :
• Through intervals requiring effective cementing, such as production intervals

• Adjacent to and through zones of circulation or seepage loss
• Through zones with high dog-leg severity
• In the lower part of surface and intermediate casing, to ensure good cementing and so
reduce the possibility of backing-off while drilling.
Within the intervals requiring centralization, the spacing of the centralizers is dependent
upon the ability of a particular centralizer to provide stand-off at a particular wall force.
The wall force depends on pipe weight and hole deviation.
The requirement for a particular stand off can be equated into centralizer spacing by use of
the following :
• API Spec 10D, Casing Centralizers

• The centralizer service company supplier will advice on placement and spacing of
centralizers, based on a stand off requirement.
Halliburton generally recommends the following:
Surface Casing :
1 flexible bodied centralizer per joint for the first 5 joints, inclusive of the shoe joint, and
then 1 centralizer every 4th joint in the cemented section of the annulus.
Intermediate Casing :
For the lower 200 m / 650 ft of cemented interval, 1 or 2 flexible centralizers per joint, and
in the subsequent cemented annulus, 1 centralizer every 4 joints.
Development/Production Well Interval Casing :
Over the production interval a combination of centralizers and reciprocating scratchers is
preferred.
Confirmation will depend on hole conditions and production interval.
For any of these scratcher/centralizer combinations to be effective, the casing string should
be reciprocated while cement is placed into the annulus.
In deviated hole, the placement of centralizers is dependent on the average hole angle and
localized dog leg severity. However, a design stand-off of 67% is usually more than
adequate.
For the relationship between centralizer stand-off, mud properties, hole/casing size and the
flow rate required while placing the cement, refer to the Cementing section of this
guideline.
__________________________________________________________________________
Location of Centralizer on the Casing

Bow spring type
If the centralizer is not attached over a casing collar, it must be restrained by means of a
stop collar. The stop collar(s) are always positioned inside the bow spring type centralizer,
so that the centralizer is always pulled through an obstruction. This reduces the chance of it
being permanently deformed, or even crushed over a casing collar. For a bow spring
centralizer must never be positioned to travel freely between two casing collars on a casing
joint.
Rigid type
There are various types, but the Ray Oil type are fitted either as slip-ons and held down via
hold down screws in the rigid blades, or are made up between joints (i.e. the intercasing
type), and come complete with box and pin. The intercasing type is primarily for close
tolerance wellbore applications.
10.7.2 Casing Scratchers

Casing scratchers can be used to remove excess wall cake build up, thus improving the
cement to wellbore bond, and minimizing channeling. They should be considered when
poor mud properties and high permeability formations in a section result in thick wall cake
build up over an interval. They are most effectively employed whilst the cement is being
pumped into place. The scratchers also assist in distributing the cement around the casing.
Rotational Scratchers (not normally used by anyone)
Normally used when the pipe has to be set at a precise depth, and usually in vertical and
relatively shallow holes, where excessive torque is not expected during rotation.
Reciprocating Scratchers
Scratcher spacing is dependent upon the amount to which the pipe will be raised and
lowered. While reciprocating, a very close check on the up and down drag, compared to a
previously recorded value, should be made. If it appears that the cement is close to setting
up, the casing must be placed at the appropriate depth.
When a production casing is run, a combination centralizer/scratcher assembly is run and
reciprocated, which is always reciprocated (see previous comments on Production casing
centralizer placement) .
10.7.3 Non-Rotating Cement Plug and Float Equipment

It has been shown that the time required to drill out float equipment is due to the wiper
plugs, rather than the drillable material of the shoe and collar. Specially modified float
equipment and casing wiper plugs (Halliburton NR equipment) are available. The float
locks together by way of a raised profile which mates with a similar profile on the plugs
and limits rotation of the plugs while drilling out. Note that the specially adapted float
__________________________________________________________________________
equipment must be used with this type of plug, and the top plug must bump for rotation to
be inhibited.
10.7.4 Pressure Differential Fill Float Equipment

Differential fill float equipment permits entry of well bore fluid into the casing, at a set
pressure differential between the well bore hydrostatic and casing internal hydrostatic
pressure. This method of fill saves rig time in top filling and also limits surge pressure on
the formation. The reduced pressure surging can reduce the chance of breaking down a
weak formation while running casing, which also limits the possibility of differential
sticking. The pressure differential to allow fill can be altered by the use of various rated
springs. In the case of the Halliburton PDF (Pressure Differential Fill) float shoe and
collar, the normal back pressure valve is activated by dropping a weighted ball and
applying from 60-85 bar/900 - 1200 psi pressure in the casing. This also ejects the ball.
10.8 Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Thread Compounds

The objectives of the API modified thread compound are laid out in API Bulletin 5A2, '
Thread Compounds for Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe ', and include, adequate lubricity,
environmental tolerances (temperature, property stability) , ease of application and suitable
thread filling properties. Thread compounds formulated according to API Bulletin 5A2
(API modified thread compounds) are essentially formulated to ensure that the helical
thread path on an API round threaded connection is filled with a suitable inert low strength
material (lead, zinc and copper). They were not specifically designed for use with Premium
threads.
The fact that API modified thread compound was not designed for premium threads does
not mean that they are not appropriate for these threads now. A recent SPE publication has
pointed out possible performance problems, related to premium threads and the inert
filling material in the thread compound. Stress concentration and subsequent possible
failure of connection components due to fine tolerance construction of the earlier premium
threads was highlighted. The thread tolerances have been modified and the stress
distribution on threads re-distributed, enhancing the performance of premium threads and
negating the problems of stress concentration.
Proper preparation and application of an API modified thread compound, in good
condition (i.e. uncontaminated, well mixed and at the proper temperature etc. ) is probably
the safest bet for all round thread compound applications.
Several operators have recently compiled a report on the use of thread compounds. The
conclusion is that there is no particular compound that will be suitable for all applications.
However, they have produced a matrix for thread compound selection, dependent on the
property of the dope which is optimum in the particular application for which the dope is to
be used.
Although there are now some relatively non-toxic dopes, most are still extremely toxic, and
great care should be taken, particularly with respect to cleanliness, as ingestion can be
__________________________________________________________________________
serious. An example of a non-toxic dope is a BOMAC product called Cats Paw Black 712.
This is not to be confused with an older product of the same name. The 712BD dope, for
example, contains a bio-degradable grease without petroleum oils.
__________________________________________________________________________
Thread Compound Application Techniques

Refer to the earlier sections of this chapter. Note also that Frank's and Weatherford
provide dope applicators. The Weatherford 'AccuKote' applicator (and the Frank's
equivalent) optimize :
Volume of lubricant applied
Uniformity of application
Lubricant consistency
Lubricant cleanliness
__________________________________________________________________________
11.0CEMENTATION
11.1General Cementation Guidelines
11.1.1 Planning
11.1.2 Calculations and Volumetric Data
11.1.3 Cement Excess
11.2General Cementation Planning & Organization Check List
11.2.1 Cementing System Check List
11.2.2 Cementing Service Contractor Check List
11.2.3 Cement Unit Check List
11.2.4 Pre- Cement Job Check List
11.2.5 On-Site Drilling Engineers Check List
11.3Responsibilities of the Drilling Supervisor
11.4Cementing Operations Check List
11.5Cement Program Check List
11.6Cement And Its Functions
11.6.1 General Cement Theory
11.6.2 Special Cementing Considerations.
Anti Gas Migration Slurries
Thixotropic Cements
11.7Standard Cement Additives
11.7.1 Accelerators
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 21 Cementation
11.7.2 Retarders
11.7.3 Dispersants
11.7.4 Fluid Loss Additives
11.7.5 Density Adjusters
11.7.6 Defoamers
11.7.7 Retrogressive Strength Additives
11.8Annular Mud Removal During Cementation.
11.9Liner Cementation
11.10Plug Cementation
11.10.1 Cementing Equipment
11.10.2 Cement Plug Job Procedure
11.10.3 Standard Practices When Setting Cement Plugs
11.11Squeeze Cementation
11.11.1 Standard Practices For Squeeze Cementation
11.11.2 Standard Squeeze Procedure
11.11.3 Squeeze Procedure Wi th Retrievable Packer
__________________________________________________________________________
Cementation Page 2 of 21 August 1995
11.1General Cementation Guidelines
11.1.1 Planning
The success of any cement job depends on the supervision of 3 main areas :
Inspection, testing and preparation of all equipment and materials to be used for the
cement job.
Calculation
Pre-planning of possible required contingency operations
The testing of a cement and mix water sample by a Halliburton cementing service company
or other laboratory prior to the cementation is of vital importance.
11.1.2 Calculations and Volumetric data

1 sack of cement = 94 lbs weight = 1 cubic ft volume
1 sack of cement = 42.6 kg weight = 0.03 cubic meter volume
Common blended cements contain Silica flour and Bentonite
Silica Flour : 1 cubic ft = 70 lbs
Silica Flour : 0.03 cubic meters = 31.8 kg
Bentonite : 1 cubic ft = 60 lbs
Bentonite : 0.03 cubic meters = 27.2 kg
1 bbl volume = 5.6146 cubic ft
1 Liter volume = 0.001 cubic meters
(other useful data can be found in the Halliburton Red Book)
11.1.3 Cement Excess

Where a caliper log is not available in the open hole, the slurry volumetric excess applied to
the calculated volume is dependent upon the hole size, but may also be modified by other
volumetric information, eg such as carbide gas lag checks annular volumes, the required
volume to displace a new mud system, experience in the area, etc.
Typical Excess Applied Without Caliper Information

36" hole (if drilled) w/ 30" csg
: Excess up to 250%
26" hole w/ 20" casing: Open hole excess up to 150%
17 1/2" hole w/13 3/8" casing: 100% excess over open hole section
12 1/4" hole w/ 9 5/8" casing: 50% excess over open hole section
Higher excess volumes may be used if the above are surface casings.
__________________________________________________________________________
Thus, for example, if the calculated volume of slurry required for an open hole annular
section was 16,000 liters or 100 BBLS, the actual volume pumped would be 16,000 x 1.50
= 24,000 liters or 150 BBLS in a 26" hole section. This excess is not normally applied to
the tail slurry, which is usually specified as a particular volume of dry cement sacks.
Excess Applied With Caliper Information
A 10 - 30% volumetric excess may be applied to the caliper integrated hole volume,
dependent on the caliper type and casing or liner to be cemented.
11.2General Cementation Planning & Organization Check List
11.2.1 Cementing System Check List

The following checks are to be conducted on the cementing system :
Fluff up the Cement 'P' tanks a day before the job, and check for leaks/ valve operation,
etc. Note however, that excess fluffing of cement in the silos is to be avoided, as it can
lead to cement degradation.
• Check air compressors functioning correctly
• Ensure surge tank (steady flow bin) is internally clean and valves/vents operate
correctly.
• Blow air through all lines. Ensure air is dry and lines are clean/clear
• Time the surge tank filling rate, to ensure system is operating correctly, and will
provide adequate supply for cementing rate. Do not fill the tank with cement for a job
until immediately prior to the job.
11.2.2 Cementing Service Contractor Check List

The following is to be accomplished by the Cementing Service contractor :
• Ensure that the cementing unit and any associated cementation equipment is fit for
operation, and has all the relevant valid certification and calibration data, including that
for radioactive densometer, if used.
The gelation properties of slurries vary considerably. At elevated bottom hole
temperatures of with thixotropic slurries, in particular, any shut-down while pumping
and displacing cement should be avoided. Although the thickening time may seem
adequate, gel strength development may make re-starting a cement job impossible.
Studies have shown that serious problems can develop after a shut down of greater
than 15 minutes. Thus, careful preparation of the cement pump and power unit is vital.
• Record stock levels of cement and additives at the rig site. Ensure spare parts and other
consumables are available.
• Perform cementing calculations, and verify these with the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor and Drilling Engineer (if present)
__________________________________________________________________________
• Obtain representative and adequate volume of samples of cement, water and additives
and forward in good time for Laboratory testing, properly packaged. Improper
sampling and packaging can lead to contamination, invaldiating all lab work.
11.2.3 Cement Unit Check List

• Unit and lines to be pressure tested to a minimum of 70 bar/1000 psi above the
expected casing pressure test. The test is to be recorded on a chart recorder.
• Unit displacement/mix water tanks volume scale is accurate.
• Displacement tank valves are easily operable and do not leak.
• Low pressure mixing system is flushed through.
• Packings on mixing pumps are operable.
• Mix pump/manifold pressure is adequate for mixing.
• Jets in the mixer are correct for the job.
• Packings on HP pumps are operable.
• 320 liter/2 bbl tub (or equivalent back-up mix system) is available along with required
hoses and fittings.
• Oil in pump lubricator is sufficient
• Engine oil/water levels OK. If densometer is available, check calibration.
11.2.4 Pre- Cement Job Check List

The following should also be accomplished prior to a cement job:
Ensure mud pump fluid ends are inspected prior to cement displacement. As a bare
minimum, all the valve pots should be removed and the valves/springs/seats checked for
wear.
• Cement head servicable, i.e. valves, threads, indicators and plug locator pins operable.
Check “O” ring on quick coupling.
• If a Liquid Additive System (LAS) is available, ensure that the LAS pumps, lines and
gauging systems are operable, correctly calibrated and tested.
• Volume of liquid additives or powder at the site are sufficient for the excess of that
required for the job.
• Water and/or mud supply rate, to the displacement tanks meet requirements.
• If applicable, the batch mixer is connected up and tested satisfactorily.
• If applicable, in areas where cement quality is questionable, a rock catcher should be
installed and utilized.
__________________________________________________________________________
11.2.5 On Site Drilling Engineer’s Check List
If on site, the Halliburton Drilling Engineer is required to do the following. (Note that the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will delegate responsibility for these tasks appropriately, if
an Drilling Engineer is not on site.)
• Ensure cement samples are sent to the laboratory prior to mixing and pumping. Normal
sample requirements are as follows :
Cement from each silo to be used
: 10 kg or 25 lbs
Mix Water : 4 Liter/or 1 gal (minimum)
• Collect slurry samples during the job, and keep samples of mix water with additives, for
analysis, if problems occur with the cementation. Collect sample of any spacers and
chemical washes/pre-flushes used, and retain a mud sample.
• Check the actual bottom hole static and circulating temperatures with those used for
the slurry design. Ensure that the thickening time is adequate for the job.
• Ensure that the cement spacer and cement column in place has adequate hydrostatic
pressure to maintain overbalance with respect to the pore pressure.
• Obtain a caliper slurry volume
• Calculate and compare cementing calculations with the Cementer and Halliburton
Drilling Supervisor.
• During the cementation : Verify, record and monitor mix water type and volume used,
slurry density and pump pressure. A job log should be produced which also notes any
down time and causes. The initial mix time is to be recorded and checked against the
pumpability time.
• Ensure any spacers and mix water required are mixed according to requirements
• Complete a cementation report
11.3Responsibilities of the Drilling Supervisor

The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor will co-ordinate the execution of the cementation. He
ensures that all the relevant personnel are issued with a detailed program of the cement job,
highlighting their individual responsibilities. The program will include :
• Ensure all appropriate peersonal safety equipment is in use

• Volumes, pressures and pump rates of the cementing and displacement operation.
• Any casing reciprocation/rotation requirements and limitations during cementing
Contingencies will be drawn up, based on the specific type of cementation, for the
following occurrences :
• Alternate mix water supply of pumping / transfer system

• Rig and /or cement pump failure
• Procedures if maximum anticipated pressures are exceeded
__________________________________________________________________________
• Procedure if flash set occurs
• Procedure and limitations if sufficient displacement volume is not available due to
losses (i.e. collapse pressure limitation on water displacement fluid)
• Procedure if well kicks during or immediately after a cement job.
• Procedure in case of catastrophic well control or pumping problems
11.4Cementing Operations Checklist
1. The Mud Engineer and Driller are to prepare the pits and flowline for the expected
total returns from the job. If at all possible, the total returns of spacers plus slurries
should be accommodated into one pit. If this is not possible, flow should be diverted
to a second pit when necessary. It should not return to an equalized pit.
2. The Driller and the Mud Logger will record the volume prior to cementation in each
pit. The Derrickman will take a physical dip of each pit prior to the cement job.
3. Once pits have been prepared, and particularly if mix water is contained in a pit,
absolutely no transfers, additions or any other activities likely to cause contamination
(washing down, servicing of agitator motors etc.) are to be allowed, without the
express permission of the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor.
4. The Mud Logger/Mud Engineer/Driller are to be informed when cementation
commences, and all relevent events thereafter.
5. Ensure the cementer accurately meters the mix water from the displacement tanks,
and keeps an accurate record of how many tanks have been used. The required
amounts will have previously been agreed.
6. Avoid the possibility of pumping diluted cement or even mix water into the casing
prior to launching the top plug.
7. Ascertain that the correct pit(s) have been lined up on the mud pumps for
displacement, and perform a short pressure test on the cement head valve to ensure
the pump has suction.
8. Physically ascertain the amount of fluid pumped from the suction pit(s) during the
displacement. Ensure that the amount pumped is that indicated by the pump stroke
counters. Do not rely on the stroke counters alone when displacing the cement.
9. Displace cement at the maximum rate possible, considering all pressure restrictions
on the surface and LOT/losses into account.
10. Displace from the cement unit in the following instances :
a. When no rig pumps are va ailable.
b. When placing cement plugs without a plug catcher
c. During liner cementation
11. If the rig pump is used, have cement pump ready to bump the plug if pressures
become excessive.
__________________________________________________________________________
12. Record all mixing, displacing, bumping, opening/closing of DV collars, etc. on the
cement pump and rig pump pressure charts, to enable interpretation of the chart at a
later date.
13. The mud logger and driller/derrickman are to confirm the total fluid lost/gained
during the entire cementation. This is to be checked with the Mud Engineer’s figure.
14. After bumping the plug and pressure testing the casing as necessary, release pressure
and check for back flow from the float equipment.
15. If there is back flow, pump back the amount which was observed to back flow only.
If back flow occurs again, pump back the fluid and wait until the cement is hard
before repeating the test. Monitor the pressure from the cement head, and maintain
the observed differential pressure, immediately prior to bump or prior to stopping
displacement.
16. If bump is achieved, pressure test the casing immediately for 15 minutes per API or
per the local regulatory requirements for the well program. Remember that excessive
test time can create a potential microeannulus.
11.5Cement Program Checklist

The drilling program cement job specifications are only outlines. The actual cement recipe
for example will be determined by laboratory tests on the rig site samples of cement and
water. The results of this test are normally passed to the rig in suitable time for the job.
__________________________________________________________________________
Other checks on the cement program should include :
1. Check that the programmed TOC covers any problem zones (e.g. hydrocarbon bearing
or overpressured zones).
2. Re-check that the thickening time of the slurry is greater than the planned job time,
inclusive of mixing. As a general guideline, the thickening time to at the BHCT should
exceed the time to mix, pump and displace by a period of 1 to 2 hours.
3. Ensure that any apparent discrepancies between the drilling program and the objectives
of the cementation dictated by actual circumstances are fully discussed with the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor well in advance of the job.
4. Check to ensure that all regulatory and environmental compliance issues relative to the
cement job are complied with.
11.6Cement and its Functions
11.6.1 General Cement theory

API specification 10, 'API Materials and Testing for Well Cements' contains all standard
reference material.
The process of cement setting is basically one of hydration of the clinkered product of
cement manufacture, and the growth of various phases of crystalline material. The final set
cement may also contain gypsum, alkali Sulfates, magnesia, free lime and other
compounds. These other compounds may affect the rate of hydration, resistance to
chemical attack and slurry properties.
The structure of the clinker grains of cement varies according to the particle size and the
2nd process employed during manufacture, as well as the composition of the original raw
materials used to make the cement clinker. These properties in turn affect for example the
rate of hydration (hence cement set rate) and ultimate strength etc.
API class H and G cement is the standard oil well cement used by the industry.
The basic functions of cement are as follows :
• Bond the casing to the formation

• Minimize the danger of blowouts from high pressure zones
• Protect and support all production zones
• Seal off all lost circulation zones (and other troublesome zones) prior to drilling ahead
• Repair defective casing in some cases
• Abandon non-producing horizons
• Isolate zones prior to production or hydraulic fracturing
• Reinforcement and corrosion protection
• Isolate water producing intervals
__________________________________________________________________________
In addition to the slurry testing requirements for setting time and compressive strength,
cement slurry rheology is critical to determine the circulating pressure to avoid formation
break down while cementing and slurry stability.
The rheology of cement slurries depends on several factors, which include :
1. The water/cement ratio of the slurry

2. Type, size and shape of cement grains
3. Chemical composition of the cement and the relative distribution of the components at
the surface of cement grains
4. Mixing procedure (particle-wetting efficiency)
Generally, the rheology of the cement slurry should be designed to achieve turbulent flow
at the intended placement pump rate. This will require a careful compromise between the
displacement efficiency (mud removal efficiency), as indicated by PV and YP, and a high
free water value. High free water values in combination with poor slurry stability may
cause poor or absent cement bonding due to solids settling, particularly on the high side of
the hole in significantly deviated wells. Free water values should be as close to zero as
possible and should be checked at high temperature. Free water and slurry stability tests
should be conducted at downhole conditions, regardless of the cement application.
The slurry PV and YP varies as a function of temperature, so the pressure loss calculation
to determine displacement flow regime should reflect this. Generally, the PV and YP
decrease with increased temperature.
11.6.2 Special Cementing Considerations

Anti Gas Migration Slurries
Ordinary cement slurries develop Static Gel Strength (SGS) at some point after pumping
stops. This property prevents full transmission of hydrostatic pressure throughout the
column of cement. This affect, combined with fluid loss induced volume (hence hydrostatic
head) reduction can cause sufficient hydrostatic pressure reduction to leave permeable gas
bearing formations underbalanced. Several additives and cements are available which
address these two main problems. For example, Halliburton offer the following :
• GasChek cement - Expanding gas phase additive to compensate for volume reduction.
• Super CBL cement - Plastic state expanding additive, similar function to above
• GasBan additive - A latex additive which yields low filtrate loss, limiting slurry volume
reduction and delays gel strength development, thus reducing the time period that gas
migration can occur in.
• GasStop cement - Delays the onset of SGS and then accelerates the period during
which SGS develops. It is of little advantage to retard SGS development if the period
required to then develop SGS remains the same prior to setting.
Thixotropic Cements
__________________________________________________________________________
Lost circulation problems and certain types of gas flow can be minimized by using a
thixotropic cement slurry. Thixotropy is a property exhibited by liquids which develop
high gel strength in a short time period. To control gas flow, the cement must be highly
thixotropic, and contain filtration control. The thixotropic quality is very useful when
cementing off a lost circulation zone, as the rapidly developed gel strength prevents the
cement from 'leaking' away into a fracture zone for example.
11.7Cement Additives
11.7.1 Accelerators
Accelerators increase the rate of hydration which occurs when cement comes into contact
with water. Most highly ionic, inorganic compounds such as sodium chloride and calcium
chloride are good accelerators.
CaCl2 (Calcium Chloride)
Always acts as an accelerator, but is generally used at 2-3% BWOC (By Weight Of
Cement, which means dry weight). When liquid calcium chloride is used, 0.4 gal/sk is
equivalent to 2% BWOC CaCl 2.
NaCl (Sodium Chloride)
NaCl only acts as an accelerator at concentrations up to 15% by weight of water. It will act
as a retarder at concentrations greater than 20%. It is not as effective as CaCl
2.
Sea water
Sea water containing approximately 20,000 ppm chlorides will accelerate the cement
equivalent to addition of 1% BWOC CaCl2.
11.7.2 Retarders
Retarders are used to delay the setting time of cement slurries at elevated temperatures.
They slow the rate of cement-water reaction by 2 processes :
• Chelation-Formation of a chemical complex with the unhydrated cement compounds

• Coating-The unhydrated particles of cement are coated by the retarder additive.
It is thus extremely important that the slurry is fully sheared and dispersed.
The main retarder compounds are derivatives of cellulose, lignosulfonates and sugars. The
Sugar and Cellulose retarders tend to increase the viscosity of the slurry, while the
Lignosulfonate derived retarders tend to decrease the viscosity. Retarders also tend to
cause foaming, and require the use of a defoamer.
As the addition of retarders affects the principle mechanism by which cements set and then
gain compressive strength, care must be taken in the quantities added. Depending upon the
design temperature and type of retarder used, a very small increase in the quantity of
retarder used can have a disproportionately large affect on the slurry.
__________________________________________________________________________
Low Temperature Retarders
Calcium lignosulfonates are generally used up to 80 - 90°C or 175 - 200°F. They may be
used at up to 110°C or 230°F, but unpredictable results may be obtained, and slurry
gelation can be increased.
Medium Temperature Retarders
Modified calcium lignosulfonates are generally used in the region 90 - 120°C or 200 - 250°
°C or 100 - 250°F.
F, but they can be used over an interval 40 - 120
High Temperature Retarders
Sugar derivative compounds are generally used in the temperature range from 120 to 150°
C or 250 to 300°F. They can be used at temperatures as low as 80 - 90 °C or 175 - 200°F,
but the extremely low concentrations required make it too sensitive to be practical. It is
possible that the cement will not hydrate at all. In this respect, they are , including sugar,
useful for clearing cement slurry from contaminated pits/lines , the stack etc. for example.
At temperatures greater than 150°C or 300°F, specialty products based on organic acid
plus sugar derivatives are used and some synthetic retarders.
Generally, retarders should be treated as unpredictable. Particularly in the overlap ranges
between the various types of retarder, testing of the cement samples and water from the rig
is vital.
11.7.3 Dispersants
Dispersants reduce the apparent viscosity of the slurry and allow greater pump rates to be
used for the same pressure drop.
Dispersants are commonly used on deep 9 5/8" casing and liner cementations, where
restricted annular clearance, good bonding (from turbulent flow) and restricted pressure
drop in the annulus are critical considerations.
Compatibility of dispersants with other cement additives has to be checked. For example,
the slurry apparent viscosity can actually be increased whilst using a dispersant with certain
fluid loss additives.
The density and ultimate strength of a cement slurry increases as the water-to-cement ratio
decreases. Dispersants can allow such a reduction of water in a slurry.
11.7.4 Fluid Loss Additives

The action of the fluid loss additive is to reduce water loss from the slurry, thus providing
time for the cement hydration process to occur to its full potential conclusion. The
additives are thought to act a bridging agents between discrete cement particles, causing a
blockage of the pore spaces.
It is generally accepted that a fluid loss of less than 100 ml/30 minutes is a sufficient fluid
loss for most casing cementations. Where highly permeable formations are encountered in
open hole, this may be reduced to 50 ml/30 minutes.
__________________________________________________________________________
The fluid loss of squeeze cement slurries should be governed by the application.
Where an extended slurry is employed, to cement a shallow high porosity zone, the limit of
fluid loss may have to be relaxed to up to 200 ml/30 mins'.
Most of the fluid loss additives are based on high molecular weight organic compounds
which tend to slightly retard the slurry. As with retarders, the compatibility of additives
should be checked.
11.7.5 Density Adjusters

Weight Increasing Additives
Slurry weight is raised either to balance an elevated formation pressure or to ensure the
efficient removal of heavy mud from the annulus. The additives should have the following
characteristics :
• Be as dense as possible
• Require minimum water
• Have no affect on compressive strength
• Have a uniform particle size range
• Be chemically inert
• Not interfere with well logging
The most commonly used agents are Hematite, Ilmenite and Salt. Hematite, at 4.95 S.G.,
can raise the slurry density to 57 kg/m3 or 20 ppg, which compares with 50 kg/m3 or 17.5
ppg maximum with a low water high density cement slurry. The latter high density slurry
would have to be dispersed.
Generally, additives which are used to reduce the weight of a slurry are referred to as
extenders, as they extend the yield of the cement.
Salt is normally only used in high concentration when the slurry requires to be salt
saturated.
The main problems associated with high density slurries are mixing problems.
Slurry Weight Reduction Additives And Extenders
Generally, additives which are used to reduce the weight of a slurry are referred to as
extenders, as they extend the yield of the cement.
Where a particular hole section cannot support the hydrostatic pressure of a column of neat
cement slurry, a light weight slurry which compromises some compressive strength for
reduced weight, is used.
The most common method essentially uses water as an extender, with the extender additive
present to control the amount of free water. Extended slurries can be prone to excessive
gelation. These gels can be so high after a period of pump shut down that the cement
cannot be moved any further, and it appears that the cement has set.
__________________________________________________________________________
The standard consistometer test can be used to approximate a gels reading.
The two major types of extender used (other than the glass bead type etc.) are bentonite
and sodium silicate.
Bentonite Extender
Bentonite can be used successfully either pre-blended with the dry cement or pre-hydrated
in a pit. If the bentonite is to be pre-hydrated in a pit, it is recommended that only sacked
Wyoming bentonite is used. The yield properties of sacked bentonite are greater and more
reliable.
3
A standard pre-blended 37 kg/m or 13 ppg slurry would have 8% BWOC bentonite
Sodium Silicate Extender
The extender reacts with calcium and magnesium in the cement and (if used) sea water to
form a water carrying gel, leaving a minimum amount of free water.
The flow properties of sodium silicate slurries are sometimes less than those of bentonite
slurries. The possibility for high gel strength to develop is particularly high in light weight,
elevated temperature slurries. For example, a 34 kg/m3 or 12 ppg slurry at temperatures
greater than 85°C or 185°C.
The compatibility of sodium silicate extenders and certain lignosulfonate retarders is poor.
Mixing can lead to the development of a high viscosity sludge. If the LAS system adds
both of these chemicals, they must have separate lines to avoid this problem.
11.7.6 Defoamers
Certain additives, particularly retarders and fluid loss additives can cause foaming of the
mix water, leading to poor volumetric control from the displacement tanks, pump suction
problems, mixing tub problems etc. The addition of approximately 0.04 liter/sk or 0.01
gal/sk defoamer controls this problem.
11.7.7 Retrogressive Strength Additives

Class G cement can undergo thermal degradation at temperatures greater than 110°C or
230°F. The degradation results in the loss of compressive strength and an increase in
permeability. The cement may rot and crumble entirely.
Silica flouror (dependent on rheological requirements) increases the temperature stability of
the cement.
11.8Annular Mud Removal During Cementation

Turbulent flow of a slurry, whilst it is placed is in most cases the optimum condition by
which mud is displaced from the annulus by cement. The flow rate necessary to produce
this condition is dependent upon the rheology of the mud (i.e. gels and PV) in the annulus
prior to cementation, the annular clearance and the stand-off of the casing, produced by
the centralizer positioning. Empirical relationships have been produced which specify the
__________________________________________________________________________
minimum displacement rate for a good bond. This information will be available from
Halliburton’s cementing service company.
Other general points are as follows:
• Conditioning of mud prior to a casing run, to reduce gel strength and viscosity, thus
promoting turbulent flow, is vital. YP and gels should not be reduced too much
however, as this may lead to settling of weighting material etc.
• The use of scratchers and the importance of centralization has been noted in the casing
section of this Guideline.
• The minimization of mud contamination of a cement slurry in the annulus is also
improved by the use of spacers/washes. This sort of contamination can lead to :
Acceleration or retardation of the slurry thickening time
An increase in the slurry fluid loss
A reduction in the compressive strength of the set cement
An increased displacement pressure , due to high viscosity and gel strength
Chemical washes are thin, usually water based fluids containing surfactants and mud
thinners, designed to thin and disperse the mud, so that it can be easily removed from the
hole ahead of the cement.
Spacers are fluids with controlled viscosity, weight and gel strength, to act as a buffer
between the cement and the drilling fluid. They can be designed to be effective both in
laminar and turbulent flow regimes.
11.9Liner Cementation
The liner will normally be run with a 2 joint shoe track. The overlap with the previous
casing should be between100 - 400 ft.
Cementation is normally conducted in a single stage, using a single slurry formulation. The
volume of slurry will normally be 20% excess slurry over the caliper open hole annular
volume plus sufficient cement to cover the overlap annular volume
Cement tests are critical on liner jobs, and a minimum of 2 tests should be conducted. The
tests will include thickening time, gels, free water, fluid loss and compressive strength at
the reservoir depth/temperature and the liner top depth/temperature.
After setting the liner hanger, release the liner running tool prior to the cement job, as per
the appropriate tool procedure. Set down the required weight on the liner, dependent upon
the liner type and cementing seal mechanism.
Circulate 120 % times bottoms-up at a rate which does not exceed the maximum annular
velocity whilst drilling (without losses). Monitor returns for losses. The liner should be
rotated at this point (if applicable), and rotation should commence prior to circulation to
assist in breaking gels, particularly if losses are likely. If losses occur, establish a no loss
rate.
__________________________________________________________________________
Continue to rotate the string while cementing, and until the cement is in place.
Pump the pre-flush (chemical wash). Note that any reduction in hydrostatic head due to the
height of chemical wash in an 'in gauge' hole should have been checked with respect to the
pore pressure in the open hole interval. A scavenger slurry may be used.
Mix cement slurry. Liner slurries should be batch mixed to ensure accurate additive dosage,
homogeneity and density. A pressurized mud balance should be used to check the slurry
weight.
While cementing, observe the string weight. If the string weight drops due to hydraulicing,
set down more weight on the liner.
After pumping the slurry, release the drill pipe pump down displacement plug. If there is
any doubt about whether the plug has launched or not, close the kelly cock and open the
plug dropping head to check for launch.
Displace the slurry with the cement pump. Have the rig pumps ready to take over
displacement if necessary. Do not slow down the pump prior to the pump down plug
reaching the liner wiper plug. The displacement rate is normally +/- 1600 liters/min or +/-
423 gpm for a 7" liner in 8 1/2" hole, but this will be confirmed in the finalized program. If
the flow rate achieved without loss is significantly less than that advised by the program,
consult with the Drilling IS Coordinator at the operations base.
Continue displacing cement until the plugs bump the landing collar. Do not significantly
reduce displacement rate prior to bumping plug (e.g. not less than 800 liters/min or 5
bbl/min). Pressure test the liner after bumping of the is achieved.
If plug bump does not occur, do not over displace by more than 50% of the shoe joint
volume calculated at 100% efficiency.
Bleed off pressure, measure returns. If the floats do not hold, pressure up and re-bump the
plugs if possible. If this does not work, POH immediately to above the expected TOC. Pull
back above the TOC. Consideration should be given to circulating to clear the string of
cement. A second DP wiper plug may be used to wipe cement out of the DP on this
circulation. Note that if the well is deviated significantly, consideration should be given to
rotating the string, provided there is no risk of backing off the running string. Monitor
returns for cement contamination.
If surface samples appear to be setting at any point during the period after cementation is
completed, pull out to above TOC and circulate as previously mentioned.
If severe losses are noted, do not pull out until the cement is set. Note that if an integral
packer is installed in the liner string, consideration should be given as to whether it should
be set or not, if back flow occurred from the float equipment, or if losses are occurring..
When the running string is pulled free, note the height of back flow on the running string,
which will give an indication of the height of cement above the liner top.
The following calculations are to be completed prior to the cement job, and referenced
during the job :
__________________________________________________________________________
• Weight of liner prior to hang off
• Minimum volume to circulate prior to cementing
• Pre flush additive requirements
• Gauge hole hydrostatic pressure reduction due to pre-lush, if applicable
• Volume of pre-flush
• Volume of slurry (using caliper).
• Cement, water and additive requirements for slurry
• Capacity of cement line
• Displacement volume to land pump down plug in liner wiper plug. This volume should
use a measured (calipered) DP I.D., and allowance should be made for internal upset.
• Displacement volume when the cement first leaves the liner shoe.
• Displacement volume to land wiper plug on landing collar.
• Displacement volume when cement arrives at previous shoe.
• Displacement volume when cement arrives at liner hanger.
• Maximum possible returns from the cement job and maximum volume required to catch
up with U-tubed cement.
• Hydrostatic pressure at previous casing shoe, compared to leak-off.
• Maximum slurry height above liner hanger, assuming gauge hole and no channelling.
• Theoretical differential pressure prior to plug bump
• Theoretical differential pressure when running tool pulled out of the hanger, with all
excess cement in casing.
• Maximum allowable circulating and displacement rates to stay within acceptable ECD.
i.e. the recognized leak-off limit.
Other points of interest include:
The laboratory thickening times are only a guide, and if significant circulation stoppages
occur after the cement is mixed, this will reduce the thickening time, as well as cause
possible problems due to gelation.
Where high hole inclination or other factors make manipulation of the liner setting string
difficult, due to high drag/torque etc., it may not be necessary to release the liner running
tool. Very few cases of liner failure due to release mechanism failure have been recorded,
but the potential for failure due to improper cementation is greater.
11.10Plug Cementation
11.10.1Cementing Equipment
• Use a slim tubing stinger (2 3/8" or 2 7/8" tubing for 8 1/2" and smaller hole, 3 1/2"
tubing for larger holes ) of adequate length to allow a minimum 30 m or 100 ft from
__________________________________________________________________________
the TOC plug to the top of the stinger when the cement is in place. A 180 m or 600 ft
stinger is normally used.
• The bottom of the stinger should normally be equipped with a 45 degree angled cut,
with a flat bottom preparation to allow ease of access into the well, and prevent
hanging up. A diverter sub shoe assembly may also be considered. A minimum of 8 x
3/4" diameter holes in the bottom 0.6 m or 2 ft of the joint above the diverter sub
should be present.
• A latch down indicator sub in the assembly can be used to achieve accurate
displacement of the cement.
11.10.2 Cement Plug Job Procedure

• M/U diverter sub and stinger. RIH on DP to 120 m or 400 ft below cement plug
setting depth.
• Spot the calculated volume of viscous pill, sufficient to ocver approximately 105m or
350 ft of hole.
- A viscous pill (as viscous as practically possible, with 10 second gels at greater than
50 lb/100 ft2) should be pumped prior to setting cement pills in all wells, whether
vertical or deviated. The vertical height should be calculated to be at least 2/3rds
that of the cement plug.
After setting the viscous pill, POH to 15 m or 50 ft above where the viscous pill
top is expected and circulate bottoms up to condition mud, using maximum
permissible pump rate and rotation/reciprocation to break gels. Note that the
vertical in-gauge hole hydrostatic pressure reduction (if applicable) should be
considered with respect to the pore pressure, to ensure that over balance will be
maintained.
• Pump the required volume of water or other spacer (consider hydrostatic pressure as
above). 320 - 480 liters or 20 - 30 bbl of spacer is normally sufficient. Note that
surfactants will be required if OBM is in use.
• Pump the required volume of cement.
• Pump sufficient spacer behind to balance the pre-flush, and displace with mud. Do Not
reciprocate the string whilst displacing cement. If a plug indicator sub is in the string,
displace until pressure indicates bump. Otherwise displace to balance.
• Pull out of the plug to above the TOC and circulate/reverse circulate the pipe clean.
Note: Do not reverse circulate at any time in an open hole.
11.10.3 Standard Practices When Setting Cement Plugs

• The most accurate method of hole volume determination in open hole is the caliper log.
The 4 arm caliper is more accurate, and thus preferred to the 2 arm caliper.
• The minimum thickening time should be job time plus 1 - 2 hours safety margin
__________________________________________________________________________
• If an indicator sub is not used in the string, a slight under displacement of the slurry is
desired. About 160 liters or 1 bbl is adequate.
• Always use a pressurized mud balance when setting high density plugs
• Gauge hole sections are preferred for setting cement plugs, if a choice is available. If no
choice exists, consideration should be given to setting 2 plugs rather than one large
slurry volume plug in out of gauge (large diameter) hole sections.
• When setting cement plugs in loss zones, it may be preferable to set 2 plugs. A first
smaller plug can be set to act as a foundation for the second larger plug. Consideration
should be given to using Thixotropic cement.
• When setting a cement plug across perforations, allow a minimum of 60 m or 200 ft of
cement above the top perforations if possible, and 30 or 100 ft below the bottom
perforations. An excess of 15% could be considered.
• Avoid setting planned cement plugs in 12 1/4" and 8 1/2" hole with 5" DP. Use a
tubing stinger.
• Plugs should not normally exceed 150 m or 500 ft in length, measured along hole.
• Always calculate the loss of hydrostatic head if unweighted spacers are to be employed.
Use gauge hole for the calculated height of the spacers in the DP/OH annulus.
• Use the largest practical spacer volume when setting cement plugs in muds high in
lignosulfonate muds Pump sufficient spacer for 10 min. of contact time consisting of,
for example gel mud with barite to the normal mud weight without other additives.
When pulling out of the plug, after setting at the required depth, the slower the pipe is
pulled out of the plug the less contamination of the cement slurry by the annular mud is
experienced.
• Always use spacers ahead and behind the cement slurry. The minimum volume required
is that which gives 30 m or 100 ft along hole feet in the tubing/hole annulus and in the
tubing, when the stinger has been pulled up to the TOC.
• All plugs should be spotted according to local regulations.
11.11Squeeze Cementing
Squeeze cement jobs are required for remedial repair of primary cement jobs, specific zonal
isolation or to abandon perforated reservoir sections. A circulation squeeze operation is
another option, which may involve perforating the casing at one or more points, until
circulation is established.
11.11.1 Standard Practices For Squeeze Cementation

• Squeeze cementing in cased hole is most effectively accomplished through a drillable
cement retainer, although a bradenhead squeeze may be acceptable at shallower depths
• The squeeze slurry should have a fluid loss of less than 50 ml/30 mins but can vary to
accomodate site-specific circumstances. This will help prevent premature de-hydration
__________________________________________________________________________
of the slurry and thus provide better control in directing the placement of cement into
the voids or channels behind the casing.
• The cement thickening time should be adequate to perform a hesitation squeeze. The
squeeze pressures should normally not exceed 85% of the fracture pressure gradient of
the relevant formation.
• An injection rate should be established with solids free fluid, rather than mud, if
possible.
• If a bradenhead squeeze is to be performed, the upward force generated by the
wellbore pressure should be calculated. This will confirm if the string weight and
annular closing pressure are adequate to overcome the upward force. At shallow
depths, it may be necessary to lock the string into the stack by closing a pipe ram and
stripping a tool joint up under the ram. Regardless of the method adopted, all
reasonable precautions should be taken to secure the string and surface pipe work
attached to it, in case the string is launched.
• General mechanical comments on squeeze cementing :
◊ Provided that the formation does not fracture, only cement filtrate, not whole
cement, enters the pore spaces.
◊ Only a small interval of the perforations is likely to be receptive to the slurry
• When a packer is used, ensure that the bottom hole pressure does not exceed 85% of
the collapse pressure of the casing. The packer may have to be re-positioned or annular
pressure applied above the packer, between the work string and the casing.
• Squeezed off perforations should ideally be inflow tested after sufficient time has been
allowed for the cement to cure and after the casing has been cleaned out.
11.11.2 Squeeze Procedure With Cement Retainer

• Identify the perforation interval required from a CBL/VDL/CCL or CET etc.
• Run a bit and scraper if a cement retainer is to be set.
• Set a viscous pill below the perforation interval. A drillable bridge plug or some other
form of retrievable plug may be preferred, particularly if the well is deviated.
• Perforate the required interval
• Set a cement retainer approximately 6 m or 20 ft above the perforated interval. Ensure
that the slips are at least 1.5 m or 5 ft way from the nearest casing connection.
• Stab into the cement retainer and establish injectivity using water. Acidization may be
considered if relevant and necessary.
• Pump cement slurry with spacers ahead and behind. Squeeze cement, leaving 15 m or
50 ft of cement in the drill pipe above the retainer.
• Pull up above the retainer and allow the cement in the DP to equalize. Reverse or
circulate conventionally to clear the DP.
__________________________________________________________________________
11.11.3 Squeeze Procedure With Retrievable Packer
• Identify the perforation interval required from a CBL/VDL/CCL or CET etc.
• Run a bit and scraper over perforations and packer setting intervals
• Set a drillable bridge plug or cement plug +/- 3 m or 10 ft below the perforated
interval to be squeezed off either : a] communication exists with the formation below,
or b] hole angle exceeds 30 degrees at the perforation being squeezed
• Perforate if required
• Run squeeze packer. If a drillable bridge plug or cement plug has not been set, spot a
60 m or 200 ft viscous pill (weighted as close to the cement weight as possible)
immediately below the perforations.
• Consider circulating well to freshwater, or brine to prevent cement contamination.
• Set squeeze packer above top perforations. Carry out an injectivity test using water.
• With the circulating sub open, pump cement with spacers ahead and behind cement.
Displace cement until front of spacer hits circulation sub.
• Squeeze cement into perforations at constant bottom hole pressure.
• Unset squeeze packer, pull back a safe distance above perforations and reverse
circulate pipe clean.
• Set packer. Reapply final bottom hole pressure and hold until surface samples are hard.
• Unseat packer. POH.
__________________________________________________________________________
12.0 BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES
12.1 General
12.2 Bottom Hole Assembly Components
12.2.1 Drill Collars
12.2.2 Stabilizers
12.2.3 Non-Magnetic Tools
12.2.3.1 Non-Magnetic Drill Collars
12.2.3.2 Non-Magnetic Stabilizers
12.2.4 Mud Motors
12.2.5 MWD Tools
12.2.6 Roller Reamers
12.2.7 Underreamers
12.2.8 Hole Openers
12.2.9 Shock Subs
12.2.10 Drilling Jars
12.2.10.1 Mechanical Jars
12.2.10.2 Hydraulic Jars
12.2.10.3 Hydromechanical Jars
12.2.10.4 Jar Placement
12.2.10.5 Jars Run in Tension
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 12 Bottomhole Assemblies
12.2.10.6 Jars Run in Compression
12.2.11 Additional Tools (Crossovers, subs)
12.2.11.1 Float Valves
12.2.11.2 Saver Subs and Crossover Subs
__________________________________________________________________________
Bottomhole Assemblies Page 2 of 12 August 1995
12.1 General
The objectives of the bottom hole assembly (BHA) are to:
Effectively load the bitand improve overall bit performance

Provide stiffness to prevent doglegs and keyseats
Prevent drill pipe buckling under compression
Produce a smooth, full gauge hole.
Minimize harmful vibrations
Minimize hole problems
Minimize differential pressure sticking
A proper BHA is made up of various components that can effectively accomplish the above
objectives. It is good practice to keep the BHA length to a minimum. This action will result
in reduced drilling torque, drag and circulating pressures. This section will detail these
various components that can be used in the BHA.
12.2 Bottom Hole Assembly Components
12.2.1 Drill Collars

Drill collars are required to provide weight on bit and to maintain the drill pipe in tension.
In practice, 85% of the buoyant weight of drill collars (giving a safety factor of 1.15) is
used as weight on bit, to ensure that the drill pipe is kept in tension. This practice also
places the neutral point (point of zero tension and compression) in the drill collars.
Drill collar technical data can be obtained from many sources including Drilco's Drilling
Assembly Handbook. The required weight on bit together with stabilization will determine
the number and size of drill collars to be run.
Spiral drill collars can be used to reduce the risk of differentially stuck pipe. The spiral
collar has a reduced contact area. The differential sticking force is thus reduced. The
weight of the spiral drill collar is reduced by approximately 4% after machining.
Drill collars should be placed in the BHA in such a way as to produce a tapered string to
limit the ratio of stiffness between larger and smaller drill collar diameters and that of heavy
weight drill pipe. This limits the bending stresses produced in the weaker member and
prevents fatigue damage from occurring.
The Drilling Program should detail the number of drill collars required for a specific hole
interval. However, the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor may have to modify this basic
design when conditions dictate so.
12.2.2 Stabilizers
Welded Blade Stablizer (WB)
__________________________________________________________________________
The conventional 3-blade welded stabilizer which allows full circulation in the annulus and
the shape of the blades enables efficient reaming. These stabilizers should be run in medium
formations as they only provide a low wall contact area and tend to enlarge the hole in
softer formations. They can be easily repaired and are relatively inexpensive. They should
not be used in areas of anticipated high torque (i.e. gravel/boulders).
Integral Blade Stabilizer (IBS)
Integral blade stabilizers are formed from one piece of steel rolled and machined to provide
the blades. Since they are one piece, replacing worn blades is more expensive than the
repair of WB stabilizers. IBS's can have the leading edge rounded off to reduce wall
damage, and provide a greater area of contact for use in softer formations. Tungsten
carbide inserts can be machined into the blades to extend gauge life. Full wall contact and
broad stabilizer blades, together with tungsten carbide inserts bonded to the blades, enables
good stabilization in easily damaged formations together with resistance to abrasive
formations.
Sleeve Type Stabilizers
Sleeve type stabilizers are available in two designs, both providing the advantage of low
cost replacement of worn blades together with the ability to run a range of diameter sleeves
on a particular body size. The blades on both types can have tungsten carbide inserts,
hardfacing or plain with various amounts of wall contact. One type consists of a stabilizer
body onto which the sleeve is screwed and made up with tongs. The other type requires the
sleeve to be screwed onto a mandrel and made up by hand. The saver sub is then screwed
onto the mandrel and made up with tongs. With the first type, no fluid seal exists between
the stabilizer sleeve and body and in this case only, a nominal make-up torque is required.
With the second type, the mandrel type, fluid seals are made between the saver sub and
sleeve and between sleeve and mandrel. In this case, a higher make-up torque is required.
Non-Rotating Type Stabilizers
Non-rotating or rubber stabilizers allow the drill collars to be supported without
mechanical damage to the wellbore. They can also be used in abrasive formation drilling.
As the sleeve is not rotating, blade wear is minimized. They are normally positioned at the
top end of the stabilized section. Generally they should not be used in wells with
temperatures exceeding 110 degrees C or 230 degrees F. They should be used when
cutting and retrieving casing.
12.2.3 Non-Magnetic Tools
12.2.3.1Non-Magnetic Drill Collars

Non-magnetic drill collars (NMDC) are necessary to prevent magnetic interference during
surveys as well as for furnishing approporiate weight for the string. The following
recommendations should be followed for the collection of accurate survey data:
If possible,minimum of 18 m or 60 ft of NMDC's should be run for all survey tools.

__________________________________________________________________________
When running magnetic single shot instruments, position the compass of the instrument
approximately 8 m or 25 ft above the bottom of the lower NMDC.
When running magnetic multishot instruments, take this survey in 27 m or 90 ft, (3
joints), of uninterrupted NMDC if possible. Space instruments 8 m or 25 ft inside the
bottom NMDC and the other 2.5 m or 8 ft above the lower end of the middle NMDC.
12.2.3.2 Non-Magnetic Stabilizers

Non-magnetic stabilizers should be run when they are required to be placed within the zone
of magnetic interference for the particular survey instrument being used.
12.2.4 Mud Motors

The positive displacement motor (PDM) may be used for directional drilling, sidetracking,
straight hole drilling or, under certain conditions, to maintain or improve penetration rates
while correcting or controlling hole deviation. The use of a PDM also reduces wear on drill
pipe, drill collars and casing.
A bent sub can be positioned on top of the motor and forces the assembly to drill at a pre-
determined angle. An alternative to the PDM is the steerable system where the “bend” is
incorporated into the motor housing closer to the bit which permits build rates from 2 to
5o per 30 m or 100 ft. In conjunction with an MWD tool, the steerable assembly can kick-
off, build angle, drop angle, hold angle and make corrections in direction and azimuth
without changing out the assembly.
As mud cannot readily pass through the motor, the by-pass valve on top of the tool allows
the mud to by-pass the motor to fill the drill pipe and it also allows the mud to drain when
pulling out or making a connection. This valve automatically closes as soon as the pumps
are engaged.
PDM's operate over a wide range of speeds which are varied by adjusting the pump rate.
As mud is pumped through the tool off bottom, the pressure across it is constant if the
volume remains constant. As the bit is placed on bottom, the standpipe pressure increases.
This increase is directly proportional to the additional weight on bit or torque at the bit and
is known as the pressure loss or pressure drop across the motor.
The following procedures should be followed when running a PDM:
• Test the PDM at the surface following instructions of mud motor service company
hand.
• A maximum downhole temperature limitation for the standard PDM is approximately
130 degrees C or 265 degrees F.
• Exercise care when running assembly past BOP, wellhead, casing shoe, liner hanger,
etc.
• Prior to drilling ahead, record on and off bottom pump pressures.
• Record stall-out pressure of PDM and drill ahead.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Maintain flow rate and pump pressure at a steady level.

• Rotate drill string slowly to prevent differential sticking.
12.2.5 MWD Tools

Measurement-while-drilling (MWD) tools can provide directional, formation evaluation
and downhole drilling data during the course of the drilling opration. If an MWD tool is
run, all operational guidelines and procedures contained in the vendors operating manual
should be consulted. However, the following general practices should be considered:
• Crossover subs are to be avoided, if possible. Check drilling contractor's drill collar
connections before shipping MWD tool to the well site.
• MWD collar sizes should be close to the rig's drill collar size.
• Position the MWD as close to the bit as possible.
• If a PDM is being run for a steerable drilling run, kicking-off or a correction run, then
the MWD collar must be run above the motor and properly spaced out with non-
magnetic drill collars.
• Always run a pressure relief or circulating sub.
• Maintain sand content in mud to < 1%.
• A drill pipe filter should be run at all times.
12.2.6 Roller Reamers

Reaming operations become necessary when the gauge of the hole is reduced for any
number of reasons. Roller reamers are fitted with a set of removable cutters which may be
required to simply centralize the drilling assembly in the hole and reduce bit walk in the
case of a smooth roller, centralize and cut formation from the side wall of the hole with
other types of rollers. The formation type will determine the cutter to be used.
There are 3-point and 6-point string and near bit reamers. Some models may be run upside
down as a near bit reamer by reversing the cutters and pins. Roller reamers may be used to
ream out doglegs or keyseats and they may be used to reduce spiraling while maintaining
full gauge hole. They should not be run together with “long life” bits to avoid damaging
the reamer and leaving junk in the hole.
12.2.7 Underreamers
Underreamers consist of a set of cutters mounted on retractable arms on a tool body. This
enables a tool to be run through a smaller diameter hole and commence drilling a larger
hole at the required depth. The arms are actuated by circulation and are closed by ceasing
to circulate.
__________________________________________________________________________
12.2.8 Hole Openers

A hole opener consists of a set of cutters mounted on a tool body. The hole opener may be
used when :
Shallow gas possibilities require a smaller hole being drilled to prevent influx of large
quantities of gas. If no gas is present, then the hole can be opened to the required size
with a hole opener.
Better directional control is required.
To prevent overloading of the annulus through a reduction in the volume of cuttings
drilled in the pilot hole..
The cutters may be changed to suit the formation’s drillability. Care must be exercised
when opening pilot holes in soft formations or when running a rock bit ahead of the hole
opener. There is the possibility of sidetracking the well in soft formations. In these cases, a
2-2.5 m/ 6-8 ft bullnose is usually run and strapped below the hole opener.
12.2.9 Shock Subs

Shock subs should be used when drilling hard formations to absorb vibrations and harsh
shock loads. In shallow wells, drilling parameters may have to be sacrificed due to severe
kelly bouncing. This can be alleviated by running a shock sub directly above the bit.
Depending on the tool design some shock tools provide torsional shock absorption. These
tools house either a large helical spring or rubber bushing which transmits the weight and
torque to the bit. These tools can normally be identified by the dog clutch at the bottom
end. Tools that do not absorb torsional shocks transmit torque to the bit via a spline
mandrel. These tools absorb axial shock load only and generally do this through sprung
steel washers or rings.
12.2.10 Drilling Jars

Drilling jars are designed to transmit drilling torque and when required, deliver either an
upward or downward impact to free stuck pipe. The jar must always be considered in the
BHA whenever hole problems/tight hole conditions are anticipated. The jars must have the
same O.D. of the drill collars.
There are two main types of jars; mechanical and hydraulic. There is also a
hydromechanical jar that has a hydraulic up jar section and a mechanical down jar section.
12.2.10.1 Mechanical Jars

There are 2 types of mechanical jars, surface set jars and downhole set jars.
Surface Set Jars
This jar uses a mechanical action to produce a hitting force that may not be altered once
the tool is downhole. The jar operates on a straight push-pull principle. Up and down
tripping loads may be adjusted independently from 0 to 88 tons 0 to 176,000 lbs at the
__________________________________________________________________________
well site. The jar may be tripped while circulating through the bit. However, circulation
will exert an extending force on the jar that, in effect, reduces the pull required to trip-up
and increases the slack-off weight required to trip down.
This jar is normally run in tension but may also be run in compression under certain
conditions. Torquing or rotating the drill pipe will not affect the tripping load.
Downhole Set Jars
This jar uses a mechanical action to produce a hitting force that may be adjusted while the
tool is downhole by simply rotating or torquing the drillstring. The hitting force is directly
related to the load required to trip the jar. This jar also operates on a straight push-pull
basis. To make the jarring force harder, right hand torque is applied to the drillstring. Left
hand torque will allow the jar to trip at lighter loads and impact with a reduced force.
Torque should be applied in small increments until the desired effect is obtained, usually at
1/2 turn at a time. In highly deviated wells with high torque/drag. there may be a problem
transmitting the torque downhole. The jar design is such that the downward tripping load is
always 60% less than the upward tripping load. This jar trips and impacts as soon as the
tripping force is pulled. There is no delayed action time between cocking and tripping.
12.2.10.2 Hydraulic Jars

Hydraulic jar blow intensity is determined by the magnitude of the pull or push exerted on
the string. No torque is required. To increase the up-jarring force, pull more weight. To
increase the down-jarring force, slack off more weight. There is a waiting time between
cocking and tripping from approximately 1 1/2 to 2 1/2 minutes. The waiting time is
reduced once the jars heat up.
12.2.10.3 Hydromechanical Jars

Hydromechanical jars consist of two sections, the up-jar and the down-jar sections,
connected by a tool joint. The up-jar operates hydraulically and is capable of striking blows
of variable intensity, which are obtained by changing the speed of the upward pull by the
drawworks. The down-jar has a mechanical trip that is set at a pre-determined downward
jarring intensity. These jars may be broken apart and positioned separately in the drillstring
if desired to eliminate stiffness caused by the 9 m or 30 ft tool.
12.2.10.4 Jar Placement

The neutral point, the point of zero compression and zero tension, rapidly changes during
drilling operations. This is due to vibration from the bit in the drill string. The life of the
drilling jar can be reduced significantly if subjected to these varying tensile and compressive
loads. Therefore it is advisable to position the jars outside this zone of varying stresses
including a safety factor of 4,400 to 11,000 lbs to ensure the jar is constantly run either in
compression or tension. The safest way to run jars from the point of view of preventing
accidental jarring is in tension.
__________________________________________________________________________
Drill collars and/or heavy weight drill pipe (HWDP) are placed above the jar to provide the
jarring force. The number of drill collars positioned above the jar is restricted by the
individual tool design and should be noted. The jar should be positioned above the
components in the BHA considered potential sticking points, namely above the stabilizers
and drill collars. If drill collars are used above the jars, they should not exceed the outside
diameter of the jars.
An important factor in jar placement is that when overpull is applied in a deviated hole in
order to jar upwards, a straight pull at surface is not transmitted directly to the jar but is
absorbed by drag against the hole wall. Therefore, overpull must be worked down to the
jar or an excess equivalent to the drag force must be applied at surface. Because of drag in
deviated holes, the tripping force is sometimes set lower for deviated holes than for vertical
wells.
An example of a calculation for activating, (tripping) a 6" Dailey Jar:
Up-stroke setting = 70,400 lbs
Down-stroke setting = 28,600 lbs
Up-stroke calculation
Jars set at 70,400 lbs
Wt. below jar 50,600 lbs
Difference 19,800 lbs
String weight 180,400 lbs
Therefore, jars trip at 200,200 lbs
If hole drag is 19,800 lbs
Jars trip at (up-stroke) 220,000 lbs
The jar intensity can be increased by applying torque to the drill string. Every 1/4 turn to
the right increases the jarring up force by 8,800 to 15,400 lbs.
Down-stroke calculation
Jars set at 28,600 lbs
Wt. below jar 50,600 lbs
Sum 79,200 lbs
String weight 180,400 lbs
Jars trip at (down-stroke) 101,200 lbs
When drilling deviated wells and HWDP is used for additional weight on bit, the same
principles apply for the jar as in straight holes, (e.g. always run the jar in tension, if
possible). Generally, run 2 stands of HWDP above the jar and at least 2 stands of HWDP
__________________________________________________________________________
below the jar in addition to the amount of HWDP required to give the additional weight on
bit. Do not run any stabilizers above the jar, unless keyseating is a problem. Stabilizers
below the jar should be at least 3 joints of HWDP deeper than the jar.
When making up the jar, follow these guidelines:
Always use a back-up tong on the lower end of the top sub, which extends above
the polished stem.
Unlock the rotary when applying torque to the upper connection.
12.2.10.5 Jars Run In Tension

In most assemblies the jar is run in tension. The weight of the drill collars required below
the jars is calculated from the following equation:
Drill collar wt. in air = Bit wt. required + safety factor
(below jar) Buoyancy factor * Cos hole angle
Example:
Max WOB required = 44,000 lbs
Safety factor in tension = 11,000 lbs
Hole angle = 29o
Mud weight = 10 ppg
Buoyancy factor = 0.847
Drillcollar wt.(below jar) in air= (44,000 + 11,000)
0.847 * Cos 29°
= 74,200 lbs
12.2.10.6 Jars Run In Compression

If the jar is run in compression, careful consideration of the jar design should be made to
minimize that the risk of accidental jarring down while the bit is on bottom. The down trip
setting should be sufficiently high so that should pump pressure be suddenly lost, (due to a
pop off blowing for example), losing the extending force acting on the jar, the jar will not
jar down due to any shock load from the bit.
The jar should be placed in the BHA without the flex joint and run with a safety factor of 5
tons or 11,000 lbs in compression. Pump pressure must be maintained at all times while the
bit is on bottom, as this produces an extending force equal to the seal area of the jar
multiplied by the pressure losses in the system, below the jar. The tripping required to jar
down while circulating, is the down tripping load plus the extending force. The tripping
load required should the pumps go off is only the down tripping load minus 11,000 lbs.
Drill collar wt. in air = Bit wt. required
__________________________________________________________________________
(below jar) Buoyancy factor * Cos hole angle

Example:
Max WOB required = 44,000 lbs
Safety factor in tension = 11,000 lbs
Hole angle = 29o
Mud weight = 10 ppg
Buoyancy factor = 0.847
Drill collar wt. (below jar) in ai = 44,000
(0.847 * Cos 29)
= 59,400 lbs
Drill collar wt. in air = 11,000
(jars in 5 tons or 10,00 lb ton compression) (0.847 * Cos 29)
= 14,740 lbs
Jar placement therefore requires 7 tons or 14,740 lbs of drill collars above the jar and 22
tons or 44,660 lbs of drill collars below the jar.
The problem with running jars in compression is that the life of the jar may be reduced
significantly when the jar is subjected to varying stress profiles from changing weight on
bit. It is recommended that jars always be run in tension unless the jar manufacturer
recommends differently.
12.2.11 Additional Tools
12.2.11.1 Float Valve

Float valves are subs that are designed to prevent the backflow of mud into the drill string.
The poppet type will close whenever there is back flow into the drill string. If required, the
flapper type may be held open by the spring loaded valve cap and latching it open with the
catch. The valve will then permit mud to enter the drill string while tripping in and as soon
as pumping begins the catch will drop allowing the valve to close when the pumps are
stopped, preventing backflow. These valves are useful when drilling upper intervals of the
well where penetration rates are high and the annulus is overloading with cuttings. The
valve is also useful when drilling with a mud motor and/or MWD tool. Their position is
usually in the bit sub thereby not restricting the passage of survey instruments.
12.2.11.2 Saver Subs and Crossover Subs

Saver Subs
__________________________________________________________________________
Saver subs are used to prevent damage during make-up and break out of expensive pieces
of equipment such as MWD collars. They are normally considered an integral part of the
tool and may be any type of connection.
__________________________________________________________________________
13.0 DRILLSTRING DESIGN AND HANDLING
13.1 Drillstring Design
13.1.1 Objectives and Requirements
13.1.2 Buoyancy
13.1.3 Tension
13.1.4 Collapse
13.1.5 Torsion
13.1.6 Drillstring Stiffness Ratio
13.1.7 Bending Strength Ratio
13.1.8 Fatigue
13.1.9 Critical Rotary Speeds
13.1.10 Drill Pipe to Drill Collar Interface
13.1.11 Tool Joint Specification - Hardbanding
13.2 Wear, Care and Handling of Tubulars
13.2.1 Make-up
13.2.2 General Rules of Care - Drill Pipe
13.2.3 Breaking in New Pipe
13.2.4 Drill Pipe Protectors
13.2.5 General Rules of Care - Drill Collars
13.2.6 Incorrect Torque
___________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 10 Drillstring Design and Handling
13.1 Drillstring Design
13.1.1 Objectives and Requirements

The objectives of good drillstring design is to determine the optimum lengths, weights and
grade of drill pipe which can be used during drilling, coring or any other operation.
Avoidance of abrupt changes in the cross-sectional area between components should be
practiced. Drillstring design depends on the following factors:
Hole depth, size and geometry

Casing size
Mud weight
Desired safety factor in tension and/or margin of overpull
Length and weight of drill collars
Desired drill pipe sizes and class (new, premium or used)
Good drillstring design is important since drill bits are designed to last longer and therefore
the drill string is subjected to longer rotating hours between make-up and normal trip
inspection. Furthermore, deeper wells require a closer look at tensile, torsional and collapse
loads.
13.1.2 Buoyancy
Buoyancy is the upward force on drill pipe equivalent to the weight of fluid displaced. The
weight of drill pipe in mud can be obtained by multiplying the weight in air by a buoyancy
factor. The buoyancy factor can be obtained either from tables or from the following
calculation:
Kb = 1 - (MW/rho)
Where,
Kb = Buoyancy factor
MW = Mud weight (lb/ft3 or 16/gal.)
3
rho = Density of the steel (490 lb/ft or 65.5 lb/gal)
The buoyancy factor decreases as the mud weight increases. The weight of the string in air
multiplied by the buoyancy factor gives the hook load at surface.
Buoyancy is also equal to the hydrostatic pressure multiplied by the cross section area
exposed. Buoyancy exerts a compressive load on bottom and tensile load on top of the
drill collars and a compressive load at the changeover from light weight to heavier weight
drill pipe. The buoyancy at each point is the hydrostatic pressure times the area exposed.
The buoyant force on bottom places the bottom of the drill string in compression. No
buckling occurs. If the pipe tends to buckle, the arc on the convex side of the bend is
longer than the arc on the concave side. The same pressure is acting on each side so the
larger force on the convex side straightens the pipe and prevents buckling.
____________________________________________________________________________
Drillstring Design and Handling Page 2 of 10 August 1995
13.1.3 Tension
Tension design is a function of the following parameters:
Hole depth
Mud weight
Margin of overpull (MOP) and/or safety factor (SF)
Drill collar weight
The tension load on the top joint of drill pipe is the submerged weight of the drill string,
drill collars, stabilizers and bit. The stabilizers and bit are either neglected or included with
the drill collar weight. The formula for calculating tension load is:
P = [(Ldp * Wdp) + (Lc * Wc)] * Kb
Where,
P = Submerged load in Newtons
Ldp = Length in meters of drill pipe
Lc = Length in meters of drill collars
Wdp = Weight per meter of drill pipe in air
Wc = Weight per meter of drill collars in air
Kb = Buoyancy factor for steel
The maximum tension load, (minimum yield strength), for any size, weight and grade of
drill pipe is shown in API RP7G. The maximum allowable load is usually taken as 90% of
this value. Most operators usually add their own further safety and use 85% of the figure
quoted in API RP7G.
The maximum allowable load applied to the drillstring, (if utilizing 90% of tensile body
yield strength), will be:
Pa = Pt * 0.9
Where,
Pa = Maximum allowable tension load (tons)
Pt = Tensile body yield strength (from API RP7G catalog)
The margin of overpull, (MOP), is the difference between the calculated load, P, and the
maximum allowable load, Pa:
MOP = Pa - P = (Pt * 0.9) - P
The safety factor, (SF), is a ratio of the maximum allowable load to the calculated load:
S.F. = Pa/P = (Pt * 0.9)/P
___________________________________________________________________________
The selection of the proper safety factor and/or margin of overpull is very important. These
values vary with the type of hole drilled. Historically, a MOP of 100,000 lbs is used to
design drill strings for critical wells, either deep or directional. It should be emphasized that
the safety factor and margin of overpull used in designing the drill string for a well must be
based on the following:
• Local historical practices

• Anticipated well conditions
• Historical presence or lack of drilling problems in the area.
• Condition of drill string and components being employed.
The maximum length of a specific size, grade and class of drill pipe is calculated using the
following equation:
Ldp = [(Pa)/(S.F. * Wdp * Kb)] - (Wc * Lc)/Wdp
The nomenclature is as per the previous equations.
Further calculations can be performed utilizing the above equations to design a tapered
string. In a tapered string the pipe having the smallest capacity is placed just above the drill
collars. The maximum length is based on the above equations. The next stronger pipe is
placed next in the string and the Wc*Lc term is replaced by a term representing the weight
in air of the lower drill pipe as well as the drill collars. The maximum length of the next
stronger pipe is then calculated.
13.1.4 Collapse
Collapse load occurs when the external pressure exceeds the internal pressure. In normal
drilling operations, (excluding DST, or unloading hole prior to air drilling), pipe collapse
can occur when running a float in the BHA and not filling the drill pipe while running in. If
the drill pipe is empty, the collapse pressure is the hydrostatic pressure of the mud in the
annulus. If the drill pipe is partly full of fluid, the collapse pressure is the difference
between the external and internal pressure.
The maximum collapse pressure usually occurs at the bottom of the string where tension
loads are the least. During biaxial loading, the drill pipe stretches and its collapse resistance
decreases. However, the biaxial loading conditions can usually be ignored in drill string
design without any appreciable effect on the results, except when drill stem testing with
heavy anchor loads occur below the packer.
13.1.5 Torsion
The torsion strength of drill pipe becomes critical when:
• Drilling deviated wells
• Drilling deep wells
• Reaming
• Fishing/stuck pipe
____________________________________________________________________________
• Drilling small diameter holes
The torque applied to the drill string should not exceed the actual tool joint make-up
torque. Joint strength is usually calculated based on 80% remaining wall thickness (Class 2)
and minimum yield strength. The joint strength of all the weights and grades of pipe are
listed by class in API RP7G.
13.1.6 Drill String Stiffness Ratio

The ratio of stiffness, (I/c), has to be considered in drillstring design. The I/c ratio is related
to the resistance to bending. I is the moment of inertia of either the drill pipe or drill collar
and c is the radius. At a crossover between two different sized tubulars to the next, the
acceptable I/c ratio should be:
• Less than 5 for soft formation drilling

• Less than 3.5 for hard formation drilling
The I/c ratio can be calculated using the following equation:

Stiffness = I/c
Where,
I = (Π/64) * ( D4 - d4 )
and c = D/2
Where,
D = outside diameter of pipe (mm)
d = inside diameter of pipe (mm)
To minimize the stiffness ratio between different O.D. collars and drill pipe, the drillstring
is tapered in steps back to drill pipe striving to keep the I/c ratio at the acceptable level.
13.1.7 Bending Strength Ratio

Most drill collar connection failures are as a result of bending stresses rather than torsional
stresses. Figures are available in API RP7G for determining the most suitable connection to
be used on new drill collars. A connection that has a bending strength ratio (BSR) of 2.5:1
is generally accepted. However, the acceptable range can be from 3.2:1 to 1.9:1 depending
on the drilling conditions. The BSR of a given connection is reduced as the O.D. of the
collar wears down. Connection troubles normally occur when the BSR drops below 2:1.
Local operating practices and experience based on the number of failures and other
conditions should be considered when determining the minimum acceptable bending
strength ratio (BSR) for a particular area and type of operation.
___________________________________________________________________________
13.1.8 Fatigue
Fatigue causes most drill pipe failures. Fatigue may occur when drill pipe is rotated in a
dogleg. The amount of fatigue damage depends on:
• Tension in drill pipe at the dogleg

• Dogleg severity
• Number of cycles in the dogleg
• Dimensions and properties of the drill pipe.
Fatigue in a corrosive environment is probably the most common cause of fatigue failures.
Oxygen entrainment in muds and high chloride (salt) mud systems are the biggest causes of
corrosion. Corrosion pits form on the inside of the drill pipe which leads to stress risers in
the pipe and early formation of fatigue cracks. These cracks eventually lead to washouts
and finally twist-offs. Corrosion must therefore be controlled to obtain good life out of the
drill pipe. This is mostly accomplished through the use of internal plastic coating, oxygen
scavengers and/or corrosion inhibitors. Corrosion rings should also be run to determine if a
corrosive environment exists.
Since fatigue increases with tension in the pipe, it follows that a shallow dogleg in a deep
well will cause more fatigue than a deep dogleg. Furthermore, rotating off bottom is not
good practice below doglegs due to the added tensile load.
13.1.9 Critical Rotary Speeds

Vibrations in a drill string occur at a critical rotary speed. Rotating the string at the critical
speed often causes:
• Crooked drill pipe

• Excessive wear
• Fatigue failure
Critical rotary speeds vary with the length and size of drill pipe, drill collars and hole size.
During drilling, the following effects can usually be observed when the critical rotary
speeds are used:
• Vibrations on the drill floor

• Excessive rotary power is needed to maintain a constant speed
Two types of vibrations occur, node and spring pendulum. The vibrations of the node type
are more intense than those of the spring pendulum type. The following equations can be
used to estimate the critical rotary speeds for each type of vibration.
Node Vibration
The pipe between each tool joint vibrates in nodes and can be predicted by the following
formula:
____________________________________________________________________________
( )
1
121 × D + d
2 2 2
RPM crit = 2
L j
Where,
D = Drill pipeoutside diameter (mm)
d = Drill pipe inside diameter (mm)
Lj = Length of one single joint (mm)
Spring Pendulum Vibration
Vibrations of this type have critical rotary speeds which are related to the length of the drill
string and can be predicted by the following formula:
RPMcrit = 78,638.4
Lt
Where,
Lt = Total string length (m)
Secondary and higher harmonic vibrations occur at 4, 9, 16, 25 etc times the speed in the
equation above.
13.1.10 Drill Pipe to Drill Collar Interface

Frequent failure in drill pipe just above the drill collars suggests high bending stresses in
this area. More stresses occur when:
• Hole angle is increasing with depth

• The bit is rotated off bottom
One method of minimizing failures in the transition zone is to routinely move the drill pipe
to another section in the string. The disadvantage is that it is difficult to accurately record
these pipe movements.
Another practice is to use about 15 joints of heavy weight drill pipe, (HWDP), or smaller
drill collars in the transition zone. These joints are not moved and stay in the transition
zone. More frequent inspections of the HWDP are performed.
13.1.11 Tool Joint Specification - Hardbanding

Hardbanding/hardfacing of tool joints is routinely performed to limit the degree of
circumferential wear produced on the tool joint during drilling operations. While
hardbanding has been proven to significantly reduce the degree of tool joint wear, it can
also produce considerable casing wear, leading to a reduction in casing properties. It is
recommended to utilize a smooth hardbanding weld, flush with the outside diameter of the
___________________________________________________________________________
tool joint. Flush hardbanding will result in a more uniform load distribution along the length
of the tool joint, thereby reducing the risk of severely damaging the casing.
The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should require that hardbanded surfaces be smooth and
flush with the outside diameter of the tool joint. If new drill pipe is used, or if the drill pipe
has been recently hardbanded, these joints should be run in the open hole section rather
than in the casing.
13.2 Wear, Care and Handling of Tubulars
13.2.1 Make-Up
• Lubricate the box ends, (thread and shoulder), with a thread compound containing 40
to 60% by weight of finely powdered metallic Zinc.
• Do not use casing dope as over torquing can result due to these compounds having a
low coefficient of friction.
• Care should be exercised when stabbing pin into box to prevent damage to the box
shoulder, (seal). Ensure joint is straight before spinning up.
• Tong line pull should be at 90o. Use of torque gauge or tong line pull is recommended.
• Tong line pull should be at 90o. Use of torque gauge or tong line pull is recommended.
• Follow API and IADC reommdned practices.
13.2.2 General Rules of Care - Drill Pipe

• Keep the kelly saver sub in good condition.
• Check pin and box of each joint of drill pipe before adding joint to string.
• Watch for crooked pipe.
• Watch for dry connections where pipe dope has been washed out.
• Keep pipe standback area clean.
• Never use sharp edged tools to force pipe into position.
• Install thread protectors when laying pipe down
• Stagger breakouts on trips to allow thread inspection every second or third trip.
• Don't allow slips to “ride” drill pipe.
• Check slips and rotary master bushings for wear on a regular basis.
• Don't set slips until pipe has stopped moving. Let the brake do it's job.
13.2.3 Breaking in New Pipe

• Remove rust preventative or other protective coating.
____________________________________________________________________________
• Clean, inspect and dope threads.
• Hand tong connections on initial make-up.
• Do not use spinning chain.
• Spin up joint slowly.
• Use torque gauge for proper make-up torque.
13.2.4 Drill Pipe Protectors

• If considerable rotating hours are expected, install protectors (as recommended in
casing wear model) on drill pipe inside casing.
• Check O.D. periodically for wear.
• A minimum O.D. of 6 mm or 1/4” larger than the tool joint is recommended.
• Remove loose rubbers before they bunch together or become lost in hole.
• Consider removing rubbers before penetrating a high pressure, or low fracture gradient
zone. Rubbered drill pipe is difficult to strip out of the hole and are difficult to
washover.
• Do not run protectors in open hole.
• Observe for corrosion behind protectors.
13.2.5 General Rules of Care - Drill Collars

• Periodically, based on drilling conditions, inspect drill collars using MPI (magnetic
particle inspection).
• Break a different joint on each trip (if practical) and inspect each pin and box on every
third trip. Inspect shoulders for signs of loose connections, galls and possible washouts.
• Use thread protectors on both pin and box when picking up or laying down the drill
collars.
• Know the weight of the drill collars and the effect of buoyancy - to prevent running the
drill pipe in compression. (It is recommended to pick up and run 15% excess over the
required drill collar weight).
• Use a torque gauge to check for correct make-up torque.
13.2.6 Incorrect Torque

• The symptoms of under torque are dry connections, shoulder galling, wobble, washouts
and pin failures.
• The causes of under torque are incorrect tong line pull, damaged threads and wrong
dope.
• To prevent under torque, use an additional 10% torque over posted value and/or
change thread lubricants.
___________________________________________________________________________
• The symptoms of over torque are swelled boxes or pulled threads.
• The causes of over torque are wrong dope, excessive drilling torque and incorrect
make-up torque.
• To prevent over torque change thread compound, check make-up torque or reduce
rotary speed to reduce drilling torque.
• If incorrect torques are still being used, the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should
supervise trips until the problem is alleviated.
____________________________________________________________________________
14.0 HYDRAULICS
14.1 Fluid Requirements
14.2 Carrying Capacity
14.3 Pressure Losses in the Circulating System
14.4 Hydraulic Efficiency
14.5 Field Optimization
14.6 Operating Guidelines
___________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 5 Hydraulics
14.1 Fluid Requirements
14.2 Carrying Capacity

The ability of a fluid to transport cuttings to surface is called the carrying capacity of the fluid.
The efficiency of the drilling fluid in removing the cuttings is affected by the velocity and
viscosity of the fluid and the ratio of the weights of the fluid and cuttings, (and size of
cuttings).
Indications of insufficient hole cleaning would be:
• Fill on trips and after connections.

• Excessive drag on trips and at connections.
• High torque levels.
If cuttings are not efficiently removed by the drilling fluid and the above indications are
observed, the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should consider:
• Increasing the yield point of the drilling fluid.

• Sweeping the hole with high-viscosity pills.
Another method of improving the carrying capacity of drilling fluids is to increase the flow
rate and create turbulent flow in the annulus. This method should be discouraged as hole
washout could occur and therefore reduce the effective annular velocity. It is recommended to
maintain laminar flow in the annulus, across the drill pipe, at all times.
A general rule of thumb is to select a flow rate between 115 to 190 l/min or 30 to 50 gpm per
inch of bit diameter. For varying rates of penetration the following rules of thumb are
acceptable:
Table 1.14 Recommended Flow Rates
Rate of Penetration ( m/hr or ft/hr) Flow Rate Range ( l/min or gpm per bit inch)
>15 or > 50 190 or 50
7.5 - 15 or 25-50 150- 190 or 40 - 50
4.5 - 7.5 or 15-25 140- 170 or 38 - 45
3 - 4.5 or 10-15 130-150 or 34 - 40
1.5-3 or 5- 10 115-149 or 30 - 39
14.3 Pressure Losses in the Circulating System

The total circulating system pressure loss is the summation of individual component pressure
losses as shown below:
___________________________________________________________________________
Hydraulics Page 2 of 5 August 1995
Pspp = Ps + Psc + Pb
Where,
Pspp = Pressure observed at standpipe
Ps = Psurf + Pdp + Pdc + Pdpa + Pdca (system circulating pressure)
Psc = Pressure loss through surface components
Pb = Pressure loss through bit
The individual pressure losses are approximately divided as follows:
Pb = 50 - 70%
String = 25 - 45%
Annulus and surface = 5 - 10%
Since the pressure loss across the bit is the greatest contributor to the overall system pressure
loss, care and attention must be given to the correct selection of the nozzle sizes. This is
discussed in Section 14.4.
14.4 Hydraulic Efficiency

Cleaning action at the bottom of the hole is primarily a function of flow volume and nozzle
velocity. Design of the hydraulics program is based on maximizing or a combination of:
• Bit Hydraulic Horsepower

• Hydraulic Impact Force (Jet Impact Force)
• Nozzle Velocity
The suitability of one method over another for a particular bit run is largely dependent on
previous experience in the area. If offset bit performance data is somewhat limited, and no
conclusions can be drawn concerning the most effective method, then hydraulic efficiency
should be calculated using bit hydraulic horsepower.
14.5 Field Optimization

To optimize the hydraulics program, the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should follow these
guidelines:
The maximum allowable surface pumping pressure should be a direct function of liner size
and the working pressure rating of the high pressure mud lines. The maximum allowable
pump discharge pressure is recommended to be taken as 95% of the working pressure
rating of the high pressure mud lines or pump liners, whichever is less.
Pump liner size for a given hole section should be selected to provide sufficient volumetric
capacity to enable circulation at a rate equivalent to or slightly greater than the circulation
rates shown in Table 1.14.
The drillstring pressure losses should be calculated prior to selecting the bit nozzle sizes.
Each component such as drill pipe, (both ordinary and heavy weight),drill collars, mud
___________________________________________________________________________
motors, turbines and MWD tools should be considered. Service companies providing
specialty drilling tools can provide estimates of the anticipated pressure loss that can be
expected from their equipment under a given set of operating parameters.
Nozzle sizes smaller than 12/32" should not be run without taking appropriate measures
to avoid plugging with lost circulation material or formation cuttings. If the bit hydraulics
program calls for the use of small nozzle diameters, bit manufacturer’s can supply
special "anti-plugging" nozzle inserts. Running bits with open nozzles is not
recommended unless absolutely necessary.
14.6 Operating Guidelines
The following operating guidelines should be followed when running rock bits:
Taking into account hole geometry, rate of penetration, drilling fluid rheology and density,
determine the minimum acceptable circulation rate.
Use the smallest pump liner size to enable the continuous minimum acceptable circulation
rate. As the well deepens, reduce the liner size until the liner discharge pressure rating is
equivalent to or slightly greater than the working pressure rating of the high pressure mud
lines.
In the top hole section, operate the mud pumps at the minimum acceptable circulation rate
for the hole size being drilled. Select bit nozzle sizes to produce the maximum possible
pump discharge pressure at the minimum acceptable circulation rate. This may initially
result in the bit pressure drop being on the order of 75% to 85% of surface pumping
pressure. As the well deepens, and the drill string pressure losses increase, the amount of
pressure drop across the bit as a percentage of surface pressure will decrease.
Once the smallest liner size has been installed, circulation should be at the maximum
discharge rate of the smallest liner until a depth is reached at which bit pressure drop is
66% of the surface pumping pressure. At this point, circulation rate should be reduced on
subsequent bit runs while holding bit pressure drop constant at 66% of surface pressure,
provided the circulation rate can be maintained in excess of the minimum acceptable
circulation rate.
Once the minimum acceptable circulation rate has been reached, this rate should be
maintained until the total depth of a particular hole section has been reached. Nozzle sizes
should be adjusted to produce maximum surface pressure at the minimum acceptable
circulation rate, although bit pressure drop will be less than 66% of pump discharge
pressure.
Optimizing for hydraulic impact force results in the bit pressure drop being allowed to fall
to 49% of the surface pump discharge pressure. Circulation rate and nozzle sizes for
subsequent bit runs should be selected to maintain the bit pressure drop at 49% of the
surface pumping pressure. This criteria should be followed until the minimum acceptable
circulation rate is reached. Once this occurs, the minimum acceptable circulation rate is to
be maintained to total depth, adjusting nozzle sizes to operate the liners at maximum
discharge pressure.
___________________________________________________________________________
Hydraulics Page 4 of 5 August 1995
Optimizing for nozzle velocity should always be accomplished at the minimum acceptable
circulation rate. Once this minimum rate has been reached for a given hole size, nozzle
sizes should be selected to produce the maximum allowable discharge pressure for the
liner size in use. This will automatically produce the highest possible nozzle velocity.
If fixed cutter bits are used, then the following guidelines should be followed:
In water based drilling fluid, select the flow area to generate 5 to 7 hydraulic horsepower
per square inch, (HSI), at the planned circulation rate.
In oil based drilling fluid, select the flow area to allow for maximum flow rate, within the
constraints of critical annular velocity.
___________________________________________________________________________
15.0 CORING
Section 15.0 Contents:
15.1 Core Barrel Configurations
15.1.1 Double Tube Core Barrels

15.1.2 Oriented Coring Assemblies
15.1.3 Aluminium/Fiberglass Inner Barrels and Fiberglass Inner Barrel Liners
15.1.4 Sponge Coring
15.2 Pre-Coring Procedures
15.3 Conventional Core Barrel Handling Procedures
15.3.1 Picking Up and Handling Core Barrel

15.3.2 Laying Down the Core
15.3.3 Maintenance Between Cores
15.3.4 Laying Down the Core Barrel
15.4 Extended Length Core Barrel Handling Procedures With

Aluminium Inner Barrels
15.4.1 Make-Up Procedure for Outer Barrel

15.4.2 Make-Up Procedure for Inner Barrel
15.4.3 Break-Out of Inner Barrels
15.4.4 Laying Down and Cutting of Inner Barrel
15.4.5 Laying Down Outer Barrel
15.4.6 Change Out Corehead
15.5 Equipment Servicing and Maintenance
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 20 Coring
15.6 Coring Guidelines
15.6.1 Operating Parameters

15.6.2 Core Barrel Operations
15.7 Core Barrel Fishing Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________
Coring Page 2 of 20 August 1995
15.1 Core Barrel Configuration
15.1.1 Double Tube Core Barrels, Safety Joint, Drop Ball, Stabilization
The double tube core barrel consists of an outer barrel for transmitting weight and torque
and an inner barrel which holds the core and protects it from the drilling fluid which flows
through the annulus between the inner and outer barrels. To further support and prevent
deterioration of the core, the inner barrel is suspended on an anti-friction thrust bearing.
This isolates the outer barrel rotary motion driving the corehead from the inner barrel
which contains the core.
The safety joint refers to the connection between the inner and outer barrels. The safety
joint consists of coarse, high-pitched threads which provide a low locking stress. The safety
joint can therefore be selectively broken out and this, in turn, separates the inner barrel
components from the outer barrel components in the event the core barrel becomes stuck.
This allows the recovery of the core.
A feature incorporated in the double tube barrel is a port machined through the top of the
inner barrel. This allows fluid to be directed through the inner barrel to flush all cuttings or
debris that may have entered the barrel when tripping the coring assembly into the well.
When this initial flushing has been accomplished, a metal ball is dropped to close the port
and the fluid is redirected to the annulus between the inner and outer barrels, thereby
isolating the core from the drilling fluid.
Stabilization is essential to enable the corehead and outer barrel to rotate about their
designed axis in a regular motion to assure that the diameter of the core being cut is
matched in size to both the core catcher and the inner barrel. Stabilizers are normally
placed at 9 m or 30 ft intervals along the core barrel with the stabilizer closest to the
corehead having the maximum effect.
15.1.2 Oriented Coring Assemblies
When formation dip and azimuth direction is required, this coring technique can be applied.
Oriented cores are obtained using a conventional marine core barrel assembly fitted with a
scribe shoe below the core catcher. Orientation of the core is determined using an
orientation sub and directional survey instrument above the core barrel.
15.1.3 Aluminium/Fiberglass Inner Barrels and Fiberglass Inner Barrel

Liners
The coring of unconsolidated or fractured formations can lead to coring assemblies

jamming and problems in recovering the core on surface. The use of either aluminium or
fiberglass inner barrels or fiberglass inner barrel liners can alleviate these problems. The
smooth inner surface of the aluminium or fiberglass reduces the probability of jamming
__________________________________________________________________________
while coring. Once the core is recovered to surface, the liner can then be cut into 1 m or 3
ft sections for handling and subsequent shipment to shore.
15.1.4 Sponge Coring
This technique is performed to enable recovery of formations fluids that would otherwise
escape from the core as the core is pulled to surface. Reservoir fluid saturations in the
sponge can then be used to make a more accurate prediction of the fluid saturations that
existed in the core under native bottom-hole conditions. A special inner barrel is used
which is made of an absorbent sponge-like material. The sponge absorbs the formation
fluids as they bleed from the core. Depending upon the sponge liner selected, analyses for
oil, water, CO2 and H2S are possible.
15.2 Pre-Coring Procedures

It is important that these tools be handled properly and kept in as good a condition as
possible.
The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should ensure that the core barrels and tools have been
checked thoroughly before they leave the service company base. However, it is possible
that mistakes have been made and it is necessary to double check all equipment as soon as
it arrives at the rig site. The following procedure should be used.
Check core barrel, coreheads and tools.

- Be sure you have all core barrel parts and the proper size.
- Be sure you have all necessary tools.
- Be sure you have all subs and jars that may be required.
Make a diagram of all tools to be run in the hole. This diagram should show the make
up assembly and accurate measurement of each part, including length, O.D. and I.D. It
is recommended that you have written-down precise procedures for backing off the
safety joint in the hole in case the core barrel gets stuck.
Determine the following:
- Hole Condition: Such as, key seats, bridges, deviated or crooked hole,
temperature.
- Mud Condition: Weight, viscosity, water loss, sand content and lost circulation
material.
- Pumps: Maximum and minimum operating pump pressure, gallons per
stroke. Calculate number of strokes required for desired pump
output.
- Elevators: Be sure they are the correct size for your handling sub.
- Previous Bits: Check hole condition and gauge. If a stiff drilling BHA was used
prior to coring, a short wiper trip should be made.
__________________________________________________________________________
- Junk in Hole: Check for any evidence such as dull bits sitting around the
location. Talk to the drilling crew.
- Float: Remove float from string.
- Drill String (ID) Determine if there are any restrictions in the drill string that
would prohibit dropping the steel ball.
- Drillstring M/Up Be aware of number and type of collars and drill string
stabilizers.
15.3 Conventional Core Barrel Handling Procedures
15.3.1 Picking Up and Handling Core Barrel
The following steps and procedures should be taken when picking up most conventional
core barrels:
Make sure the handling sub is tight, then with a cat line pull both sections of the core
barrel up into the "V" door, or in the mouse hole.
Cover the hole with the rig's bit breaker. Latch the elevator on the handling sub and
pick up the bottom section of the barrel.
Make sure the bit end protector is tight, then remove the hole cover and lower the
barrel through the rotary. Set slips just below the stabilizer ribs. Then tighten the outer
tube sub with rib tongs to proper torque. Be sure to keep 10 cm or 4 inches below the
box joint.
NOTE: Excessive make up torque can bell the outer barrel box and not enough
torque could cause joint to back off. Ensure correct make-up torque is applied - Core
engineer must be on the rig floor during core barrel make-up.
Remove slips and lower barrel to set slips again approximately 45 cm or 18 inches
below the next outer tube sub and tighten it with rig tongs. Again applying proper
torque.
Pick up barrel and reset slips just below the stabilizer ribs leaving enough room to
install the drill collar safety clamp.
Break handling sub loose and back out with chain tongs.
Pick up the inner barrel approximately 20 cm or 8 inches and install the inner barrel
clamp.
Now remove the handling sub from the inner barrel with chain tongs.
With the lower section setting in the rotary table, put the handling sub in the top of the
top section (should be laying in the "V" door), and make chain tong tight. Remember
core barrel may tend to slide out "V" door.
Place a thread protector on the top of the handling sub and latch on the elevators to
pick up the upper section.
Remove the long thread protector and the inner barrel thread protector from the
bottom end of the top section.
__________________________________________________________________________
Wipe upper and lower inner barrel threads clean and dope.
Dope the inner barrel threads then lower the top section down to the bottom section
and align the upper and lower sections, without any weight. While rig hands hold the
upper outer barrel steady, screw upper inner barrel into the lower inner barrel, being
sure not to cross-thread. When threads are tight by hand, finish tightening with chain
tongs. (Do not use rig tongs on the inner barrel.) Wipe inner barrel joint clean and
inspect to be sure it is tight.
Pick up inner barrel and remove the inner barrel clamp from the lower inner barrel.
Dope the pin end of the outer barrel and lower the upper outer barrel to make up the
upper and lower barrels, by using chain tongs on the upper section. Engage two
threads then lower the elevators so that the handling sub is free and proceed to tighten
with chain tongs and finish tightening with the rig tongs. While making up the lower
and upper outer sections, someone should watch the handling sub to be sure it does not
back out of the top of the upper section.
Pick up and remove drill collar clamps and slips. Lower the barrel to set slips
approximately 45 cm or 18 inches below the next outer tube sub and make outer tube
sub joint tight with rig tongs, applying proper torque as before.
Pick up and place drill collar safety clamp just below the stabilizer ribs (as low as
possible).
Now tighten the safety joint box on the outer tube sub with rig tongs. As a safety
precaution, be sure handling sub is tight.
With chain tongs back out the safety joint pin and pick up the inner barrel assembly
until approximately 15 cm or 6 inches of the inner barrel is exposed. Inspect the safety
joint "O" rings. If barrel was properly serviced in the shop, "O" rings should be in
good shape.
Install the inner barrel clamp on the inner barrel and lower the elevators until all inner
barrel weight is resting on the clamp.
Double check the bearing by picking up the inner barrel. It should not have more than
5 mm or 6/32” of play.
Now completely pull out the inner ba rrel and inspect all joints to be sure they are tight.
With chain tongs and a 1 m or 3 ft wrench, be sure the upper and lower shoes are
tight. Also, check catcher to be sure it is the right one and in good shape. Also, check
for core marker.
Now lower the inner barrel assembly back into the outer barrel. Only very lightly dope
the safety joint threads, and make up the safety joint pin connection with chain tongs,
then rig tongs.
Pick up and remove the drill collar clamp and slips. Pull barrel completely out of hole
and cover the hole with the rig bit breaker
Remove the short thread protector with chain tongs and hammer.
Check inner barrel with make up gauge for proper length. If the inner barrel should not
be properly spaced then the barrel would have to be lowered in the hole and install the
__________________________________________________________________________
drill collar clamp and slips to remove the safety joint and make proper adjustment with
shims. Do not put rig tongs on chrome section of the safety joint.
Dope bit and start on barrel by hand. After screwing bit on as much as possible by
hand, put the bit breaker on the bit and tap wedge with hammer.
Remove hole cover and set core bit with bit breaker in the rotary and make up with rig
tongs, applying same torque as with the outer tube subs. (Keep a close watch on the
lift sub.)
Pick up barrel to shoulder height and replace hole cover.
Remove the bit breaker from the bit and turn the inner barrel by hand to be sure it is
free.
Remove the hole cover and go in the hole to set slips and drill collar clamp just below
the ribs of the top stabilizer sub and remove the handling sub.
Using the pick-up tool make sure there is no steel ball or drop plug in the pressure
relief plug. If you cannot drop the ball due to I.D. limits or float, then one should be
installed now.
Now make up drill string to core barrel and run in hole.
15.3.2 Laying Down the Core
It is important that a correct procedure be followed while laying down the core for the
following reasons:
Prevent accidents.
Prevent damage to the core barrel.
Prevent damage or a mis-arrangement of the core.
The following is a list of recommended steps to take while laying down a core from the
core barrel:
As top of the core barrel comes through the rotary, set slips below the top stabilizer
sub and put the drill collar clamp just below the stabilizer ribs.
Break off the drill string immediately above the core barrel. If jars are run, lay them
down. Do not leave jars on the core barrel while laying down the core.
Retrieve the steel ball. To protect the core, do not run any water in the core barrel
until the core is laid down.
Install the handling sub and tighten with the rig tongs.
Pick up and remove slips and drill collar clamp. Then pull completely out of the hole.
Cover the hole and install the bit breaker on the bit and remove core bit. Install the
short thread protector and make chain tong tight.
Remove hole cover and go back in the hole to set slips and drill collar clamp below the
top stabilizer sub as before.
__________________________________________________________________________
Break the safety joint with rig tongs and back out with the chain tongs. Visually
inspect the "O" rings.
Pull the inner barrel completely out and wash and wipe clean while inspecting all inner
barrel joints to be sure they are tight.
Place the core jack pin or thread protector on top of the safety joint box to keep any
core from falling into the outer barrel.
Loosen the lower shoe two or three threads with chain tongs and lower the inner barrel
to about one inch off the floor. Clamp the core tong shoe just above the upset on the
upper shoe. Make certain the inner barrel is as secure and steady as possible.
Install the core tong handle, raise the barrel two to three inches and fasten the
connecting links across the core tongs. Core is now ready to be removed from the
barrel.
Extreme safety precautions must be taken with regard to the core tong handle, keeping
hands and feet from under the core.
As the core is being laid down in pieces, care should be taken to keep the pieces in
proper order and as much as possible in an undisturbed state. In other words, try to
preserve the core in its original condition as much as possible. When the core marker
falls out, the barrel is empty.
15.3.3 Maintenance Between Cores
During coring, the core barrel is always subject to a varying amount of wear, depending
upon the operating conditions. Also, the core barrel requires some cleaning, adjusting, etc.
Therefore, the following procedures and steps are recommended for performing this
dressing of the core barrel:
With the outer barrel hanging in the rotary and the inner barrel hanging in the derrick,
wash the lower shoe. Remove and check the core catcher. Replace core catcher, if
necessary. Also check lower shoe.
Put the core marker in the lower shoe. Dope the threads and screw the lower shoe onto
the upper shoe. Make chain tong tight.
Run the inner barrel back into the outer barrel, and inspect the upper and lower inner
barrel joints to be sure they are tight. Place the inner barrel clamp on top of the inner
barrel and check the bearing for wear as before.
To change the bearing over the rotary table, first break the cartridge cap plug out of the
cartridge cap. This can be done with the rig tongs. Then raise the top section (safety
joint) up out of the way. Tape the bearing so the balls will not fall out. Then remove
the bearing retainer. Inspect the bearing retainer top shoulder of the inner tube plug and
bearing.
Replace any of these parts which show wear. Be certain to have the bearing taped until
the bearing retainer is made up with a bar and 1 mm or 3 ft wrench. Then replace the
cartridge cap and make it up to the cartridge cap plug with chain tongs.
__________________________________________________________________________
If corrosion is a problem or it is suspected that the ball seat leaks, the steel ball and
pressure relief plug should be inspected for possible wash and wear.
Remove the inner barrel clamp and make up the safety joint with chain tongs. If
another core is to be cut now, tighten the safety joint with rig tongs. Pick up, remove
slips and drill collar clamp to come out of the hole.
Cover the hole and remove the thread protector. Start the core bit on the outer barrel
by hand, then install the bit breaker and complete making up bit with rig tongs. Replace
the hole cover and remove the bit breaker. Check the inner barrel to be sure it rotates
by hand.
Remove the hole cover. Go in hole and set slips and drill collar clamp just below the
top stabilizer sub. Remove the handling sub, connect the core barrel to the drill string
and go in hole.
15.3.4 Laying Down the Core Barrel
In most cases, little time is involved in laying down a core barrel, but it must be done
correctly, so as to insure the barrel is not damaged, parts and tools are not lost, and to save
time and work when the core barrel is later serviced in the shop.
The following is the standard procedure for laying down a conventional core barrel:
If no more coring is to be done, when making up the safety joint, leave it chain tong
tight.
Remove the handling sub and if possible run fresh water through the barrel. Replace the
handling sub and make chain tong tight. All breaks must be chain tong tight.
Break the safety joint box loose from the outer tube sub and leave chain tong tight.
Pick up and remove the drill collar clamp and break the joint between the outer tube
sub and the outer barrel, leaving chain tong tight.
Pick up 9 m or 30 ft and set slips and drill collar clamp just below the ribs of the
middle outer tube sub; break the middle sub loose from the upper outer barrel with
chain tongs.
Pick up the upper barrel about 1 m or 3 ft and install the inner barrel clamp. Break the
inner barrels apart using chain tongs.
Place the thread protector on the top section of the inner barrel and the long thread
protector on the top section of the outer barrel and make chain tong tight. Now lay
down the top section through the "V" door and remove the handling sub.
Remove the thread protector from the handling sub and install the handling sub in the
bottom section of the inner barrel. Be sure the threads are not crossed, and make chain
tong tight. With elevators, pick up the inner barrel and remove the inner barrel clamp.
Lower the inner barrel and make up the handling sub to the outer barrel.
Pick up and remove the drill collar clamp. With slips still in place, break the outer tube
sub loose from the outer barrel, leaving chain tong tight.
__________________________________________________________________________
Pick up and remove slips. Pick up 10 m or 30 ft and reset slips just below the stabilizer
ribs and break the bottom sub loose from the outer barrel, leaving chain tong tight.
Pick up, remove slips and pull out of the hole. Replace hole cover.
Lay down the bottom section through the "V" door. While the core barrels are laying at
an angle in the "V" door, it may be possible to pour about 18 liters or 5 gallons of oil
through the inner barrels to prevent rust.
15.4 Extended Length Core Barrel Handling Procedures

with Aluminium Inner Barrels
The following make-up procedure should only be considered a safe starting point of
reference as each core engineer will have his own way of treating the steps listed herein. As
long as adaptations to these steps are safe and time saving they should be incorporated.
15.4.1 Make-Up Procedure for Outer Barrel
The bottom section of core barrel is picked up first. The lower protector and the lifting
sub should be checked to see if they are at least chain tong light prior to picking
-up.
The top connection of the bottom or near bit stabilizer should be torqued up to the
required limits. Care should be taken to avoid placing rig tongs over the box section of
the core barrel thread as this could give a false make-up torque reading.
NOTE: If a barrel of over 27 m or 90 ft is to be run it is likely that the corehead
will have to be put on first.
The next connection to make-up is the bottom connection of the next stabilizer/sub.
The slips should be set between 0.6 and 1 m or 2-3 ft from the connection to allow
sufficient room to place the break-out tong on the outer tube without squashing the
box connection. The connection can then be torqued up to the required limits.
The barrel should be lowered to have the slips set as close as possible to the stabilizer
blade section/sub body, while leaving enough room for the clamp. The lifting sub can
then be backed out.
With the lifting sub backed out the inner barrel can be raised. Sufficient inner barrel
should be exposed to allow for an inner tube clamp to be placed near the box
connection. This should allow enough room to place chain/pipe wrenches on the
subject tube without being directly over the top/box connection. With the inner-tube
tightly clamped, resting on the shoulder of the box connection, the inner tube can be
backed out and laid down.
If prior knowledge of inner tube requirements is known, the core barrels can be sent
out to location not dressed with the steel inner barrels. These would be packed in the
basket containing either the Aluminium or fiber-tube inner barrels, being present as
back-ups.
The next outer barrel section can then be picked-up and made up to the bottom section
of core barrel. As the stabilizer/sub is set relatively low in the rotary table, the outer
tube connection can be torqued up without further lowering in the table.
__________________________________________________________________________
The collar clamp can be taken off and the barrel lowered to the next connection.
These steps are repeated depending on how many sections of core barrel are required.
As sufficient intermediate sections of core barrel have been added, the top section can
be picked up.
The next connection to make up is the bottom of the top stabilizer/sub. The slips
should be set between 0.6 and 1 m or 2-3 ft from the connection to allow sufficient
room to place the break-out tong on the outer tube without squashing the box
connection and giving false torque readings. The connection can then be torqued up to
required limits.
The barrel should be lowered to have the slips set as close as possible to the stabilizer
blade section/sub body while leaving enough room for a collar clamp.
The top connection, safety joint box to top stabilizer/sub can then be torqued up.
The safety joint is backed out and if the section is loaded with an inner barrel as
described above.
15.4.2 Make-Up Procedures for Inner Barrel
The inner tubes can be picked up by tugger and swivel with either a lifting cap or inner
tube clamp. The core catcher and upper shoe can be screwed on to the inner barrel
either on the catwalk or with the barrel hanging on the tugger line. During this process
the inner barrel can be centralized in a thread protector which would be placed on the
safety joint box. Once the 2 connections have been tightened, the inner barrel is run
into the outer barrel.
The inner barrel should be clamped with sufficient room for chain/pipe wrenches (pipe
wrenches preferably) to be placed on the tube off the box connection. The protector
lifting sub should be left on until the next joint of inner barrel has been picked up.
If the next section is being picked up by sling, this should be strung through the bales
and lifted by the block. If possible a swivel should also be attached.,
In order to help the make up process of the 2 inner barrels, it would be advantageous
to have somebody steadying the top inner tube from the stabbing board. This would be
especially helpful in high wind conditions.
Once the inner tubes are made up the clamp is removed off the first section and the
tubes run into the outer barrel.
The next inner barrel can then be clamped ready to accept another section.
When the required inner tubes have been added to the outer barrel, the inner tube plug
is made up to the top section of inner barrel.
The safety joint is then torqued up and the inner barrel assembly checked for
space-out/shimming and adjusted accordingly. If hot hole conditions exist, the lead
should be adjusted accordingly to allow for expansion of either the aluminium or fiber
tube.
__________________________________________________________________________
15.4.3 Break-Out of Inner Barrels
After retrieving the ball and making up the lift sub to the core barrel, the safety joint
can be backed out.
With the inner barrel exposed an inner tube clamp or dog collar should be attached
leaving sufficient room to place chain/pipe wrenches on the inner tube without
squashing the box connection. Then the clamp should be rested on the outer barrel to
see that it is gripping properly. If not the clamp should be further tightened.
The inner tube plug is then backed out from the inner tube.
To lift the inner tubes to the next break either a lifting sub with a wire line and swivel
fed through the bales or the `Eastman' double pin sub can be used.
The top of the next inner barrelshould be clamped as per above procedures.
The connection can then be broken out. Care should be taken not to back out the inner
tube completely before putting on the Guillotine clamp. Again having a person on the
stabbing board is helpful during the break -out process.
The Guillotine clamp should be placed close enough to the pin connection so sufficient
core is exposed, also to ensure that the guillotine clears the pin connection of the top
section of inner barrel.
The inner barrels are then backed out completely.
The barrel can then be raised carefully and as soon as the pin has cleared the box
connection of the lower inner -tube and core is exposed, the guillotine should be closed.
With the guillotine closed the core is held securely in the top section of inner tube. The
inner barrel should now be laid down on the catwalk.
Each intermediate section should be handled as per the above steps.
When the bottom section has been backed out completely from the penultimate inner
barrel this is laid out without the guillotine clamp as there is a catcher securing the core
at the bottom of this section.
The outer barrel is then ready to be reloaded with inner barrels and to undergo
servicing.
NOTE: If the inner barrel assembly has intermediate catchers these can be treated
the same way as the bottom barrel with the catcher shoe, i.e. is laid down without the
guillotine boot, but just with a thread protector.
15.4.4 Laying Down and Cutting of Inner Barrel
An inner tube box protector should be put on prior to laying down the inner barrel to
avoid the unloading of core if the bottom end is tipped up past horizontal during laying
down.
The inner barrels are ready to be laid down on the catwalk by tugger line. An extra "V"
sling arrangement can be attached during this period to assist in avoiding excessive
bowing, until the inner barrel is laying on the catwalk.
__________________________________________________________________________
If the inner barrel is to be lifted again by crane off the catwalk, to be worked on
elsewhere, slinging should be evenly spaced throughout the 9 m or 30 ft length. The
most effective way is by using a double pick-up from each end of the pipe lifting strops
i.e. 4 pick-up points on the length of the inner tube.
Once the inner tubes have been lifted to where they are to be cut they can be loaded on
the rollers. These ease the feeding of the inner tubes to the air powered tube cutter.
The proper blade for cutting either aluminium or fiber tube should already be in place
on the machine, i.e. diamond impregnated for the fiber tube and tungsten carbide saw
tooth for the aluminium.
The tubing should be fed along the 'V' channelling guide of tube cutter, taking required
lengths past the blade ready to be cut.
As the cutting blade and tool is hinged and weighted it is quite easy to handle. So then
the tool can be started and lowered to cut the tubing.
It may be advisable to rotate the tubing 180o in the 'V' channel and make the 2nd half
of the cut after that to avoid overheating of the blade due to excessive side contact. If
water cannot be used to cool the blade this becomes especially pertinent.
The tube can be sectioned off in this way to whatever length is desired, usually 1 m or 3
ft sections. Doubling this can be done, depending on loading restrictions and
Halliburton’s or the Client’s geological requirements.
The end caps are then attached. It sometimes helps to heat the end caps in hot water to
make it easier for putting them on.
To complete the sealing of the end caps, jubilee clips are tightened up next to the
external lip of the end cap.
15.4.5 Laying Down Outer Barrel
It is likely that when the outer barrel is laid down, in this case, there will be no inner barrels
left in the assembly. The actual breakdown process is quicker without the inner barrels
present.
The lifting sub attached to the API connection at the top of the core barrel should be
checked to see if it is chain tong tight and can be easily removed in the workshop.
All connections down to the bottom of the top section should be broken so they can be
backed out in the workshop. Usually 2 to 3 pulls on the rig tongs are sufficient.
The slips and collar clamp should be set below the stab/sub of the next section.
With connections between the top section and the next section broken, the top/outer
barrel can be completely backed off from the bottom section. A pin protector should be
placed on pin connection of the top barrel, which can then be laid down.
A lifting sub is then screwed into the next section.
The connection of which should be broken out as per the top section.
Once the bottom of the next section is broken out this can be treated as above.
__________________________________________________________________________
Depending on how many intermediate sections are being run, then above appropriate
steps should be followed.
The bottom section should be treated in the same way as the top section, the only
difference between it and the intermediate sections are there being 2 stabilizers/subs,
one on top, and one at the bottom.
If the barrel has been longer than can be hoisted in the derrick, the bit will be the last
item to break-out. If not, a long protector should be attached which would have been
put on before unloading the core barrel.
The last/bottom section of core barrel outer tube can then be laid down.
15.4.6 Change Out Corehead
This can be treated the same way as the breakdown process but complete breakout
should only be made after 3 sections of outer barrel i.e. 27 m or 90 ft.
The 27 m or 90 ft section can then be racked back in the derrick.
The next 27 m or 90 ft section can now be raised and backed out and racked back.
Proceed this way until the corehead can be viewed.
15.5 Equipment Servicing and Maintenance

While in use coring, core barrels are subject to wear. Therefore, it is very important that
after every job when a core barrel is returned to its service point it is thoroughly
re-inspected, and restored to like-new condition.
15.6 Coring Guidelines
15.6.1 Operating Parameters
Hydraulics plays an important part in a coring operation. This is mainly because drilling
fluid is required to clean and cool the bit, but at the same time this drilling fluid should
not damage the core any more than can possibly be avoided.
The optimum coring mud should not damage the core, should help with good core
recovery, maintain ideal hole conditions, and help give a longer corehead life with
better penetration rates. This means the mud should have a low sand content, low
water loss, and a minimum of loss circulation material. Coring has been done with
varying amount of LCM in the mud, but it always presents problems such as the
possibility of plugged inner barrels, plugged face discharge ports, excess pump
pressure, etc.
The drilling fluid flow rate while coring should always be consistent with good drilling
practices. Generally the flow rate increases as the bit size increases. However, the type
of formation being cored can dictate the flowrate required for good core recovery.
__________________________________________________________________________
Too little drilling fluid will not properly clean and cool the core bit, therefore, the
corehead may be damaged and the penetration rate may be excessively slow. Then on
the other hand too much fluid may cause core damage or outright loss.
Fluid damage of the core can be kept to minimum by making certain that the spacing
between the inner tube shoe and the bit is correct. An excessive gap, more than 5 mm
or 6 /32”, between the lip of the inner tube shoe and the crown section of the bit, will
allow flushing of the core, (also possibly actual washing away) as it enters the inner
barrel.
But care should be taken not to allow the inner tube shoe to touch the corehead, as this
can cause the inner barrel to turn with the corehead and cause the core to break up and
possibly jam the core barrel.
Generally, the rotary speed (RPM) has a direct effect on the rate of penetration while
coring. But in certain formations this may not be the case. Therefore, the optimum
RPM should be searched through trial and error, unless this is known through
experience. Keep flowrate and WOB constant while doing this. Usually diamond coring
rates or penetration are slower than those of diamond drilling bits.
Rotary speed may also affect core recovery, core blocking etc. Therefore, the RPM
must be adjusted to give the best core recovery in addition to the best penetration
mentioned above.
Finally certain formations such as fractured or broken rocks are best cored with slow
RPM and higher weights.
Weight on the bit is probably the most important of the three operating parameters
affecting the performance of a core bit and core recovery.
The variables to consider in determining the proper WOB are:
a) Formation
b) Bit size
c) Diamond size
d) Diamond quality
e) Number of face stones in contact with the formation.
The cutting action of the diamond bit is completely dependent upon each stone being
held firmly in contact with the formation. This, of course, is the result of WOB. It is
important that this WOB never exceeds the weight of the drill collars, so that the drill
pipe is always in tension. This condition is ideal and helps prevent drill string
vibrations, core bit wobble, and other problems.
Core barrel and drill string stabilization is good drilling practice unless hole conditions
are such that stabilizers are not recommended.
Stabilizers help increase penetration, improve core recovery, minimize core bit wear,
and protect and prolong the life of the core barrels. Core barrels are usually dressed
with one of the following types of outer barrel stabilizers:
a) Hard metal wear ribs (not a true stabilizer)
__________________________________________________________________________
b) Straight or hard metal ribs (near or full gauge)
c) Spiral rib (tungsten carbide inserts).
On standard core barrels stabilizers are placed as follows:
a) Near bit stabilizer.
b) On outer tube sub stabilizer at the top of each outer tube.
Therefore, on a 18 m or 60 ft core barrel, three stabilizers would be standard; on a 9
m or 30 ft core barrel, two stabilizers would be standard; on a 27 m or 90 ft core
barrel, four stabilizers would be standard.
In holes where severe deviation is a problem, additional stabilizers can be placed on the
barrel by using 4 m or 13 ft outer tube sections and placing a stabilizer sub at the top
of each section.
In most deviated holes above ten degrees, it is recommended that the inner barrels be
stabilized by brazing narrow brass strips at the center and at the top, just below the
box, of each inner barrel. In addition, a bit bearing can be placed in the bit shank to
stabilize the inner tube shoe.
It is important to maintain outer barrel stabilizers in good condition, and replace them
when diameter wear exceeds 11 mm or 7/16".
Coring should be started with a 18 m or 60 ft core barrel. This core barrel length can
be increased in steps of 9 m 30 ft sections if core recovery is good. Long reservoir
intervals can be cored with 54 m 05 180 ft core barrels, but core recovery will be very
dependent on hole inclination, hole condition and stabilization. If core recovery is poor,
then reduce the barrel length to 9m or 30 ft or core only 9m or 30 ft with the 18m or
60 ft core barrel.
In production wells, where coring of long reservoir sections could cause wear, the use
of a downhole motor could provide a solution.
NOTE: When using a downhole motor, the core barrel should be run without its
safety joint.
SUMMARY OF OPERATING PARAMETERS
Flow rate must be sufficient to clean and cool the core bit, but not so excessive as to
damage the core.
Optimum RPM must be determined by trial and error.
Proper bit weight must be applied evenly.
Too little weight slows penetration and may damage bit.
Too much weight can crush diamonds in hard formations or clog the bit in soft
formations and cause "burning"
The outer barrel should always be stabilized properly.
In deviated holes, the nner
i barrel should also be stabilized and a bit bearing used.
__________________________________________________________________________
15.6.2 Core Barrel Operation
Prior to commencing a coring operation the hole must be circulated clean and all junk
removed.
When going in the hole with a core barrel, always advise the Driller to run the barrel in
carefully. Reaming with a core bit is not advised, but if it is absolutely necessary, do so
with very little weight (0.5 to 1 ton or 1,000 - 2,000 lbs , up to a maximum of 2.5 tons
or 5,000 lbs with an 8-1/2" corehead), slow rotary, e.g. 40 to 60RPM, and full pump.
If fill is encountered near bottom, wash down 3 m or 10 ft at a time until hole is clean.
Then try to tag bottom with pump on and no rotation if possible. If it is necessary to
rotate, do so slowly and tag bottom with just enough weight to be certain bottom has
been reached. Make certain that this point is the same as the calculated bottom depth.
Space out kelly with pup joints, if necessary.
Next pick up off bottom 0.3 to 0.7 m or 1-2 ft and circulate with sufficient annular
velocity to condition mud and clean the hole. This should be done with the ball out, in
most cases, for 15 minutes to one hour, or longer if necessary.
After it has been determined that the hole is clean and the mud is conditioned, pick up
and break off the kelly and drop the steel ball or drop plug. Then replace the kelly and
pump the ball down at a slow pump speed. While the ball is falling, record the pump
rate and stand pipe pressure.
As soon as the ball is seated, record the increase in stand pipe pressure, return to
bottom and start to rotate slowly (30 to 40 RPM), and start adding weight in
increments of approximately 1 ton. (Begin with about 20% of maximum desired
WOB). Gradually increase WOB and RPM and at the same time bring pick up rate to
the desired flowrate. Test various WOB, RPM and flowrate until optimum coring rates
and conditions are found.
These parameters should be held until there is a definite change in the coring rate or the
entire core is cut.
Usually most coring operations are trouble free, especially if the core barrel is in good
condition and properly assembled. But, problems can develop and the Driller must have
knowledge of what can possibly happen and be able to recognize symptoms of these
problems. So while coring, observe the operation closely and watch for the following:
a) Decrease in penetration rate. Try to determine cause:
i) Bit wear?
ii) Formation change?
iii) Jammed core barrel?
iv) Other?
b) Pump pressure increase or decrease:
An increase could mean:
__________________________________________________________________________
i) Ring out of bit?
ii) Formation change?
iii) Change in mud?
iv) Jammed inner barrel?
v) Other?
A decrease could mean:
i) Formation change?
ii) Drill string wash out?
iii) Mud change?
iv) Other?
Jammed or blocked inner barrel is probably one of the more common problems of
coring. A jammed inner barrel could be indicated by:
a) A decrease in torque or increase.
b) Decrease in pump pressure.
c) Increase or decrease in pump strokes.
d) Slower penetration rate.
Jamming of the inner barrel is usually caused by a formation condition. This could be
fractures in the formation, unconsolidated material, swelling shales, etc.
A few remedial actions can be taken when the inner barrel becomes jammed but they
are not always effective and usually a jammed core barrel means a trip out of the hole.
When it is determined that the inner barrel is jammed, pick up a few feet off bottom and
circulate to clean any broken formation out from under the bit. Then go back to
bottom and apply approximately two times the normal coring weight on the bit with no
pump and no rotary for a minute or two. Then go back to the normal coring operation.
The procedure may work if the jamming is in the core catcher, but probably will not
work if the jamming is up in the inner barrel.
Another method is to add and keep adding WOB while coring, up to 50% over the
normal WOB, and cut back the RPM by 50%. Then allow bit to drill off back to the
normal WOB. The pump pressure and torque should be closely observed while this is
being done. Only a small amount of time, (maximum 30 minutes), should be spent
trying to free a jammed inner barrel. The core can be drilled up, and the bit damaged
too easily in the case of a jammed inner barrel. The best solution to a jammed inner
barrel is to come out of the hole.
The following procedure should be followed when breaking off the core to make a
connection, or to come out of the hole:
a) Stop rotating.
__________________________________________________________________________
b) Idle or shut off pump.
c) Slowly pull up until the core breaks.
In most cases, do not exceed the following strain over the weight of the drill string:
For a 76 mm or 3" core : 6 tons or 12,000 lbs

For a 102 mm or 4" core : 10 tons or 20,000 lbs
For a 133 mm or 5-1/4" core : 16 tons or 32,000 lbs
If the core does not break with the maximum strain, then start the pump and hold the
strain on the core until it breaks. The core should break within four or five minutes.
But, it could take longer. Do not rotate while breaking off the core, as the shoe could
be pulled into seating in the bit so that the rotation could cause the catcher to turn out
or wear through the inner tube shoe.
It is a good idea to lock the rotary table while breaking off a core and making a
connection. Then if the kelly is backed out with chain tongs or the chain, the coring
assembly can be placed back on bottom, after the connection, exactly as it was before
the connection.
It is also a good idea to lower the core barrel back to bottom just after the core is
broken off (be certain not to rotate or have the pump on), and add only about 50 per
cent of the coring WOB. This procedure is both a check to determine whether or not
any broken core was left on bottom and whether the core is actually caught, by
checking the weight indicator. Do this procedure at least two times.
When coring is to be resumed after making the connection, go back to bottom without
rotating, but with the pump on and apply approximately 30% more weight above the
normal coring WOB to help release the core catcher, so that the core can freely enter
the inner barrel. Then pick up until WOB is the normal weight and start to rotate
slowly and then gradually return to the normal coring conditions.
It is after a connection that sometimes junk damage occurs. Also this is the time most
inner barrel jamming occurs. Therefore, be alert to the rig floor indicators and develop
a mental picture of what is happening at the bit and in the core barrel.
15.7 Core Barrel Fishing Procedures
A number of precautions can be taken which will minimize the risk of getting stuck or
twisting off in the hole. A few examples are:
Do not run a full gauge corehead into an undergauge hole.

Be aware of keyseats or doglegs and run the barrel
with care through these areas.
Be aware of the mud condition. A high water loss mud can contribute to sticking
problems.
Avoid excessive torque on drill pipe.
__________________________________________________________________________
If a core barrel is stuck in the hole, try the following procedures:
Spot oil or a freeing agent.
Work the core barrel as much as possible.
Use jars.
If jarring and pulling are to be done, be aware of the pulling limits on the core barrel.
Table 1.15 gives this information.
CORE BARREL SIZE MAXIMUM PULL (IN TONS/LBS)

6 - 1/4" x 3" (Marine) 150/290,400
6 - 3/4" x 4" 200/400,400
8" x 5 - 1/4" 155/310,200
Table 1.15 Maximum Pull on Core Barrel

If it is necessary to back off the core barrel, this can be done with the safety joint by pulling
only very slightly over the weight of the drill string, e.g. 0 to 0.5 tons or 0 to 1,100 lbs, and
reversing the rotary. With neutral weight or only a slight pull, the safety joint should back
off. If not, a small string shot may help.
Also remember that if the bit is stuck, this jarring and pulling procedure could result in a
broken bit matrix. If you suspect that this is the case, you should strongly consider coming
out of the hole to check the bit before resuming the coring operation.
If the core barrel has to be washed over, this in all probability will result in cutting off the
stabilizer ribs, so use a diamond wash over shoe. After this, go in hole with an overshot to
retrieve the core barrel.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.0 STUCK PIPE AND FISHING OPERATIONS
16.1 Causes of Stuck Pipe
16.1.1 Differential Sticking
16.1.2 Inadequate Hole Cleaning
16.1.3 Reactive Formations
16.1.4 Key Seating
16.1.5 Undergauge Hole and BHA Changes
16.1.6 Mobil Salt Formations
16.2 Prevention of Stuck Pipe
16.2.1 General
16.2.5 Key Seating
16.3 Freeing Stuck Pipe
16.3.1 General
16.3.3 Soluble Formations
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 20 Stuck Pipe and Fishing Operations
16.3.5 Key Seating
16.4 Stuck Casing
16.5 Methods of Locating Stuck Point
16.5.1 Stretch Method
16.5.2 Free Point Indicator Tool Method
16.6 Fishing Operations
16.6.1 Fishing Economics
16.6.2 Fishing Tools - Standard Wellsite Inventory
16.6.3 Standard Practices
16.6.3.1 Overshot
16.6.3.2 Spear
16.6.3.3 Taper Tap
16.6.3.4 Junk Basket
16.6.3.5 Magnet
16.6.3.6 Jarring
16.6.4 Stuck Logging Tools
16.6.5 Back-off Procedures
16.6.5.1 General
16.6.5.2 Safety Considerations
16.6.5.3 String Shot Size
16.6.5.4 Weight on String
16.6.5.5 Torque on String

__________________________________________________________________________
Stuck Pipe and Fishing Operations Page 2 of 20 August 1995
16.6.5.6 Completing the Back-Off
16.6.6 Chemical Cutters
16.6.7 Milling Operations
16.6.7.1 General
16.6.7.2 Open Hole Milling
16.6.7.3 Cased Hole Milling
16.6.7.4 Tapered Mill
16.6.7.5 Junk Mill
16.6.7.6 Pilot Mill
16.6.7.7 Section Mill
16.6.7.8 Rotary Mill
__________________________________________________________________________
16.1 Causes of Stuck Pipe

In drilling operations, the hydrostatic pressure of the mud column is greater than the
formation pressure. A filter cake will build up across permeable formations as mud filtrate
flows from the wellbore to the formation. A pressure differential equal to the overbalance
will exist across this filter cake. Any part of the BHA which becomes embedded in the cake
will be subjected to a lower pressure than the remaining part of the BHA in the well. If the
contact area is large enough and the pressure differential high enough, then the BHA may
become differentially stuck.
If the drill string becomes differentially stuck, the resultant force required to free the stuck
pipe depends on the following factors :
• The level of overbalance between the mud column and formation.

• The thicker filter cake or larger pipe diameter will result in a larger contact area.
• The coefficient of friction between the filter cake and the pipe. The frictional force
tends to increase with time and therefore increase the overpull required to free the pipe.
In most cases it will not be possible to free differentially stuck pipe by working or jarring
because of the magnitude of the sticking force

If cuttings are not removed from the well, they will settle around the drill string, generally
the BHA, causing the hole to pack-off and the pipe to become stuck. This problem will
become worse when overgauge holes are drilled with a resultant decrease in annular
velocity. The cuttings will build up in washouts and eventually slough back into the hole.
While drilling high angle wells, the cuttings have a tendency to accumulate on the low side
of the hole. Cutting beds are formed which are not easily removed. While tripping out of
the hole, the cuttings will be dragged up in front of the top collar or stabilizer, until the
hole packs off or the pipe is pulled firmly into a bed of cuttings.
While drilling vertical wells, hole cleaning will be adequately provided when the circulation
rate is higher than the slip velocity of the cuttings.

Shales are the most common formation type which can lead to stuck pipe. The stability of
shale formations vary according to their water content and chemical composition, angle of
the bedding planes, in-situ stresses and pore pressure. Shales can be categorized either as
brittle/sloughing or swelling shales. The brittle or sloughing shales basically fail by breaking
into pieces and sloughing into the hole. This process can be identified by large amounts of
shale on the shakers at bottoms up and a combination of excessive drag and high levels of
fill during trips.
__________________________________________________________________________
Young and reactive shales can swell as the result of a chemical reaction with water known
as hydration. In severe cases, such as Gumbo drilling, the hole can only be cleaned if
controlled drilling rates are adhered to. When subjected to sufficient free water, Gumbo
shales can expand to several times their original volume.
16.1.4 Key Seating

A keyseat can be caused by the drill string rubbing against the formation. The body and
tool joints of the drill pipe wear a groove in the formation. The high tension in the drill
string prevents lateral movement and the wear is therefore confined to a narrow groove.
During tripping, the BHA may be pulled into this groove and result in a stuck pipe
situation.
Doglegs can result in key seats as the drill string is forced into contact with the formation.
Ledges can also provide points of continuous contact and therefore cause key seats. The
number of rotating hours as well as the weight of the drill string below the dog leg will
affect the severity of the key seat.

Undergauge hole can result when attempting to maximize the length of a bit run in abrasive
formations. This could lead to the bit and stabilizers being worn undergauge. While
tripping in with a new bit and stabilizers the new full gauge assembly can jam into the
undergauge hole and become stuck.
Formations drilled with a limber BHA may appear to be slick when pulling out, but when
running a stiffer BHA, the newly drilled hole acts as if it were undergauge.

Stuck pipe can occur when drilling salt formations due to the salts plastic nature. Plastic
salt flow can occur at anytime, however, it is most commonly a problem at the top of the
salt formation, on the flanks of salt domes or when the mud weight is reduced.
16.2 Prevention of Stuck Pipe
16.2.1 General
Many stuck pipe incidents could be avoided by more careful pre-spud planning and greater
care at the well site. The guidelines listed below are primarily directed towards well site
personnel.
• Keep drill string moving in open hole, reciprocating and rotating when possible.
• During tight hole situations, be patient. Inform the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor
immediately of the condition.
• Circulate sooner than later when tripping, if hole conditions deteriorate.
• Maintain mud properties in line with the mud program.
__________________________________________________________________________
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should always be on the rig floor for at least the
first 10 stands out, the last 10 stands in and during any problem sections of the hole.
• As a rule of thumb, when pulling through tight hole, do not pull more than half the
weight of the drill collars below the jars. The overpull can be gradually increased, each
time checking that the pipe can still move freely down.
• On tripping in, always pick up the kelly and wash/ream at least the last stand to bottom.
• Circulate the hole clean prior to tripping out.
• Graphically record the depths and magnitudes of excessive torque and overpull during
trips.
• Perform wiper trips according to predetermined procedures or as hole conditions
require. Consider short trips to wipe newly drilled hole in reactive or mobil formations.
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should ensure the driller knows how the jars
operate.
• Shale shakers should be monitored regularly by the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor to
observe the shape, quantity and condition of the cuttings.
The general rig site guidelines listed above should be analyzed by both the Halliburton
Drilling Supervisor and Drilling Contractor.

The guidelines listed below are the preventative measures with regards to differentially
stuck pipe.
• Monitor the hydrostatic differential pressure across permeable formations. Use “d”
exponent trend lines, gas levels, (trip and connection), gas and cuttings to indicate
changing formation pressures.
• Use the lowest practical mud weight especially while drilling permeable formations.
• Use spiral drill collars to reduce the wall contact area of the BHA.
• Maintain a tough, thin filter cake and keep drill solids content to a minimum.
• Always stabilize the BHA to centralize the BHA in potential problem areas.
• Minimize the necessary length of the drill collars in the BHA and utilize additional
HWDP for weight as necessary.
• Keep the pipe moving, (reciprocation/rotation), in open hole.
• Consider the use of Measurement-While-Drilling (MWD) tool rather than single shot
surveys to minimize duration of stationary pipe-to-wall contact.

• When circulating bottoms up prior to a trip, ensure the shakers are relatively free of
cuttings. Rotating and reciprocating the pipe will assist in hole cleaning by disturbing
the cutting beds in inclined sections of the wells.
__________________________________________________________________________
• If a mud pump goes down, stop drilling unless the required annular velocity can be
maintained by one pump to effectively clean the hole. Consider pulling into the casing
shoe if drilling cannot continue or consider reaming the hole if hole cleaning was
inadequate and one pump will not clean the hole.
• A hole cleaning problem can be identified by the following :
◊ Excessive overpulls on connections/trips.
◊ Reduced overpull with pumps on.
◊ Excessive fill on trips.
◊ Erratic/increasing torque while drilling.
◊ Low volume of cuttings at shakers.
• In high angle wells, low viscosity/heavy pill combinations should be considered to
• assist in cleaning the hole.
• Always keep the casing sump to a minimum to reduce cuttings build up while drilling
the next interval. Review hydraulics/bit nozzle program if hole cleaning is ineffective.
• Control instantaneous ROP to a suitable level to allow efficient cuttings removal.
• If using steerable drilling assemblies, it is possible that cutting beds have formed. It is
advisable, if possible, to rotate the string prior to pulling out of the hole .

• Reactive/unstable formations can result in the following:
◊ Excessive drag on trips.

◊ Fill on trips.
◊ Large cuttings volume at shakers.
◊ High torque levels.
◊ Increasing MBT levels in WBM.
◊ Water phase salinity changes in OBM.
◊ Overgauge hole.
• Maintenance of mud properties must be performed to allow optimum
encapsulation/inhibition of reactive shales.
• Always trip with caution through swelling formations and ream any tight spots on the
trip in.
• Tight hole depths must be logged by the Driller.
• Wiper trips should be conducted regularly according to pre-determined procedures,
with additional trips being made if required.
• In tight hole situations, considerations of the potential of stuck pipe risk should be
made before dropping a single shot survey.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.2.5 Key Seating
• Always ream any severe doglegs, before key seats develop.
• Consider using a string reamer in the assembly to wipe any build section or dogleg.
• The string reamer must be larger than the drill pipe tool joint and smaller than the
collars.

• Prior to and after each trip - gauge the bit and all stabilizers.
• Consider reaming all of portions of a hole section drilled by an undergauge bit to
prevent bit pinching.
• Exercise caution when running a BHA of increased stiffness.

• The use of eccentric bits can be used effectively when drilling salt intervals.
• When drilling into a salt interval, pull above it immediately and treat/weight up mud as
required. The top 20 m or 65 ft should be drilled with caution with constant reaming
unless the formation characteristics are well known.
16.3 Freeing Stuck Pipe
16.3.1 General
When the drill string becomes stuck, the probability of freeing the pipe is directly related to
the first actions taken by the driller. The following points should be communicated to the
driller to make him fully aware of the following points:
• If the drill string was moving prior to becoming stuck, always try to move the pipe in
the opposite direction.
• Jar the pipe as soon as possible and in the opposite direction to the pipe movement
before becoming stuck.
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should inform the driller of the maximum safe pull
for each assembly run.
• If the pipe is assumed to be differentially stuck, work right hand torque and slump the
pipe. If the bit is on bottom, continue working the pipe by pulling up to the maximum
and jarring.
• Ensure the pits and mud chemicals are ready to mix a pipe freeing pill and spot the pill
as soon after becoming stuck as possible.
An incorrect identification of the stuck pipe mechanism lowers the chances of successfully
freeing the pipe. The following are examples of the type of questions which should be
asked, before determining the correct course of action.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Is there a potential well control problem?
• What was the exact operation when the pipe became stuck?
• Do the mud loggers/driller’s data recorders show anything which may allow the correct
identification of the stuck pipe mechanism?
• What have the hole characteristics been during drilling/tripping?
• Has there been any recent changes to the mud properties?
• Where has the pipe become stuck?
Differential sticking can be recognized if:
• The pipe was stationary before sticking.

• Permeable formations are known to be across the BHA.
• There is a significantly high mud fluid loss.
• There is a significantly high overbalance.
• Full circulation is possible.
• Reciprocation and rotation is not possible.
• The pipe was stationary for a long period of time prior to getting stuck.
To free the pipemechanically:
• If the bit is off bottom, the pipe should be slumped with right hand torque held in it.
This technique should be applicable in most cases as the pipe usually gets stuck when
the slips are set during connections or tripping.
• If the bit is on bottom, then pull and jar the pipe. Right hand torque should again be
applied. The pipe should be pulled to the maximum safe limit as per Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor’s instructions.
To free the pipe withspotting fluids:
• Sufficient volume should be mixed to cover the BHA, allowing for some hole
enlargement plus 50+ bbl to allow for gradual fluid movement while waiting on pipe to
free.
• When possible, the spotting fluid should be 0.02 s.g. or 0.2 ppg heavier than the mud to
prevent migration.
• When spotting the fluid leave a reserve volume inside the pipe.
• Displace 100 liters or 1-2 bbl from the pipe into the annulus every half hour and
continue to work the pipe. Slack off approximately 5 tons or 10,000 lbs and apply
right hand torque. The amount of right hand torque should be roughly 1/2 a turn for
every 300 m or 1,000 ft of free pipe. Release the torque and pick up to neutral and
repeat this procedure.
__________________________________________________________________________
• If the pipe does not free after 48 hours or if economic considerations dictate, then
further procedures may have to be implemented.
• Avoid excessive jarring, especially down jarring.
To free the pipe by reducing the hydrostatic pressure:
The circulating system mud weight can be reduced by dilution. This process is time
consuming and is limited by well control requirements.
The “U”-tube method can be applied to reduce the equivalent hydrostatic pressure at the
stuck point without reducing the full circulating system mud weight. This is accomplished
by displacing a pre-determined volume of mud in the drill pipe to a lighter fluid such as
water. The fluid level height in the annulus can therefore be reduced under controlled
conditions using the “U”-tube theory. This procedure may plug the bit nozzles and cannot
be used when floats are run in the string.
16.3.3 Soluble Formations

If the drillstring is stuck in chalk or limestone formations, an inhibited hydrochloric acid pill
may be spotted around the stuck point. The acid pill dissolves the formation, allowing the
pipe to be pulled free. The maximum time for the pill to work is 2 hours. A water spacer
should be used to prevent contamination of the mud. If successful, the retrieved drill string
may have to be inspected due to the corrosiveness of the acid. Similar safety precautions to
those detailed in Chapter 2, Section 7, Subsection 2, should be adhered to when mixing the
pill.
16.3.4 Plastic Salt Formations

If the drill string is stuck in a salt formation, then a fresh water pill can be spotted around
the stuck point which dissolves the salt.
• The fresh water pill should be large enough to cover the BHA and leave 1/2 that
volume in the pipe as reserve volume.
• The reserve volume should be displaced into the annulus at a rate of 10 spm every 10
minutes.
• Maximum pull should be kept on the pipe while the pill is in place.
• Jarring up should be avoided as this action can aggravate the situation.
• Use a spacer ahead of the pill if using oil based mud.
• If reactive shales are exposed above the salt interval, a reduced pill volume should be
considered to prevent unnecessary destabilization of these shales.
16.3.5 Key Seating

If the drillstring is stuck in a key seat, the following characteristics can be recognized:
• Stuck pipe will only occur on the trip out, not on the trip in.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Tight hole sections can be identified with the downhole positions of the stabilizers and
tool joints of the BHA.
• Circulation is possible.
To free the pipe:
• It must be worked down. If the drilling jars are below the stuck point, the use of
surface jars should be considered.
• If the pipe can move down and can be rotated, then rotate slowly with minimum
tension applied and attempt to pull the BHA past the key seat.
16.4 Stuck Casing
If a casing string becomes stuck while running in and it cannot be freed, the following
factors must be considered:
• If the casing shoe is not too far from the intended setting depth and is not across a
permeable formation, considered cementing it in place using emergency hanger/seal
assemblies. The remaining casing program and proposed casing shoe depths may have
to be revised.
• If the casing shoe is far from the intended setting depth and does not cover permeable
or low fracture gradient formations, an additional casing string may be required. This
obviously depends on whether the well can still be successfully evaluated/completed
and whether or not an extra casing string can be accommodated.
16.5 Methods of Locating Stuck Point
16.5.1 Stretch Method

A simple method of determining the stuck point is to stretch the pipe and use stretch charts
or calculation to estimate the lowest possible free point. The general procedure is:
• Pull sufficient tension to overcome the weight of the pipe in the hole. Mark the pipe
point A and note the weight indicator reading.
• Pull further tension and slack off to the same weight indicator reading as above. Mark
the pipe point B. The difference accounts for friction in the system. Draw a line midway
between these points, point C and use it as a base line for measuring.
• Apply the same procedure with equal steps of increasing tension, recording the distance
from point C to the new midpoints.
• Average the elongation per average pull.
Calculate the free point
M = FPC K MM
P
__________________________________________________________________________
• Drill collars and heavy weight drill pipe are not included in the calculation. Only thin
walled tubulars such as drill pipe, tubing and casing can be considered.
• The drill pipe above the stuck point is in tension and not compression.
• There has been no slippage at the stuck point while pulling additional tension to obtain
stretch.
• No permanent elongation has taken place and the drill pipe will return to its original
length on releasing the tension.
16.5.2 Free Point Indicator Tool

A free point indicator tool (FPIT) can be run on electric wireline to find the stuck point. In
this method the FPIT can determine pipe stretch or rotation at any depth by applying
stretch and torque to the pipe. The operation is monitored at surface and depth control is
provided by a casing collar locator tool (CCL).
The general procedures for running a FPIT are:
• Prior to running, check anchor tips for wear and of the correct size for the drill pipe
used.
• By using the stretch method, check approximately where the pipe is stuck.
• Pick up to the neutral weight of the pipe above the stuck point. Mark the pipe point A.
• Pick up to the neutral weight of the pipe plus the stretch required. Mark the pipe point
B.
• To prevent confusion the following instructions should be written clearly for the
Driller:
◊ Pull pipe to point B, take reading.

◊ Release tension, go down below point A and pick back up to point A.
◊ Apply required torque, work down torque using tongs. Pull up to point A
before taking reading.
◊ Release torque. Record number of turns that come out of pipe. Pull back to
point A.
• Run FPIT and take stretch/torque measurements from both above and below the
anticipated stuck point taking as many readings as possible.
• Plot depth versus the percentage of surface torque and pull transmitted downhole and
determine stuck point.
16.6 Fishing Operations
16.6.1 Fishing Economics

There will generally be four options to consider after considerable efforts have been made
to free the stuck pipe:
__________________________________________________________________________
• Continue attempts to free pipe.
• Back-off above free point, run fishing assembly.
• Back-off above free point, plug and sidetrack well.
• Back-off above free point, abandon well.
The decision to back-off and run a fishing assembly will depend on the probability off
success, cost of sidetrack and daily costs while fishing.
The cost of sidetracking is calculated using the following parameters :
• Cost of the fish left in hole.

• Cost of backing off, including wireline unit, back off shot and rig time.
• Cost of cement plug, including time to run cement stinger, spot plug, WOC,
tag/test/dress plug and make up kick-off assembly.
• Cost of failed plug - additional 25% contingency should cover this scenario
• Cost of sidetracking and re-drilling lost footage.
The probability of fishing success is difficult to estimate. An estimate of 50% can be
considered acceptable for most average situations .
The following equation can be used to determine the length of time for which it is effective
to fish :
Economic Fishing Time (days) = Cost of Sidetrack * Probability of Fishing Success
Daily Costs while Fishing
The cost of sidetrack = Backoff cost. Plug cost + Kick off + cost of fish + Redrill cost.
16.6.2 Fishing Tools - Standard Wellsite Inventory

The following inventory should always be available at the rig site if logistics preclude
convenient access to fishing services:
• Fishing jars to match the drill collar size in use.

• Bumper subs to match the drill collar size in use.
• Overshot and oversize guides with grapples, pack-offs, basket and extension guides to
catch all diameters of tools in the hole.
• Relevant sized spears during casing running/pulling operations.
• Taper taps.
• Junk baskets and reverse circulating junk baskets for relevant hole sizes.
• Fishing magnets.
• Lead impression blocks.
• Mills.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Fishing tools for logging tools - supplied by Halliburton’s or other logging service
company.
Ancillary fishing tools such as oil or mechanical fishing jars, jar accelerators and chemical
cutters will be supplied by the fishing contractor. There is a great deal of ancillary fishing
tools available to meet Halliburton’s needs and they should be called out as and when
required. Due to the accumulating rental costs of such equipment, it is not practical to
maintain stocks of all the available fishing tools at the rig site.
16.6.3 Standard Practices

A successful fishing job depends primarily on the correct size of the fishing tool run.
Therefore it is essential that the following guidelines are followed :
• Record the O.D.'s, I.D.'s, lengths and tool joint threads of all string components run in
the hole.
• Draw a complete sketch of all equipment run in the hole with the above dimensions.
• The Halliburton Drilling Supervisor should be familiar with the Drilling Contractor’s
supplied fishing tools.
• Circulate the hole clean if a twist off occurs and hole conditions allow.
• When a twist off occurs and after the string is POH to surface, check retrieved fish
dimensions and condition.
• Two typical fishing assemblies are shown below:
Fishing Tool Fishing Tool

Oil Jar Bumper Sub
3 x DC's Oil Jar
Jar Accelerator OR 1 - DC's
HWDP Stab
DP 2 - DC's
Kelly Accelerator
HWDP
DP
Kelly
• Record the following parameters prior to engaging the fish:
◊ Up/down and rotating string weights with pumps on and off.

◊ Free rotating torque of string.
◊ Pipe stretch, and stroke of bumper sub ( if run) and jars.
__________________________________________________________________________
◊ Establish circulating rates and pressures.
The guidelines listed below should be followed when using the appropriate equipment.
16.6.3.1Overshot
• Run the overshot to the top of the fish, butdo not tag fish.
• Circulate for a few minutes to clean the top of the fish. Do not use excessive flow rates
as hole washout could occur.
• Engage the fish, while maintaining minimum pump rate. Continually watch the weight
indicator and stand pipe pressure and rotate the string very slowly.
• An increase in pump pressure should be noted as the overshot lowers over the fish.
• Use spiral grapple in preference to basket grapple, if fish O.D. allows. (More pull can
be applied with a spiral grapple).
• Use an oversize guide or wall hook in large diameter or washed out hole intervals.
• Run an extension sub if the top of fish may be damaged.
16.6.3.2 Spear
• Execute fishing job as per the first two steps shown above.
• Install a pack- off if circulation is required after engaging the fish.
• Install a spear stop if jarring is required and if hole conditions allow.
16.6.3.3 Taper Tap

• Execute fishing job as per step two above for the overshot.
• To engage fish apply right hand torque.
• Select tool size to engage fish in the middle of the taper tap.
• Run a safety joint to allow string release if problems occur.
• Consider use as alast resort as disengagement is impossible.
16.6.3.4 Junk Basket

• Reverse circulating type is preferable.
• Use low parameters such as WOB of 2-4 tons or 4,000 - 8,000 lbs , 50 RPM and 1000
l/m or 6 BPM.
• Cut core, say 50 cm or 2 ft, stop rotation and circulation, release torque from string
and pick-up to break core.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.6.3.5 Magnet
• Can be run on wireline or drill pipe.
• Run magnet to bottom, circulate if run on pipe, allow junk to settle and then collect
junk.
16.6.3.6 Jarring
• Keep all unnecessary personnel off the rig floor.
• If possible, install kelly and lock table.
• Allow jars to trip first at required overpull, before pulling more.
• If a surface jar is used, set at the lightest tonnage and increase as required.
16.6.4 Stuck Logging Tools

If wireline tools get stuck in the open hole, either the tool itself or the cable is stuck.
Sticking mechanisms are generally the same as for stuck pipe. The fishing tools required
should be included in the service contract.
The general guidelines below should be observed in conjunction with running wireline
tools:
• Always ensure logging service company has the required fishing tools at the rig site.
• Record and know the weak point tension limit, cable tension limit and tool weight in
mud prior to running the tools.
• Check normal logging tension every 300 m or 1,000 ft while running. Calculate the
maximum safe weak point pull.
• Do not repeat log intervals unless hole conditions allow.
• Do not run radioactive tools if hole conditions are poor. Always condition the hole
prior to logging.
• Do not pull the wireline in two. Maximum pull on the wireline should stay safely within
reasonable cablehead tension limits.
• Strip over the wireline to the fish with the appropriate fishing tools on the drillstring.
16.6.5 Back-Off Procedures
16.6.5.1 General
For a successful back-off, the back-off point should be selected on the basis of the deepest
desired tool joint depth that has been determined to be free both in tension and torsion.
Additionally, select a tool joint which had been broken on the last trip.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.6.5.2 Safety Considerations
Adhere to the following safety considerations:
• Keep tong and slip dies clean, sharp and use the correct size.
• Check condition of tong and back-up lines.
• Tie the slip handles together. This will prevent them from jumping out of the rotary if
the pipe parts further up the hole, (in tension).
• Latch the elevators around the pipe allowing the pipe to rotate when applying torque.
• Check that no residual torque remains in the string when picking up the pipe after the
back-off.
16.6.5.3 String Shot Size

The string shot size will always be an estimate. The size of the shot must allow the pipe to
be backed-off without splitting the pipe. The shot size will be recommended by the service
company performing the back-off procedure. The shot size can be increased if the initial
attempt fails.
16.6.5.4 Weight
The suitable weight condition at the point of back-off is neutral. To determine this weight,
buoyancy effects from the mud must be ignored as buoyancy only acts on the bottom of the
string. Therefore, the air weight of the pipe above the back-off point must be held to obtain
this condition. This condition is probably never obtained, however, the pipe must be either
in the neutral condition or slight tension - never compression.
16.6.5.5 Torque
The reverse torque to be applied depends on the pipe size, length, type and condition.
Table 1.16 summarizes general rules of thumb:
Length of Free Pipe (m / ft ) Number of Turns

0 - 1,220/ 0 - 4,000 1/4 to 1/2 per 305 m / 1,000 ft
1,220 - 2,745/ 4,000 - 9,000 1/2 to 3/4 per 305 m /1,000 ft
2,745 and greater/ 9,000 and greater 3/4 to 1 per 305 m /1,000 ft
Table 1.16 Estimated Turns Applied to Free Pipe
Doglegs in the hole above the free point may restrict the passage of torque, and may retain
some torque as it is released from surface. When this occurs, the torque meter needle will
move unevenly and it may not return to zero as the torque is released. This information is
very important and can be used when working reverse torque down the hole prior to
backing-off.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.6.5.6 Completing the Back-Off
With the tension and torque maintained in the pipe down to the intended point of back-off,
have the service company engineer spot the back-off shot at the desired point. Remove the
slips if they are in the rotary, maintain, or slack-off down to the back-off weight and
detonate the shot.
Following detonation the pipe usually spins free, however, if the pipe has only partially
back-off the following procedures should be followed:
• Apply half the original reverse torque. Torque should be lost in this process as the pipe
fully backs-off.
• If no loss in torque is observed, it usually indicates the incorrect weight. Correct this by
applying half the torque and `catch it' on the tongs. Pull the slips and adjust the weight.
At the correct weight, the torque load should relax. If the pipe is still not free, set the
slips and apply more reverse torque.
16.6.6 Chemical Cutters

Chemical cutters can be used to cut and allow retrieval of stuck tubing or drill pipe in a
well. The chemical cutter is run on wireline and contains a chemical compound that reacts
quickly and destructively on steel. The chemical sprays outward in a flat circular pattern
against the inside wall of the fish when activated from surface. Its use and effectiveness is
limited to the thickness of the steel being cut.
The operational guidelines are as follows:
• Run chemical cutter with a casing collar locator, (CCL), and centralizers.
• Do not exceed cable running speeds of 150 m per minute or 500 ft per minute .
• Apply tension to the tubing prior to activating the cutter.
• Do not fire the cutter less than 1.5 m or 5 ft above any solid obstructions in the tubing.
16.6.7 Milling Operations
16.6.7.1General
The following guidelines are general and apply to all milling operations:
• Rotate the milling assembly at least 0.3 m or 1 ft above fish.

• Use high RPM's, (100+), except when using taper mills and washover shoes, (+/-75).
In any case optimize milling rate with torque fluctuations.
• Mill with constant weight.
• Maintain turbulent flow in the annulus and pump hi-viscosity pills to clean hole
effectively.
• Install ditch magnets at the flowline and monitor weight of junk recovered.
• Run a junk sub in the milling assembly. Stabilize the assembly.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Work string occasionally to improve hole cleaning.
• Do not run jars as weight cannot be controlled accurately and “spudding” cannot be
carried out.
• Flush wellhead/BOP cavities on completion to remove metal cuttings.
16.6.7.2 Open Hole Milling

The following guidelines should be followed when milling junk in open hole:
• Mill O.D. should be between 1/8" to 1/4" less than open hole gauge diameter.
• Milling assembly should have at least 4-5 tons or 8,000 - 10,000 lbs of drill collars.
• Always run a junk sub to catch shavings an other pieces of metal.
16.6.7.3 Cased Hole Milling

The following guidelines should be followed when milling junk in cased hole:
• Use smooth tool joints and non rotating stabilizers to prevent unnecessary casing wear.
• During spudding, pick up kelly 1/2 to 1 m or 1-3 ft .
• The O.D. of the mill should be approximately the casing drift diameter.
• Use with no cutting material on its OD mills to minimize casing wear.
16.6.7.4 Tapered Mill

Tapered mills are used primarily to mill sections of collapsed or split pipe and to enlarge
restrictions through retainers, adapters, etc. A smaller tapered mill is usually run first,
followed by larger tapered mills until the final mill run is near to the internal diameter
desired.
The following guidelines should be adopted when using tapered mills:
• Always enter fish rotating slowly.

• Use light weight and monitor for torquing- up when parameters exceed high torque at
75 RPM.
• Increase rotation, to 100 RPM, when restriction has been enlarged.
16.6.7.5 Junk Mill

Junk mills are used more than any other type of mill. They can be used to mill almost any
type of metal junk. There are two types; regular junk mills for milling junk such as drill bit
cones and reamers. The second type is the heavy duty junk mill for milling more rugged
junk.
__________________________________________________________________________
16.6.7.6 Pilot Mill
Pilot mills are basically a combination of the tapered mill and junk mill. If a tubular fish has
a hole large enough to permit a guide member, a pilot mill is used. The pilot mill guide
stabilizes the milling tool away from the center point of the mill where cutting is not too
effective. Pilot mills are used to drill up or dress-off casing, drill pipe, etc.
16.6.7.7 Section Mill

Section mills are used to mill out a window in casing, preparatory to sidetracking a fish, or
they can be modified and used to cut pipe.
16.6.7.8 Rotary Mill

The rotary mill is used to mill over and around packers, drill collars, drill pipe, jars etc. It
can be run on drill pipe or washover pipe to free cutting over by milling; stuck drill strings,
packer slips, etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
17.0 EVALUATION
This section will be provided at a later date.
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 1 Evaluation
18.0 WELL ABANDONMENT AND SUSPENSION
18.1 Well Abandonment
18.1.1 General
18.1.2 Open Hole Plug Back
18.1.3 Cased Hole Plug Back
18.1.4 Perforated Casing Plug Back
18.2 Standard Practices When Setting Plugs
18.3 Well Suspension
18.3.1 General
18.3.2 Well Suspension General Procedure
_____________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 4 Well Abandonment and Suspension
18.1 Well Abandonment
18.1.1 General
All wells permanently abandoned must satisfy the local governmental regulations in the
particular area of operation. Generally, the abandonment process must effectively isolate
individual pressure zones and prohibit any potential leakage of formation fluid to surface. In
addition, all surface well head equipment above a minimum burial depth must be removed for
land operations. Offshore, all wellhead equipment and casing stubs must be removed to a
certain minimum depth below the mudline. Full abandonment records must be kept in addition
to a relevant abandonment schematic. The following guidelines are only general and it is
stressed that the actual abandonment procedures must be approved by the relevant local
government department.
18.1.2 Open Hole Plug Back

• Cement plugs should isolate any open hole permeable formation from 30 m or 100 ft
below the zone to a minimum of 60 m or 200 ft of cement above the zone of interest or as
required.
• The cement plugs should be tagged and weight tested with a drilling assembly from 5-10
tons or 10,000 - 20,000 lbs with the pump running. If the cement plug has been set in
stages, then weight test the final stage if required.
18.1.3 Cased Hole Plug Back

• The last casing shoe should be isolated with a 150 meter or 500 ft cement plug. A
minimum of 30 m or 100 ft above the casing shoe is required.
• Where a cement plug is required across a cut made through casing, the plug should cover
an interval of 50 m or 150 ft below the stub to 100 m or 300 ft above the stub. The plug
and casing should be pressure tested psi over the formation breakdown pressure. The
need to place a plug across a cut will be dependent on whether the cement top during the
original cementation reached the previous casing shoe. Should a plug not be necessary,
then a pressure test as outlined above should suffice.
• For high pressure wells, a cement retainer may be set in the casing squeeze cement volume
at 200 ft. or hole casing shoe and spot at least 150 ft. above the plug. This cement retainer
should be subsequently pressure tested as per the above guidelines.
• A final cement plug at least 30 m or 100 ft in length should be placed such that the top of
the plug is close to the surface for land wells or close to the mudline for offshore wells.
• If lost circulation was a problem during drilling, a bridge plug may be set 50 m or 150 ft
above the last casing shoe with at least 30 m or 100 ft of cement placed on top of the
bridge plug. This plug should also be pressure tested and 5- 10 tons or 10,000 -20,000 lbs
weight set on the bridge plug prior to setting the cement.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Well Abandonment and Suspension Page 2 of 4 August 1995
18.1.4 Perforated Casing Plug Back

• If a permanent production packer is set above the perforated interval, a mechanical plug
should be set in the packer and then a 30 m or 100 ft cement plug placed above the
packer.
• If it is not possible to set a mechanical plug, tubing should be stung into the packer and
30 m or 100 ft of cement squeezed into the perforations. A 30 m or 100 ft cement plug
should then be set above the permanent packer.
• If no permanent production packer has been set, a cement plug may be set across the
perforated interval from 30 m or 100 ft below the perforations to 50 m or 100 ft above
the interval. The plug should be weight and pressure tested.
• A bridge plug or cement retainer may be set, in addition the above cement plugs. If a
bridge plug is set it should be set 50 m or 150 ft above the perforations and dependent
upon the pressure regime, it should be pressure tested.
• Following the pressure test, 30 m or 100 ft of cement should be dumped on top of the
bridge plug. There is no need to locate or test this cement afterwards.
• If overpressured formations greater than 12 ppg are perforated and no permanent
production packer is set, a bridge plug or retainer is be set in addition to a cement plug.
Both these plugs must be tagged and is pressure tested.
• The bridge plug should be set in the casing above the liner, not more than 30 m or 100 ft
above the liner top.
• Once the well is plugged back, the casing strings should be cut with a mechanical cutter at
a point level with the base of the cellar for land operations or a minimum of 5 m or 15’
below the mudline for offshore wells.
18.2 Standard Practices When Setting Plugs
If possible use a caliper log volume for open hole plug volume calculations.
If no caliper log available, use 40% excess over open hole volume.
If lost circulation problems exist, plan for two cement plugs, the first acts as a barrier for
the second plug.
Use either 2-7/8" or 3-/2" tubing with a side-ported cementing sub centralizers and
scratchers for setting critical plugs. Avoid using drill pipe.
If drilling fluid is highly treated with lignosulfonate, which acts as a retarder, use the
largest practical spacer and allow for the extra setting time prior to weight testing.
Cement slurries should be “neat”.
_____________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 3 of 4 Well Abandonment and Suspension
18.3 Well Suspension
18.3.1 General
If the decision to suspend the well has been made, the procedure should be planned to enable
the well to be left for prolonged periods with the philosophy that re-entry into the well can be
easily performed.
Well caps and valves should have compatible ratings with upper casing head or tubing head
spools on surface wellhead equipment for temporary abandonment. Re-entry into the well
should be possible with wireline tools or snubbing equipment. This generally requires a
minimum bore of 2-1/8" at the top valve and adapter flange for onshore wells.
For offshore wells, suitable abandonment caps should be set in the subsea wellheads or
mudline suspension equipment after testing of isolation cement plugs for temporary
abandonments.
18.3.2 Well Suspension General Procedure

The general procedures to be utilized to allow the well to be temporarily suspended should
reflect the philosophy to ensure the well is safely isolated from any wellbore pressures and the
re-entry and cleanout of the wellbore will not be hindered by the suspension procedures.
These procedures should include the following considerations:
• Set a cement plug across the last casing shoe. The bottom of the plug should extend at
least 50 m or 150 ft into the open hole, and the plug length should be a minimum of 60 m
or 200 ft into the casing shoe. The plug should be tested as per the abandonment plug
testing procedures.
• Mud of sufficient mud weight should be left in the last string of casing to balance either
the maximum pore pressure through the cased hole interval or the open hole below the
deepest casing shoe.
• Depending on the expected duration of the well suspension, and on variations of the wells
status, the above temporary abandonment methods may be modified to satisfy permanent
well abandonment requirements.
• Temporary abandonments of offshore wells may also require the setting of mechanical
abandonment caps in the subsea wellhead or mudline suspension equipment and the
removal of the casing strings to the surface on non-platform wells. The use of a buoy or a
netguard to protect the abandoned well may be desirable and/or required based on local
governmental regulations.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Well Abandonment and Suspension Page 4 of 4 August 1995
19.0 Reporting and Documentation
Section 19.0 Contents
19.1 Reporting
19.1.2 General
19.1.3 Drilling Information Management System (DIMS) Data Base
19.2 Documentation
19.2.1 General
19.2.2 Daily Drilling Report
19.2.3 IADC Report
19.2.4 Mud and Stocks Report
19.2.5 Casing / Cementing Reports
19.2.6 Back Charge / Lost in Hole Report
19.2.7 API Mud Report
19.2.8 BHA Report
19.2.9 Geology Report
19.2.10 Mud Logger Report
19.2.11 Directional Surveys Report
19.2.12 Bit Record
19.2.13 Fuel / Lube Transfer / Inventory Report
_____________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 5 Reporting and Documentation
19.1 Reporting
19.1.2 General
The reporting of information daily is an integral part of the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor’s
and, when available, the Wellsite Drilling Engineer’s responsibilities. This daily flow of
information will provide information to both Halliburton’s and the Client’s management of the
progress of the operations at the wellsite
19.1.3 Drilling Information Management System (DIMS) Data Base
Halliburton has committed to utilize Munro Garret’s Drilling Information Management System
(DIMS) to capture information daily at the well site. DIMS is an integrated drilling database,
communications and engineering software package. DIMS will facilitate Halliburton’s current
required reporting and future needs for a review of historical information.
DIMS is a relational database consisting of over 85 tables, 80 set files and over 1250 data
elements. The system includes data entry for all aspects of the drilling operation including the
Daily Drilling Report, Geological, DST, Coring, Casing, Cementing, Pipe Tally, Mud Gas,
Cost Rental and other reports. It is versatile and is designed to work in any operating
environment including land, offshore and arctic conditions.
This system is designed to be the data input facility at the wellsite. Wellsite personnel use the
computer to replace paper reporting functions. Data collection at the source is important to
the accurate population of a corporate database. Easy menu driven entry screens provide pop-
up assisted data entry with error checking and validation, as well as quick reviewing, editing or
browsing of the database.
DIMS includes an integral communications package that operates under virtually any condition
from almost any location. Data can be sent/received to and from other DIMS systems using
land lines, satellites, cellular networks or push-to-talk half duplex radios. The data is
completely encrypted and compressed for confidentiality and efficient transmission.
Transmission rates of up to 19,200 baud are available, depending on the communications
equipment.
19.2 Documentation
19.2.1 General
The required reports to be provided by the Halliburton supervisors as a result of input into the
DIMS data base or other means is discussed below and is summarized in Table 1.9.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Reporting and Documentation Page 2 of 5 August 1995
REPORT GENERATED BY FREQUENCY SENT TO

Daily Drilling Report Halliburton Drilling Daily Exploration Office
Supervisor/Drilling Operations Base
Engineer
IADC Report Drilling Rig 12 Hours Operations Base
Contractor
Mud and Stocks Mud Engineer Daily Operations Base
Cement and Stocks Cementer Weekly, as Operations Base
required
Casing/Cementing Halliburton Drilling As required Operations Base
Reports Supervisor/Drilling
Engineer
Back Charge/Lost in Halliburton Drilling As required Operations Base
Hole Report Supervisor/Drilling
Engineer
Final Well Report Halliburton Drilling End of Well Operations
Engineer Base/Houston
Office
Geology Report Halliburton Wellsite Daily Exploration Office
Geologist Operations Base
Logging Report Mud Logger Daily Exploration Office
Operations Base
Table 19.1 General Reporting Requirements
19.2.2 Daily Drilling Report
The Daily Drilling Report is generated from the DIMS database. Reporting of information is
suggested to be compiled from 0600 hours of the previous day until 0600 Hr of the current
day. Specific requirements for transmittal of the report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.3 IADC Report
The IADC Report is to be filled out daily by the Drilling Contractor and provided to the
Halliburton Drilling Supervisor. After review by the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor, the
report is approved and signed. One copy is kept at the wellsite location and the other copy is
sent to Halliburton’s operations base/ shore base for the attention of the Halliburton Drilling
Superintendent/Operations Manager.
_____________________________________________________________________________
19.2.4 Mud and Stocks Reports
19.2.5 Casing / Cementing Reports
The Casing Report and Cementing Report are generated in the DIMS database. These reports
are generated after the running and cementing of the appropriate casing string. Specific
requirements for transmittal of the report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.6 Back Charge / Lost in Hole Report
This report is generated from the DIMS database on a daily basis.
19.2.7 API Mud Report
The API Mud Report is provided by the mud engineer or mud consultant. Input from this sheet
into the mud parameters and mud/chemical usage sections in the DIMS data base through the
Daily Drilling Report is made.
19.2.8 BHA Report
The BHA Report is generated from the DIMS database. Specific requirements for transmittal
of the report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.9 Geology Report
The Daily Geology Report is generated from Halliburton Geologist/Mud Loggers input into
the DIMS database. Reporting of information is suggested to be compiled from 0600 hours of
the previous day until 0600 hours of the current day. Specific requirements for transmittal of
the report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.10 Mud Logger Report
The Daily Mud Logger Report is generated from the Halliburton Mud Loggers input into the
DIMS database. Reporting of information is suggested to be compiled from 0600 hours of the
previous day until 0600 hours of the current day. Specific requirements for transmittal of the
report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.11 Directional Surveys Report
The Directional Survey Report is generated from the DIMS database. Specific requirements
for transmittal of the report will be provided in the Well Program.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Reporting and Documentation Page 4 of 5 August 1995
19.2.12 Bit Record
The Bit Record is generated from the DIMS database. Specific requirements for transmittal of
the report will be provided in the Well Program.
19.2.13 Fuel/Lube Transfer/Inventory Report
The Fuel/Lube Transfer/Inventory Report is to be filled out daily by the Halliburton Drilling
Supervisor and Halliburton Materials Coordinator. This report documents fuel transfers for
accounting of the fuel/lube utilization by the rig, vessels and other users. One copy is kept at
the wellsite location and the other copy is sent to Halliburton’s operations base/ shore base to
the attention of the Halliburton Drilling Superintendent/Operations Manager.
_____________________________________________________________________________
20.0 RIG MOBILIZATION / DEMOBILIZATION
20.1 Rig Mobilization
20.1.1 General
20.1.2 Land Rig
20.1.3 Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit (MODU)
20.1.4 Platform Rig
20.1.5 Other Contractor Equipment
20.2 Rig Demobilization
20.2.1 General
20.2.2 Land Rig
20.2.4 Platform Rig
20.3 Towing
20.3.1 General
20.3.2 Wet Tow
20.3.3 Dry Tow
20.4 Derrick Barge / Other Hoisting Equipment
20.4.1 General
20.4.2 Derrick Barge
20.4.3 Other Hoisting Equipment

__________________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 8 Rig Mobilization/Demobilization
20.1 Rig Mobilization
20.1.1 General
The mobilization of a rig and other supporting equipment to the wellsite location may take
considerable logistical and transportation resources. The wellsite location may vary from a
rural location in a developed country to dense rainforest, mountain/wilderness area, desert
or a located offshore in open water in varying water depths. The type of location will
require knowledge of local area and significant pre-planning to minimize associated costs
and potential delays in the of rig mobilization. An environmental impact study may be
necessary to document the impact of the drilling operations on the surrounding area prior
to approval of the program.
Rig selection will be critical in optimizing the mobilization/demobilization and operation of
the rig on a remote. Specialized rigs have been developed over the years for both remote
land and offshore locations to meet the demands of today’s proposed wellsite locations in
these less accessible and more hostile areas.
The costs of rig mobilization should be estimated after considerable discussions with the rig
contractor, local construction companies and other sources of heavy equipment and
transportation equipment such as helicopters, barges/tugs and trucks. These contractors
will have a much better idea on historical costs and associated timing of such mobilization
based on past historical data of similar operations.
20.1.2 Land Rig

The mobilization of a rig to a land wellsite location will generally require the construction
of access roads off existing infrastructure roads to allow the transportation of the rig by
truck. In areas where it is uneconomic to build a road off the existing infrastructure,
consideration will have to be made to transportation by barge, airlifting by helicopter or a
combination of barge and air transportation for. Desert and/or tundra locations may
require long movements over the sand/tundra with the use of specialized wheeled or bladed
tracks to minimize unit area loading.
The mobilization of rigs and equipment to remote locations with minimal infrastructure will
significantly increase mobilization costs over more accessible locations. In these types of
locations, mobilization/demobilization costs may be the single most costly operation in the
drilling of the well.

The mobilization of MODUs to a location is generally done with either wet and/or dry
towing by marine vessels. The drilling unit will be required to be fully insured during these
movements and the insurers generally require marine and naval architects to document the
proper preparation of the drilling unit to required specifications prior to these moves.
These considerations include:
• Number and/or required minimum horsepower of the tow vessel(s).

__________________________________________________________________________
Rig Mobilization/Demobilization Page 2 of 8 August 1995
• Seafastening of the rig an/or equipment deck loads and their arrangement on the deck
of the rig and/or preparation and securing of the hatches/watertight doors.
• Anticipated weather and environmental conditions during the tow period and
geographic location for the rig move.
• Anticipated bottom conditions and bathymetry for seabed penetration or anchoring at
the proposed wellsite location.
The rig will be moved to the location under the supervision of personnel with the proper
licensing and certifications, however, the insurers may require their own representative to
be present. Prior bathymetry survey of the sea floor adjacent to the wellsite location,
including a shallow hazard and sparker survey, will generally be required to ensure a clear
bottom and the absence of potential shallow gas hazards.
Once on site, operating guidelines to jacking-up and pre-loading and/or the running of
anchors and de-ballasting to drilling draft will be followed based on design conditions and
the rig’s operations manual.
If the rig is to be mobilized adjacent to an existing structure, subsea well or template
and/or possibly cantilevered over a structure, consideration should be given to the shut-in
of all wells and bleed off of pressure above the surface controlled subsurface safety valve
(SCSSV) or a plug set in an appropriate nipple prior to the movement or heavy lifting of
rig components over or the well bay area or wells.
If the rig was mobilized from another country/area, there may be certain governmental
regulations and customs that should be addressed such as declaration of value and possible
inspection of the MODU.
20.1.4 Platform Rig

Mobilization of a rig onto a platform or other similar structure will first require that the
following criteria be considered :
• The structural design of the platform must be such that the anticipated static and
dynamic drilling loads imposed by the rig will be within the proper safety factor
criteria, including API specifications. Generally, this will require consultation between
the platform’s structural design engineers and the rig engineer to confirm the platform
is adequate and the rig can be set up on the platform.
• The operation of a platform rig on a producing platform should have a simultaneous
operations plan approved by the Client and the governmental regulatory agencies.
• Consideration should be given to the shut-in of all wells and bleed off of pressure above
the surface controlled subsurface safety valve (SCSSV) or set a plug in an appropriate
nipple prior to the movement or heavy lifting of rig components over the well bay area..
Consideration should also be made to the use of steel plate on the top deck of the platform
if it is grated to prevent heavy objects from dropping through the grating onto the
cellar/production deck in the well bay area.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Other equipment to be mobilized may include snubbing units, coiled tubing units, lift boats
etc. to platforms or similar structures. Lift boats are generally limited to maximum water
depths of 36 m or 120 ft . Procedures for the mobilization of these types of equipment onto
or next to the platform or other structures is similar to that discussed in the preceding
sections.
20.2 Rig Demobilization
20.2.1 General
The demobilzation of a drilling unit from either an onshore or offshore location follows the
mobilization procedure in reverse order. Regulations may require returning the wellsite to
natural a condition as possible as it was prior to the building/preparation of the location
governmental agencies.
20.2.2 Land Rig

Prior to land rig demobilization, it is imperative that the proper abandonment procedures
have been followed and the well has been properly abandoned, either permanently or
temporarily with the appropriate procedures as per Section 18, Well Abandonment and
Suspension. These procedures should be documented in the Daily IADC Report and the
Daily Drilling Report.
The rig components and surplus casing and other consumable supplies will then be moved
off the location by truck or other means.

Prior to MODU rig demobilization, it is imperative that the proper abandonment
procedures have been followed and the well has been properly abandoned, either
permanently or temporarily with the appropriate procedures as per Section 18, Well
Abandonment and Suspension. These procedures should be documented in the Daily IADC
Report and the Daily Drilling Report.
Once prepared, operating guidelines to the jacking-down and/or de-ballasting of the rig and
the pulling of anchors will have to be adhered to based on design conditions and the rig’s
operations manual.
If the rig had been mobilized adjacent to an existing structure, subsea well or template
and/or possibly cantilevered over a structure, consideration should be given to the shut-in
of all wells and bleed off of all pressure above the surface controlled subsurface safety
valve (SCSSV) or a plug set in an approporiate nipple prior to the movement or heavy
lifting of rig components over the well bay area. For floating MODU’s that have left a
subsea wellhead through a temporary abandonment, consideration should be given to the
utilization of positioning survey equipment to make sure the anchor chains do not hook or
the subsea wellhead.
__________________________________________________________________________
Consideration should also be made address governmental customs regulations of the
country if the rig is to leave the territorial waters. These include declaration of value and
potential inspection of the MODU.
20.2.4 Platform Rig

Prior to platform rig demobilization, it is imperative that the proper abandonment
procedures have been followed and the well has been properly abandoned, either
permanently or temporarily with the appropriate procedures as per Section 18, Well
Abandonment and Suspension.. These procedures should be documented in both the Daily
IADC Report and the Daily Drilling Report.
Consideration should be given to the shut-in of all wells and bleed off of pressure above
the sub-surface controlled safety valve (SCSSV) or plug set in an approporiate nipple prior
to the movement or heavy lifting of rig components over or the well bay area.
The use of a derrick barge or other similar crane be required to offload the platform rig
components in a manner similar to the mobilization.

Other equipment to be demobilized may include snubbing units, coiled tubing units, lift
boats etc. from platforms or similar structures. Procedures and considerations for these
types of equipment are similar to items previously discussed in the preceding sections.
However, existing platform cranes are normally utilized for demobilization of this
equipment situated on the platform.
20.3 Towing
20.3.1 General
The towing of MODU’s and/or barge type supported drilling units generally require
specialized marine vessels for towing. Towing can be accomplished through wet towing or
a dry tow. A wet tow is the actual pulling or pushing of the drilling unit through the water
while the barge or hull of the unit is floating. Dry towing includes the placement of the
drilling unit on a specialized heavy-lift vessel or a submersible barge which is a capable of
handling the displacement of the MODU or other type of drilling unit. The self-propelled
heavy-lift vessel transports the rig close to the proposed wellsite location to a sheltered
area where it can be safely offloaded through de-ballasting and float-off of the MODU.
Generally, tows over long distances may be more economical with these type of vessels in
the dry tow mode due to the speed of the heavy-lift vessel versus a wet tow.
20.3.2 Wet Tow

The wet towing of MODUs or other barge supported drilling units require specialized
marine vessesls. Theses vessels generally include the following types of marine vessesls
with varying horsepower as shown below:
__________________________________________________________________________________
• Anchor Handling/Towing/Work/Supply vessel- 56 m - 65 m or (185 - 205 ft) in length
with horsepower rating of 4,000 - 10,000 HP. These vessels generally have a bollard
pull of between 70 and 120 tons.
• Coastal/Ocean-going Tugs- 32 m -75 m or (120 - 246 ft) in length with horsepower
ratings of 4,000 - 22,000 HP. These vessels generally have a bollard pull of between
50 and 185 tons.
• Pusher-type Tugs- 20 m - 27 m or (65 - 90 ft) in length with horsepower rating of
700 - 1800 HP. These vessels generally have a bollard pull of between 5 and 25 tons.
Wet tow speeds of MODUs generally vary between 2.5 - 6.0 knots depending on the
following factors:
• MODU hull design

• Available tow horsepower of the unit(s)
• Currents
• Other weather conditions such as sea state, wind, etc.
Discussion with the rig contractor selected will give a better idea of the anticipated tow
speed based on historical data.
20.3.3 Dry Tow

The other method of mobilization of MODUs or other barge mounted types of drilling
units is through a dry tow. Mobilization of a MODU 3,000 - 4,500 km (2,000 -3,000
miles) or more, is generally more economic when consideration is made for the rig dayrate.
These heavy-lift vessels are generally capable of transporting one large semisubmersible
MODU or up to two smaller type jack-up type MODUs or barge type drilling units as a
single cargo. The characteristics of these heavy-lift vessels include the following:
• Overall vessel length of 139 - 173 m (456 - 568 ft) with 101 - 132 m (331 - 502 ft)
length of cargo deck length and 32 - 40 m (105 - 135 ft) cargo deck width.
• Maximum 10,000 - 33,000 tons (20,000,000 - 66,000,000 lbs) cargo capacity.
Overhangs of 15 - 23 m or (50 - 75 ft) on each side of the hull is possible. Detailed
dynamic and static calculations must be made to insure the overall stability of the cargo
on the vessel and thorough seafastening of the cargo must be made.
• Dry tow speeds of 12 - 13 knots
The MODU or other barge type drilling unit is generally loaded onto the heavy-lift vessel
first by the de-ballasting of the heavy-lift vessel until the cargo deck is at appropriate draft
below the water surface. The floating MODU is then towed over the hull of the heavy-lift
vessel. The heavy-lift vessel is then ballasted slowly up to the transport draft with the
MODU sitting on the deck of the heavy-lift vessel. The MODU or the cargo is then
properly seafastened by the welding of braces and other type supports between the heavy-
lift vessel and the MODU. Inspection of this fastening, both visually and non-destructive
__________________________________________________________________________
testing (NDT), is generally performed prior to acceptance of the seafastening by the
insurers.
Additionally, submersible barges are available with deck lengths up to 140 m or (460 ft)
and 36 m or (118 ft) widths and cargo capacities of up to 24,000 tons or (48,000,000 lbs)
to provide similar dry tows.
20.4 Derrick Barge / Other Hoisting Equipment
20.4.1 General
The use of large derrick barges or other lifting equipment may be necessary in the
mobilization/demobilization of large platform/tender-assist platform rig packages. The use
of this equipment is generally necessary only during these periods of
mobilization/demobilization to move the large rig package modules on or off of the wellbay
area of the self-supporting platforms. During the actual drilling operations, the rig’s cranes
handle the movement of casing, mud materials and other equipment necessary for the well
onto the platform Other equipment utilized during rig mobilization/demobilization of
smaller rigs are self-erecting cranes, often called leap frog cranes, that are mobilized onto
the platforms to lift the smaller rig packages onto the platform.
20.4.2 Derrick Barge

The derrick barge is usually an open seas certified barge with a length of between 105 -
195 m (350 - 640 ft) and a width of 30 - 36 m (100 - 120 ft) with a fixed rotating or non-
rotating type crane. A typical derrick barge of 2,000 tons rating is generally capable of
dynamic lift weights of up to 1,600 tons or 3,200,000 lbs at a radius of 30 m or (100 ft).
The barge also provides supporting living quarters for the crew and other contractor’s
personnel within its hull with additional welding shops or machinery areas within or on top
of the hull.
For a platform or tender-assist platform rig-up, the derrick barge’s crane lifts the platform
rig modules off a cargo barge onto the wellbay area of the platform. This is repeated until
all the lifts are made onto the platform. Prior to the lifts, the derrick barge sets out a
pattern of anchors around the platform to stabilize and position the barge next to the
platform. Some of the newer tender-assist rigs have the capability of lifting the platform
rig components onto the platform. Generally, these tenders are semisubmersibles with high
variable deck load capabilities. Smaller barge type tenders do not have the lifting
capabilities for these type of platform module lifts.
Additionally, smaller derrick barges may mobilize to the platform location prior to rig
mobilization to install anchor piles and the mooring arrangement for the smaller barge type
tenders. The larger semisubmersible tenders are capable of putting out their anchor and
chain or wire rope with the use of anchor handling tugs or work/supply vessels and may
not require the installation of these anchor piles.
__________________________________________________________________________________
20.4.3 Other Hoisting Equipment
Small platform rigs, often used only for completions or workovers, are self-erecting
through the use of small hydraulic cranes, generally called a leap frog crane. This crane
package is lifted onto the platform with the existing platform crane. The leap frog crane is
erected and welded down to the appropriate platform skid beams and is generally utilized
to lift the platform rig packages of under 8 tons or 15,000 lbs lift weight off the barges or
work/supply vessels and onto the platform. After the rig components are lifted onto the
platform and rigged up, the leap frog crane is no longer required. The crane is disassembled
and offloaded with either the existing platform crane or additional rig cranes that have been
rigged up.
The existing platform’s crane or additional rig cranes are utilized to handle the casing, mud
materials and other equipment required during the drilling operations. In the
demobilization of these type of platform rigs, the use of the leap frog crane is reversed until
all rig components/packages have been offloaded and the leap frog crane is then
disassembled and offloaded with the existing platform crane.
__________________________________________________________________________
21.0 LOCATION / SURVEYS
21.1 Location
21.1.1 General
21.1.2 Land Locations - General
21.1.3 Land Locations - Desert
21.1.4 Land Locations - Jungle/Wilderness
21.1.5 Offshore Location - Open Water
21.1.6 Offshore Location - Platform / Structure
21.2 Surveys
21.2.1 General
21.2.2 Site-Land
21.2.3 Shallow Hazard / Sparker Survey - Offshore
21.2.4 Site - Offshore
21.2.5 Site - Platform / Structure
_____________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 5 Location/Surveys
21.0 Location / Surveys
21.1 Location
21.1.1 General
The preparation of the wellsite location will usually require considerable study and
potentially specialized additional site surveys prior to rig mobilization for offshore
locations. It is recommended to conduct numerous discussions with the potential rig
contractors in the area on similar location conditions and associated costs in the general
area.
21.1.2 Land Locations - General

After the staking of the wellsite location on a general land type location, construction of an
access road must begin to allow the mobilization of construction equipment to the
proposed location. The actual building of the location may require heavy construction
equipment such as bulldozers, backhoes and other heavy equipment to clear and level, and
possibly build protective levees around the location. Other construction activities may
include the digging of mud and reserve pits, the drilling of water wells at the site or the
construction of a pipeline to the nearest source of adjacent surface water, if available.
Generally, local building materials will be utilized for stabilization of the wellsite location
and as a support foundation for the rig components/equipment/camp. In more accessible
locations, wood mats and locally available natural building materials such as limestone may
be utilized to provide sufficient foundation support based on local methods.
21.1.3 Land Locations - Desert
21.1.4 Land Locations - Jungle/Wilderness

In areas where it is generally uneconomic to build an access road to the location due to
distance from existing infrastructure or estimated duration to build a road, consideration
will have to be made to the barging and/or airlifting by helicopter of heavy construction
equipment to the location to begin preparation of the wellsite location. In dense
jungle/wildnerness, it may be required that personnel are first airlifted to the location and a
small area suitable for placement of the first piece of heavy construction equipment, such as
a bulldozer, be cleared by manual labor with chain saws, axes and other small handtools.
Preparation of the camp site area is generally the first area to be cleared to allow for
stationing of personnel and support facilities at the site while site preparation for the rig
continues.
21.1.5 Offshore Location - Open Water

There are generally no requirements for preparation of a wellsite location for a MODU
except the required pre-mobilization bathymetry, shallow hazard and sparker surveys. In
___________________________________________________________________________
Location/Surveys Page 2 of 5 August 1995
the case of the utilization of possibly a bottom supported MODU such as a submersible or
a barge mounted drilling unit, the location may have to be dredged to a depth to remove
unstable bottom sediments and then be replaced with shell or other harder sediments for
the rig to set on. These bottom supported rigs may also require sandbagging to eliminate
or prevent scouring along the bottom of edge of the rig due to currents or tides.
21.1.6 Offshore Location - Platform / Structure

Preparation for the mobilization of a rig onto a platform of other similar structure will first
require that the following criteria be considered :
• The structural design of the platform must be such that the anticipated static and
dynamic drilling loads imposed by the rig will be within the proper safety factor
criteria, including API specifications. Generally, this will require consultation between
the platform’s structural design engineers in interaction with the design engineer for the
rig to confirm the platform design is acceptable for use of the rig. Additionally, the
footprint of the rig will have to be confirmed to fit onto the structure, with possible
required platform modifications to be necessary..
• The operation of the platform rig under existing production conditions must be
acceptable under some type of simultaneous operations with production procedures
plan previously approved by the Client and the governmental regulatory agencies.
• Consideration should be given to the shut-in of all wells and bleed off of all pressure
from above the surface controlled subsurface safety valve (SCSSV) or plug set in an
appropriate nipple prior to the movement or heavy lifting of rig components onto or
next to adjacent wells or the well bay area.
• Consideration should also be made to the use of steel plate on the top deck of the
platform if it is grated to prevent heavy objects from dropping through the grating onto
the cellar/production deck in the well bay area.
21.2 Surveys
21.2.1 General
Positioning surveys to determine proposed wellsite locations are generally completed
utilizing the latest technology which now includes the use of the U. S. satellite deployed
Global Positioning System (GPS) with differential offsets, when available. Land surveys
may be conducted with the existing survey techniques if known survey marker points are
nearby. However, due to the remoteness of some land wellsite locations, use of GPS on
these onshore and all offshore locations is preferred. The use of the GPS system offshore
has eliminated the setting of 3-4 land based signal generating stations such as was utilized
with the Syledis system.
_____________________________________________________________
21.2.2 Site-Land
Land surveys may be conducted with the existing survey techniques if known survey
marker points are nearby. However, due to the remoteness of some land wellsite locations,
use of GPS on these onshore sites is preferred.
21.2.3 Shallow Hazard / Sparker Survey - Offshore

Generally, prior to the mobilization of a MODU to a location, a shallow hazard survey of
300 m x 300 m or 1000 f t x 1000 ft grid is conducted over the proposed wellsite
locations to determine the following:
• Absence of bottom obstructions such as sunken vessels, large objects on the seabottom.
• Bathymetry of the slope of the ocean floor around the well location.
• Presence of pipelines or other buried structures in the general wellsite location area that
may cause interference with the penetration of the legs on a jack-up type MODU or
the anchor pattern of a semisubmersible or other floating-type MODU.
An additional survey called a sparker survey is also to be conducted over the well site
location. This survey is a shallow seismic survey that is done over the well location area to
locate the potential of shallow gas hazards in the near surface sediments. This survey also
provides information as to the potential travel of subsurface faults to the seabed floor
which could allow migration of gases along these fault zones.
These surveys may require the considerable mobilization of a considerable amount of
equipment prior to the rig mobilization and this survey work should be completed to
provide data availability at least six months prior to proposed rig mobilization.
21.2.4 Site - Offshore

Mobilizing onto the proper wellsite location within a tolerance of approximately 15 m of
50 ft is generally accomplished utilizing the GPS positioning system. The GPS survey
equipment with a small video monitor will graphically locate the position of the rig rotary
table on the MODU in relation to the proposed well location. With this system, it is
generally better to run the system off the MODU, instead of positioning utilizing a marine
vessel setting a location buoy. The buoys are generally destroyed if currents, the tug route
or other conditions are such that the MODU moves over the buoy. Additional remote
survey units are available for the anchor-handling vessels to allow the proper positioning of
anchors in relation to the MODU and the proposed well location utilizing this same GPS
system.
21.2.5 Site - Platform / Structure

If the MODU is to be mobilized to a platform or similar structure, the location of the
platform or structure is generally known based on a previous platform site survey. In the
case of properly positioning the legs of a jack-up alongside a platform or avoiding existing
can holes, a range-azimuth survey system in conjunction with side scan sonar is generally
required. Slot location or the rotary table location is generally calculated based on a
___________________________________________________________________________
Location/Surveys Page 4 of 5 August 1995
measurement of fixed distances and azimuth from known survey points on the platform
using the range-azimuth system.
It is very important, when positioning rigs alongside platforms or other structures in
existing or old fields, to check the location of all operating and abandoned pipelines to
avoid any potential interference within safe margins of error. The use of divers may be
required to safely probe and measure the adjacent pipeline’s location relative to the legs for
jack-up type MODUs.
Additionally, the legs on a jack-up type MODU should not be put down in known areas of
possible pipeline routes as a safety precaution.
_____________________________________________________________
22.0 TESTING
22.1 Testing
22.1.1 General
22.2.2 DST Operations
22.2.3 Extended Well Testing
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 2 Testing
22.1 Testing
22.1.1 General
The ability to analyze the performance and productivity of oil and gas wells with a
reasonable degree of accuracy is of the utmost importance in today's petroleum industry.
Oil and gas well tests and the subsequent data and analysis received from the tests are
designed to serve as an accurate method of forecasting a reservoir's performance and flow
capability. Important decisions are made from this information regarding production
methods, secondary recovery programs and development drilling.
This information is also used in projecting deliverability data for plant and gathering system
size requirements. They are also used by appropriate government regulatory bodies in
setting the maximum permissible gas and oil withdrawal rates in the interest of
conservation.
22.2.2 DST Operations

The planning and operational procedures utilized in conducting both open hole and cased
hole drill stem tests (DST) in conjunction with the completion of drilling activities is
contained in Halliburton’s Well Test Operational Procedures Manual. Please see this
manual for detailed information regarding test planning, test equipment selection and
requirements, safety procedures, test operational procedures and post-test data analysis.
22.2.3 Extended Well Testing

Conducting an extended well test, with the products of the test, generally oil, to be utilized
to pay for the associated costs of the test, requires a significant amount of pre-planning and
coordination for offshore operations This planning involves the selection of a storage
vessel, its associated mooring, the delivery system between the MODU and the storage
vessel, and conversion of a part of the MODU’s deck area for separation and other
production equipment to process the test fluids.
Generally, these tests are only conducted for up to 6 months duration subject to
environmental weather conditions in the area. Tests may be for shortened periods if
production depletion data exhibit significant drawdown within these test periods or if non-
commercial rates are realized during the initial test period.
It is recommended that discussions be held with both rig contractors and marine
transportation contractors to discuss the required engineering and planning required to
conduct a successful extended well test.
__________________________________________________________________________
Testing Page 2 of 2 August 1995
23.0 BITS / HOLE OPENERS / UNDERREAMERS
23.1 Bits
23.1.1 General
23.1.2 Rock Bits - Mill Tooth
23.1.3 Rock Bits - Insert
23.1.4 Polycrystalline Diamond (PDC) Bits
23.1.5 Diamond Bits
23.1.6 Other- Coring, etc. Bits
23.1.7 Operational Procedures
23.2 Hole Openers
23.2.1 General
23.2.2 Types
23.3 Underreamers
23.3.1 General
23.3.2 Types
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 16 Bits/Hole Openers/Underreamers
23.1 Bits
23.1.1 General
Bits used in the oilfield are of essentially of four types, rock bits with either milled or
tungsten carbide insert (TCI) teeth, polycrystalline diamond (PDC) bits, natural/or
thermally stable diamond bits or core bits. Initially, bits were of a drag type, a design which
has been adapted with the placement of PDC’s on it for effective drilling in some
formations even today. Three cone bit rock bits, often called roller cone bits, were initially
introduced in the 1930’s by Hughes Tool Company. A description of each type of bit, its
recommended drillable formation types and general characteristics of each bit will be
discussed in the following sections.
23.1.2 Rock Bits - Mill Tooth

Rock bits are composed of three main elements consisting of the cutters or cones, the
bearings and the bit body. In a rock bit there are just two components, the cutters and the
lugs. In the case of a three-cone bit, the three cutters are installed onto three individually
finished lugs and the three elements are welded together to form the completed bit,
including the body. The body of the bit may be hardfaced with an erosion resistant material.
The body also contains the nozzles, which are located between the cones and deliver a
stream of drilling mud or fluid on the cones for cleaning and cooling. After the element
assembly, an API pin connection is then machined on the upper end of the bit for
connection to the bottom hole assembly on the drillstring.
The cutting elements on a rock bit are circumferential rows of teeth extending from each
cone. The teeth interfit between the rows of teeth on adjacent cones. In mill tooth rock
bits, these teeth are machined out of the cone steel forgings. The teeth can be various
shapes and sizes based on intended applications. The teeth are responsible for the actual
crushing or gouging of the formation as the bit rotates. The crushing comes from the high
weight utilized driving the teeth into the rock as the cones and the bit rotate. A gouging
action is the result of offsetting of cones, known as skew, so each cone does not rotate
about their true centers. If the cones are forced about an axis other than their true
geometrical center, they will slide or drag along the hole bottom occasionally, producing a
gouging action. Softer formation bits have more offset than those designed to drill harder
formations. Bits for harder formations rely solely on the removal of formation by crushing
action.
The bearings on a bit allow the cones to rotate about the bit body. Bearings for premium
oilfield rock bits are normally sealed and lubricated to ensure longer life in the harsh
downhole environment Non-sealed roller ball bearings are also utilized primarily for
_____________________________________________________________
Bits/Hole Openers/Underreamers Page 2 of 16 August 1995
shallower top-hole sections in the well where trip time is short and high rotary speeds are
desirable. The most common premium rock bearing bit today is the sealed journal bearing
bit. The bearing contains no rollers, but is just a solid journal pin mated to the inside
surface of the cone or a bushing which fits between the cone and journal. These bearing
elements are designed to be uniformly loaded and high weights on bit and rotary speeds can
be utilized. Some of these bearing elements incorporate metal seals. A sealed reservoir of
liquid is held within the bit body to lubricate this bearing.
23.1.3 Rock Bits - Insert

The insert type rock bits are of the same design as the milled tooth rock bits except they
utilize cones in which pre-manufactured tungsten carbide teeth are assembled in pockets
machined into the cones. Hence, the bits are called insert bits. These bits are normally
designed for the medium and harder formations and utilize premium bearings for extended
use of the harder cutting structure.
23.1.4 Polycrystalline Diamond (PDC) Bits

Polycrystalline diamond (PDC) is formed by the sintering of individual crystals of
manufactured diamond into a solid mass. The diamond crystals are engineered for specific
shape, toughness and friability which affect the characteristics of the resulting PDC.
Carefully controlled distribution of the micron-sized diamond crystals are place together in
a refractory mold with a tungsten carbide base and subjected to pressures of over
1,000,000 psi at temperatures exceeding 2,600 Deg F. During this process, a catalyst is
utilized to speed the formation of the diamond-on-diamond bonds between the crystals.
The refractory mold maintains the PDC shape while tremendous pressure is transmitted
from the press to the diamond crystals. The randomly oriented diamond crystals fuse
together and bond to the carbide base. With the diamond crystals randomly oriented, no
weak cleavage planes exist in the diamond layer and hardness and abrasion resistance is
uniform in all directions.
PDC bits drill by the cutting of formation in shear, similar to the cutting action of a lathe,
unlike the roller cone bits, which drill by crushing and gouging with high weight-on-bit and
fail the formation with high compressive loads.
The use of PDC bits are usually dictated under the following drilling conditions:
• When economics dictate bit selection, generally, the rate of penetration ultimately
determines the economics of the bit run. In hard formations with slow penetration rates
and short effective bit runs, consideration usually points to this types of bit or
natural/thermally stable diamond bits. Alternate economics may dictate runs when trip
time becomes excessive for each bit trip due to depth.
• Long bottom times are important.
• Oil-based mud systems are utilized.
• Use of water-based mud systems in non-hydrating formations.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Rotation at high speeds using turbines or mud motors.
• High bottom-hole temperatures over 300 Deg F or higher are encountered.
• When drilling in deviated hole sections requiring lighter bit weights for directional
control.
• When significant overbalance is utilized.
The application of these types of bits are generally found in the following formation types:
• Sedimentary rocks such as clastic rocks formed of fragments transported from their
source and deposited elsewhere such as sandstones and shales. The may also include
evaporites or rocks formed by precipitation or solution and re-crystallization such as
rock salt, gypsum, etc. Other types include carbonates or rocks formed from inorganic
remains such as shells or skeletons of organisms such as limestone.
• Metamorphic rocks or rocks altered by heat, pressure, chemical factors, introduction of
water or other factors resulting in more compact and a highly crystalline condition such
as slate, gneiss, etc.
• Igneous rocks or rocks that have been molten at some time in their history and are
usually associated with the intrusion or extrusion of magma related to volcanic activity
such as granite or basalt.
PDC bits appear to be the most effective in the following formation types:
• Very weak, poorly consolidated, brittle, hydrateable sediments such as sands and shales
of the Pleistocene, Pliocene and Miocene ages.
• Low-strength, poorly compacted, brittle, non-abrasive, relatively shallow sediments,
precipitates and evaporites such as salt, anhydrate, marls chalk or Devonian/Muschel
chalk.
• Moderately strong, somewhat abrasive and ductile, indurated medium-depth sediments,
precipitates and evaporites such as silty claystone, siliceous shales, porous carbonates,
anhydrates of the Eocene age.
PDC bits appear to be the least effective in the following formation types:
• Hard, cemented abrasive sandstones such as sedimentary quartzites.

• Hard dolomites of either sedimentary or metamorphic origin.
• Iron such as pyrite of metamorphic or igneous origin.
• Chert, either metamorphic or sedimentary.
• Granite and basalts of igneous origin.
PDC bits are generally of two body designs, either steel body or matrix body. The steel
body bit utilizes a high quality alloy steel for durability with a layer of tungsten carbide
vacuum clad to the body for erosion protection. Matrix body PDC bits are manufactured
from high quality matrix powders for maximum erosion resistance and design flexibility.
_____________________________________________________________
The bits are available in various cutter geometry’s to match the cutting structure-to-
formation characteristics for the lowest cost-per-foot.
Polycrystalline diamond cutters traditionally utilized flat PDC wafers in cylinder or stud
form. Most manufacturers offer various domed-type cutters with optimized radiuses for
use as the primary cutter elements. The curved cutter is capable of competitive penetration
rates while offering increased durability due to the variable back rake. In harder formations,
the effective back rake angle is increased, reducing both torque and potential damage. This
is also a particular advantage in interbedded formations. It is also important for the PDC bit
to be forced balanced due to bit whirl as a condition of improper force balance on an
aggressive gauge cutting action.
The gauge on most PDC bits is protected with PDC gauge cutters and PDC gauge
skimmers. Steel body bits may also feature additional tungsten carbide inserts with matrix
body PDC bits receiving natural diamonds on the gauge for extra protection.
23.1.5 Diamond
Natural diamond bits, although they are classified as drag bits like PDC bits, drill with a
plowing./grinding action and do not shear the formation. The use of diamond bits are
usually dictated under the following conditions:
• When economics dictate bit selection, generally, the rate of penetration ultimately
determines the economics of the bit run. In hard formations with slow penetration rates
and short effective bit runs, consideration usually points to this type of bit or PDC bits
. Alternate economics may dictate runs when trip time becomes excessive for each bit
trip due to depth.
• Long bottom times are important.
• Oil-based mud systems are utilized.
• Use of water-based mud systems in non-hydrating formations.
• Rotation at high speeds using turbines or mud motors.
• High bottom-hole temperatures over 300 Deg F or higher are encountered.
• When drilling in deviated hole sections requiring lighter bit weights for directional
control.
• When significant overbalance is utilized.
The application of these types of bits are generally found in the following formation types:
• Sedimentary rocks such as clastic rocks formed of fragments transported from their
source and deposited elsewhere such as sandstones and shales. The may also include
evaporites or rocks formed by the precipitation or solution and re-crystallization such
as rock salt, gypsum, etc. Other types include carbonates or rocks formed from
inorganic remains such as shellls or skeletons of organisms such as limestone.
__________________________________________________________________________
• Metamorphic rocks or rocks altered by heat, pressure, chemical factors, introduction of
water or other factors resulting in more compact and a highly crystalline condition such
as slate, gneiss, etc.
• Igneous rocks or rocks that have been molten at some time in their history and are
usually associated with the intrusion or extrusion of magma related to volcanic activity
such as granite or basalt.
Natural/thermally stable diamond bits appear to be the most effective in the following
formation types:
• Moderately strong, somewhat abrasive and ductile, indurated medium-depth sediments,

precipitates and evaporites such as siliceous shales, porous carbonates, anhydrates and
silty claystones of deep Miocene type ages.
• Strong and abrasive, indurated, very ductile deep sediments, precipitates and evaporites
such as sandy shales, calcareous sandstones, dolomites, limestone of the Pennsylvanian
and Missippian ages.
• Very strong and abrasive, indurated ductile and non-ductile formations such as the
Bunter sandstone, bromides etc.
Natural/thermally stable diamond bits appear to be the least effective in the following
formation types:
• Hard, cemented quartzitic sands that are highly fractured and abrasive.
• Chert and pyrite.
Natural diamond bits come in a variety of cutting structure profiles for a wide range of
medium-to-hard formation applications. Radial flow hydraulic design and computerized
diamond placement ensures maximum cutting efficiency and hole cleaning efficiency from
today’s manufacturers.
23.1.6 Other- Coring, etc.

The use of core and other types of specialty bits is necessary for certain applications in
today’s oilfield. Normally, core bits are natural diamond bits, however PDC bits are also
utilized for some applications. These bits are made in a wide range of O.D. sizes with
various inner core diameters. Additional information on coring is found in Section 12,
Coring.
Other types of bits include sidetracking bits, both natural diamond and PDC, and eccentric
bits. Eccentric bits are utilized when sloughing formations or swelling formations are
present such as salt sections or hydratable shales. These bits drill a slightly larger diameter
hole than normal API schedules.

The proper selection of bits for the bit program will provide reduced drilling times, and
should be based on as much historical information as is available from the general area..
_____________________________________________________________
Although the cost of drill bits are only a small fraction of the overall drilling cost of a well,
they are a critical element in the calculation of drilling economics. The cost of a PDC
bit may be many times the cost of a rock bit, however it may be more economically
justifiable through more cost-efficient performance.
The accepted method of assessing bit performance is in terms of economics is the
calculated cost-per-foot. The drilling cost-per-foot calculation is valid for any bit type. The
formula can be utilized after a bit run with actual performance data to calculate an actual
cost-per-foot or it can be used before a bit run with assumed values to project a cost-per-
foot.
The following formula is used to calculate the cost-per-foot drilled:
C= R(T+D)+B
__________
F
where: C = drilling cost per foot ($/ft)
R = rig operating cost ($/hr)
T = trip time (hr)
D = time spent drilling (hr)
B = bit cost ($)
F = footage drilled (ft)
The grading of dulled bits is also a very important process in transmitting historical
information for use in designing future bit programs. The International Association of
Drilling Contractors (IADC) has devised a system to describe both roller cone and fixed
cutter bits. The classification scheme provides a method for categorization of these bits
based on their design features and intended applications. The classification code for a rock
bit contains four characters. The first three characters are numeric and the fourth is
alphabetic. The system is as follows:
IADC ROCK BIT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
First Character-Cutting Structure (1-8)
The Series numbers display the general formation characteristics. Numbers 1-3 refer to
milled tooth bits and 4-8 covers insert bits. Within the groups, the formation becomes
harder as the number increases.
Second Character-Cutting Structure Type (1-4)
Each of the above is divided into four types or degrees of hardness. type 1 refers to bits
designed for the softest formations in a particular series and Type 4 to bits for the hardest.
Third Character-Bearing Gauge
__________________________________________________________________________
Seven categories exist for bearing design and gauge protection.
Fourth Charter-Features Available (Optional)
Sixteen alphabetic characters are utilized to indicate features available. These include
special cutting structure, hydraulic configurations and body gauge protection.
A similar system for fixed cutter PDC bits follows:
IADC FIXED CUTTER BIT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
First Character-Body Material (S or M)
The Series alphabetic displays the type of body material, either steel or matrix.
Second Character-Cutter Density Type (1-5)
Designation of the cutter density, the digit ranges from 1-5. The lower the number, the
lighter set the bit is..
Third Character-Cutter Size (1-3)
The digit represents the size of the PDC cutter utilized. It ranges from 1-3 in descending
order of cutter diameter.
Fourth Charter-Profile (1-4)
The digit represents the general body style and varies from 1 (flat profile) to 4 (long
flanked turbine style).
The IADC dull bit grading consists of the following:
IADC DULL BIT GRADING SYSTEM
This system divides wear into eight stages. The initial four boxes are used to describe the
cutting structure. The first two boxes define the wear upon the cutters using a scale of 0-8,
based on the amount of cutter worn versus the original size. The lower the digit, the less
wear has occurred. Box 1 represents cutters within two thirds of the bit radius. Box 2
covers those in the outer third. The third box describes the primary wear characteristic and
the fourth category defines the location of wear on the bit. Box 5 is always marked ‘X” for
PDC bits as it refers to the condition of bearings. Gauge measurement ids indicated in the
sixth box with the final two boxes providing information on the secondary wear
characteristics of the bit and the reason the bit was pulled.
Particular care must be taken prior to and during the running of PDC bits. These
considerations should include the following:
Hole Preparation
• Utilize a junk basket on the prior bit run.
• Inspect previous bit for junk damage and gauge wear.
• Make a clean-up trip, if necessary.
• Make sure the hole is clean.
_____________________________________________________________
Preparing the Bit
• Transport the bit in a box to avoid cutter damage.
• Carefully remove the bit from the box. Do not set the bit on steel decking-use wood or
a rubber mat.
• Inspect the bit for damage. Record bit serial number. Check O-rings, nozzles and bit
gauge.
• Check inside of bit for obstructions or foreign matter.
Making- Up the Bit
• Fit breaker to bit and engage latch.
• Clean and dope pins.
• Lower BHA to top of pin and engage threads.
• Locate bit and breaker in rotary and make-up to recommended torque.
Tripping in the Hole
• Remove breaker and carefully lower bit through the rotary table.
• Trip carefully through the BOPs, casing shoes and liner hangers.
• Trip slowly through ledges, doglegs and other tight spots.
• Wash last three joints to bottom with full flow at 50-60 RPM.
• Approach bottom observing the weight indicator and rotary torque.
• Tag bottom gently and PU 6-12 inches off bottom.
• Circulate 5-10 minutes with full flow at 50-60 RPM.
Reaming
• Reaming undergauge hole is not recommended
• Ream tight spots with full flow to keep cutters cool.
• Use 2,000-4,000 lbs weight and 50-60 RPM.
• Ream slowly-avoid high torque.
Bit Break-In
• Lower bit to bottom with full flow at 60-80 RPM.
• Compare expected vs. actual hydraulics.
• Record standpipe pressure and pump strokes.
• Drill bottom hole pattern with 2,000-4,000 lbs WOB.
• Break bit in slowly-do not get in a hurry
• After three feet, add weight in 2,000 lbs increments and increase rotary to 100-120
RPM.
__________________________________________________________________________
Drilling Ahead
Determine optimum drilling parameters by changing WOB and RPM within recommended
guidelines.
• Conduct drill-off tests to adjust drilling parameters.
• Do not hesitate to adjust drilling parameters.
• Rotary torque should be approximately that for rock bits at equal ROP. Faster ROP
will normally result in higher torque values.
• If torque or RPM cycling is severe, control with lighter WOB or increased RPM.
• In harder formations, rpm should be reduced to maintain torque and reduce cuter
temperature. Typical rpm in harder formations is 80-110 rpm..
Making Connections
After making a connection, lower to bottom slowly with full flow and 50-60 RPM.
• Check standpipe pressure and pump strokes on and off bottom.
• Increase RPM to previous level and add weight slowly.
• Do not jam the bit back on bottom.
_____________________________________________________________
Pulling Out of the Hole
• Slow down through tight spots, casing shoes, liner hangers and BOPs.
• Attach bit breaker and break out bit in rotary table.
• Avoid cutter damage when removing bit.
• Do not place bit directly on rotary table.
• Return bit to bit box after dull grading.
23.2 Hole Openers
23.2.1 General
Hole opening is the enlargement of the wellbore from the surface. Unlike underreamers,
hole openers enlarge or open the wellbore with cutters of a fixed diameter. A hole
opener consists of a set of cutters mounted on a tool body. The hole opener may be
used when :
Shallow gas possibilities in offshore exploratory wells in some areas require a smaller
hole being drilled to prevent large quantities of wellbore cuttings and shallow gas being
seen at the surface. If no limited or gas is present, then the hole can be opened safely
to the required size with a hole opener.
Better directional control is required.
To prevent overloading of the annulus through a reduction in the volume of cuttings
drilled in the pilot hole..
23.2.2 Types
The hole opener is normally manufactured of two types, either the fixed diameter or the
interchangeable-arm hole openers on which a range of multiple opening diameters can be
achieved with the same tool body size. Fixed diameter hole openers are generally available
up to 42” O.D and interchangeable diameter hole openers up to 36” O.D. Both these tools
are available with tungsten carbide insert (TCI), milled tooth or PDC cutter designs.
The advantages of the interchangeable-arm hole openers are:
• One body can accommodate several sizes of arms, an advantage in locations with
limited rig space and logistics problems.
• Cutter arms may be installed below the rotary table when rotary table restrictions exist.
• Generally, bottom box connections allow the selection of bit or bullnose for guidance.
• Nozzles are also replaceable to assure effective hole cleaning and to cool cutter cones.
__________________________________________________________________________
23.2.3. Operational Procedures

The cutters may be changed to suit the formation’s drillability. Care must be exercised
when opening pilot holes in soft formations or when running a rock bit ahead of the hole
opener. There is the possibility of sidetracking the well in soft formations. In these cases, a
2-2.5 m or 6-8 ft bullnose is usually run and strapped below the hole opener.
The rate at which a hole may be opened is normally controlled by the pilot hole size and the
required size of hole enlargement. Penetrations rates should not be excessive and rates are
normally controlled by circulation capacity and the ability to clean the cuttings out of the
hole.
The following are procedures for re-dressing of the tool after running of a fixed diameter
hole opener:
• Wash down the tool as soon as possible after it is pulled. Clean the mud and cuttings
off the cutters, from each cutter and the cutter leg bearing surfaces and out from under
the cutters. Clean the wrench slots in the jet nozzle retainers.
• Flush circulation passages with water until full flow can be achieved from all nozzles
and the down hole passage to the tool joint box. Allow the tool to drain and dry. Blow
out the circulation passages, if possible.
• Clean and inspect all nozzles for cracks, nicks and erosion damage. If either the retainer
or nozzle appears damaged, replace them with the appropriate assembly.
• If the cutters are reusable, re-grease immediately.
• If necessary, remove the cutters to inspect the legs and main pins for wear damage. The
leg should be replaced if excessive wear or damage is found on the shirt tail area or any
cracks are detected by magnetic particle inspection.
• Examine the body for excessive wear. Critical areas include the hardfaced edge of the
pilot hole wear pads, the shirt tail area of the legs, nozzle retainer sleeves or the
hardfaced area on the outer side of the legs. Hardfaced surfaces may be repaired in the
field, however the resulting metal deposit will not equal the hardness of the tungsten
carbide, but properly applied will give additional wear protection to the hole opener
body.
• On the cutter wipe a light coat of grease on the main pin, leg bores and cutter journal
bores.
• After a thorough cleaning, inspection and re-assembly of the hole opener, coat the tool
join threads, inner faces of the leg and body, main pin of the leg and cutter ends of the
main bore with a quality rust preventative compound.
The procedures to be utilized after running an interchangeable-arm cutter are similar to the
fixed arm cutter, except the cutters and arms are to be inspected and replaced as below:
• To change cutters, remove arm pin retaining screws.
_____________________________________________________________
• Using a drift punch, knock out arm pins and pin retaining screws and discard.
• Replace new cutter arm in pocket, grease lightly and install new arm pins and new arm
pin retaining screws.
• After a number of sets of cutters have been run in the tool, the arm pins will become
loose when installed in the arm pin holes, This is due to wear in the arm pin bushings
and they should be replaced. These bushings nay be pressed out or driven out and
replaced by new bushings. Heat is not necessary nor desirable in the removal of the
bushings. After the arm pin holes have been cleaned and lightly greased, the greased
arm pin bushings may be replaced by pressing or driving into place.
23.3 Underreamers
23.3.1 General
Underreaming is the process of enlargement of a section of wellbore that is below a
restriction. Most frequently encountered restrictions include the internal diameter of the
casing, I.D., and the size of the wellhead. Both limit the maximum outside diameter, O.D.,
of tools that can through the obstruction. Underreamers consist of a set of cutters mounted
on retractable arms on the tool body, enabling the tool to be run through a smaller diameter
hole. The expandable cutters stay collapsed while the tool is run in and once the tool clears
the casing and wellhead, the cutters expand into the formation and commence drilling a
larger hole at the required depth by utilizing the differential pressure of the drilling fluid.
The arms are actuated by this circulation and are closed by stopping circulation.
Underreaming has generally been considered undesirable, yet is inevitable due to the need
for multiple casing strings in straight and directional wells in today’s projects due to deeper
drilling. Advancements in the reliability of underreamers has allowed minimum clearance
casing programs to be run to optimize casing sizes and reduce tubular costs.
The application of underreamers includes:
• Opening the hole below casing shoe to provide a larger annular space for cementing the
next casing string. This allows the use of larger intermediate casing strings than could
ordinarily be run.
• BOP or wellhead causes a restriction of tool diameter.
• Enlargement of the hole annulus within the producing zone for gravel pack
completions.
• Opening of an area to start a sidetrack.
• Enlargement of heaving areas through problem zones.
• Reducing dogleg severity.
__________________________________________________________________________
23.3.2 Types
Selection of a underreamer depends on the formation and whether or not simultaneous
drilling is required.. The types of undderreamers generally include the 3-cone rock type,
the 3-cone drilling underrreamer, 2-cone underreamer and the 3-arm drag type
underreamers.
The 3-cone rock type underreamer is generally a rugged 3-cone underreamer with large
cones and the capability to underream a hole up to twice its own body diameter. A wide
selection of cones allows for the proper choice of arms for each specific job. Additionally,
a variety of orifice sizes allows the optimization of hydraulics for the hole size and
particular rig. The tool can be serviced on location with the arms quickly changed on the
rig floor. Most tools allow full volume circulation at all times.
These underreamers can be equipped with a flow indicator, often called Flo-Tel, that
indicate when the cutter arms are fully extended.. The pressure on the standpipe gauge
drops approximately 200 psi or pump strokes increase. These signals fro the Flo-Tel
assures personnel that the underreamer has expanded to the right diameter eliminating trips
for questionable tools. This option is recommended particularly for use in harder
formations where the possibility of going undergauge is higher.
The 3-cone drilling type underreamer will underream previously drilled pilot holes or a
bottom box connection will allow the use of a bit to drill and underream simultaneously.
the tool design allows mud flow to the bit or bullnose. orifice jets can be selected to
optimize available hydraulics. The jetting placement aids in cooling of the cutters and
annular lifting of the cuttings. other options include a jetted bullnose or jetted top sub to
divert flow when necessary.
The 2-cone underreamers are designed primarily to underream below casing to provide
adequate clearance and cementing space for running small clearance consecutive strings of
casing or liner. The tools generally feature four nozzles, on top of each nozzle cutter jetting
directly on each cutter to keep it from balling and one jet just above each cutter pocket. In
addition, other jets may be incorporated in a pilot bit or bullnose.
The 3-arm drag type underreamer utilizes PDC drill blanks on the cutting edge of the tool
which provides the hardness and wear resistance of man-made polycrystalline diamonds
backed with the strength of bonded tungsten carbide. These type of cutters shear through
soft to medium formations more efficiently and faster than conventional cone type
underreamers would. They also require the use of less tool weight. these tolls feature
special circulation jet nozzles to direct a portion of flow out each arm pocket. This action
effectively cleans the cutting surfaces, improves removal of cuttings and dissipates
frictional heat. Similar options such as the Flo-Tel can be incorporated into this tool.
The advantages of a drag type underreamer include:
• Increased penetration rate.

• Increased on bottom hours.
_____________________________________________________________
• Reduced rig time due to faster penetration rates.
• Reduced cost-per-foot.
• Faster penetration through producing zones, minimizing formation damage and hole
stability problems.
Drag type underreamers are used in poorly consolidated soft-to-medium formations where
large diameter intervals are required for gravel packing or cementing. Pilot holes can be
enlarged up to three times body size in a single trip. These tools can be operated with
water, mud, air, aerated mud or other circulating fluid. Low cost cutter arms and orifices
can be easily replaced in the field.

General procedures for underreaming include the following:
• Lower the tool into the hole until it reaches the top of the section to be enlarged. While
tripping, take care as surge pressures can start opening the arms which may damage the
casing.
• Rotate the tool slowly (30-50 RPM) after reaching the desired shoulder cut-out depth.
• While rotating the drillstring, start pumps and establish flow.
• Gradually increase flow rate and RPM until desired operating parameters are reached.
• After correct pump pressure is reached, rotate the tool at 100-150 RPM maximum.
Mark the kelly for 3 ft and drill-off slowly. Rotate for 5- 10 minutes to cut shoulder.
• Disengage the rotary table and PU with pump on.
• Cutter arms should be open. To make sure repeat above steps. When the shoulder is
reached, the assembly should start taking weight indicating there is a shoulder.
• With the shoulder cut add weight, A good rule of thumb is 1,000 lbs per inch of body
diameter.
• Reduce speed to 100 RPM and proceed with underreaming. Do not penetrate faster
than 100 ft/hr. Do NOT spud tool. Pull the underreamer at the first sign of dulling
looking for same signs as a dull bit.
• In a sidetracking operation, remove the cement ring with an underreamer whose cutter
opening is slightly larger than the original hole.
• When a harder formation is encountered, reduce rotary table speed and add weight.
• When making a connection, lower the kelly bushing so it is barely in the table and
engage rotary at slow speed.
• Apply pump pressure for normal operations. Disengage rotary and lower tool to
shoulder. Set down and apply weight to check if cutters have re-opened. PU back
about 2 ft, engage rotary, bring to operating RPM and continue underreaming.
• While tripping out of the hole, PU a few feet off bottom and turn pump off. Rotate 5-
10 minutes before coming out of hole or into casing. Always pull through the casing
shoe slowly. Make sure hydrostatic head in the drill string is allowed to equalize before
__________________________________________________________________________
pulling into the casing, otherwise the forces of the fluid column may expand the cutter
arms during entry.
If drilling and underreaming simultaneously, maintain a constant drilling weight. A good
rule of thumb is 1,500 - 2,000 lbs per inch of body diameter of the tool. Reduce table speed
to 80 RPM and proceed.
If underreaming key seats, locate the underreamer in the middle of drill collars. Locate a
full gauge stabilizer 60 - 90 ft above and a full gauge stabilizer 60 - 90 ft below. Slowly
begin underrremaing the key seat 30 ft above the point of the key seat. After underreaming
the key seat, circulate for 5- 10 minutes to clean-up tool. Stop circulation and wait a few
minutes for pressure to equalize and arms to collapse. Repeat steps.
Cleaning and re-assembly of the underreamer should be made as soon as the tool is pulled
out of the hole per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
_____________________________________________________________
24.0 LOGISTICS
This section will be provided at a later date.
__________________________________________________________________________
August 1995 Page 1 of 1 Logistics
25.0 WELLHEAD EQUIPMENT
25.2 Surface Wellhead Equipment
25.2.1 General
25.2.2 SOW / Braden Head
25.2.3 Casing Spools/ Casing Hanger
25.2.4 Tubing Head/ Tubing Hanger
25.2.5 Xmas Tree
25.3 Subsea Wellhead Equipment
25.3.1 General
25.3.2 Temporary Guide Base
25.3.3 Permanent Guide Base
25.3.4 Wellhead Housing
25.3.5 Casing Hangers/Seal Assemblies
25.3.6 Running Procedures / Testing Tools
25.3.7 Abandonment Caps
25.3.8 Subsea Xmas Trees
25.4 Mudline Suspension Equipment
25.4.1 General
25.4.2 Butt-Weld Sub
25.4.3 Casing Hanger
August 1995 Page 1 of 13 Wellhead Equipment

25.4.4 Running Procedures
25.4.5 Abandonment Caps/ Tie-back Re-entry
Wellhead Equipment Page 2 of 13 August 1995


The wellhead equipment is all the surface components attached to the casing and tubing
strings of the well. This also includes components above or near the mudline on offshore
wells completed with subsea wellheads or the mudline suspension equipment in
combination with a surface wellhead system. The purpose of wellhead equipment is to
support and isolate the various casing and tubing strings and to control the flow from the
well while being drilled or produced. Today’s major surface wellhead manufacturers
include FMC, ABB-Vetco Gray, Kvaerner-National, Cooper, Ingram-Cactus and
numerous other regional or country specific companies.
25.2 Surface Wellhead Equipment
25.2.1 General
Surface wellhead equipment consists of the casing head assembly(ies), tubing head and
Christmas tree. These components are usually attached to the appropriate casing or tubing
strings by threads, flanges or clamps. In general, surface wellheads rated for 2,000 psi or
under are threaded. Wellheads over 2,000 psi are flanged or clamped and are generally
manufactured to API Specifications. All wellheads over a 2,000 psi rating will meet API
Specifications unless previously approved by Halliburton and the Client’s management.
25.2.2 SOW / Braden Head

• The Slip-On-Wellhead (SOW) or Bradenhead is the lowermost casing head that is
attached to the first string of casing on surface wellheads. It is generally attached to
the surface casing string, however it is sometimes attached to conductor strings on
offshore wells. Considerations that should go into the selection of the SOW or
Bradenhead include the following:
• Working pressure should be equal to the design pressure needed for the next hole
interval.
• Must be capable of hanging the desired intermediate and production casing strings
without damaging the casing head or pipe.
• Flange size should be such that a stock additional intermediate casing head or tubing
head is available without the use of an adapter flange.
• Side outlets are generally threaded for this first head, however they are also available
flanged or studded.
Another option to the SOW is the unitized wellhead. This casing head is a single unit
wellhead which replaces all casing and tubing heads normally used in completions. The
unitized head permits the landing and pack-off of all casing and tubing strings in a single
wellhead unit.
The advantages of the unitized head include the following:

• Allows the BOP’s to be left in place until the xmas tree is installed.

• Reduces the number of flange connections, thus reducing the potential of leaks.
• Reduces nipple-up time after the landing of each casing string reducing costs,
particularly for offshore locations.
25.2.3 Casing Spools/ Casing Hangers

Additional casing spools, often called intermediate casing heads, are utilized if additional
casing strings are required to be set prior to the setting of the production string. This spool
or head provides support for the next casing string set and effects a seal of the annular
space between the strings with the use of a casing hanger. Most of these spools or heads
are designed to be utilized over two or more sizes of intermediate casing.
Considerations that should go into the selection of the casing spool or intermediate casing
head include the following:
• Working pressure should be equal to the design pressure needed for the next hole
interval.
• Must be capable of hanging the desired intermediate and production casing strings
without damaging the casing head or pipe.
• Flange size should be such that a stock additional intermediate casing head or tubing
head is available without the use of an adapter flange.
• Side outlets are generally threaded for this head if less than 3,000 psi pressure rating,
however they are also available flanged or studded for higher pressure ratings.
The casing hanger securely hangs the casing string in the casing spool or head without
damaging it and provides a seal between the casing and the casing spool or head. The most
commonly utilized casing hangar is the wrap-around type. This hanger is run through the
BOP stack and secured before nippling up operations begin. The slips are automatically
energized by the weight of the casing string. However, sealing may be of an automatic or
manual type. Manual types are set by compressing the element with a plate and bolt
arrangement.
When there is insufficient casing weight to set and energize the hanger, such as when a
mudline suspension system is utilized, a manually energized casing hanger must be utilized.
The casing hanger must be matched to the casing head and an automatic wrap-around type
hanger should be used if there is a likelihood that annulus pressure may be present during
nipple up.
Crossing over from one pressure rating to another is accomplished with casing spools of
different pressure rating flanges. This requires a sealing element in the lower portion of the
upper and lower flange sealing surfaces to prevent pressure from above reaching the lower
flange. A second method to make this crossover is by using a crossover flange which is an
adapter flange with a sealing unit combined into the one unit with one side mating to the
lower pressure flange and the other side for the higher pressure rating flange.

25.2.4 Tubing Head/Tubing Hangar
The tubing head sits atop the uppermost casing spool or intermediate head and provides a
means to hang the tubing and packing-off between the tubing and casing. The tubing head
also provides access to the casing/tubing annulus and provides support for the xmas tree.
Considerations that should go into the selection of the tubing head include the following:
• Should have a pack-off around the production casing.
• Should have studded or flanged side outlets. This side outlet also should have a internal
threads so that with the use of a valve removal plug, a side outlet valve can be removed
with pressure inside the tubing head.
• The working pressure rating of the head should be in excess of the maximum expected
shut-in pressure of the well and/or the maximum treating pressure.
• The size and pressure rating of the lower flange on the tubing head must be the same
size as the top flange of the uppermost casing head/ spool or the crossover adapter
flange.
• The top flange of the tubing head should be sized to accommodate the desired tubing
hangar and tubing size.
• Should be adaptable to all producing conditions, including artificial lift, and provide for
control line ports etc., as necessary.
• Should accommodate the possibility of multi-string completions. Under these
conditions, the tubing head must have suitable positioning devices to index the tubing
hangers or the hanger bowl such that the BOPs will not have to be removed.
Tubing hangars are used to hang the tubing and/or provide a pack-off between the tubing
and the tubing head. Tubing hangers are of the wrap-around, slip-on or boll-weevil type.
In a single string completion, the wrap-around type hangar is the most popular and is made
of two halves that are hinged for easy installation. This type of hanger is used mostly as a
pack-off and not as a hanger. The wrap-around hanger can be run through the BOPs and
can be locked down by the tubing head lockdown screws. The use of lockdown screws
permit the xmas tree to be manipulated without releasing tubing-casing annulus pressure to
the atmosphere. On slip-on type hangers, the hanger is slipped over the top joint of tubing
and works in an identical manner to the wrap-around hanger. This hanger utilizes Chevron-
type packing to effect a seal with the tubing. The boll-weevil hanger threads into the tubing
and the assembly is lowered into the tubing head. Disadvantages of this type of hangers
include the inability to reciprocate without unseating the hanger pack-off and the well
fluids and associated pressure contact the upper tubing head flange and ring gasket, which
may be undesirable for corrosive applications.
There are three basic types of multi-string tubing hangers and they include the mandrel
type, modified mandrel type and split hanger. The mandrel type uses a multi-bore spider or
hanger with a mandrel to support the individual tubing strings. The mandrel is threaded
into the last joint of tubing and are lowered into place to effect a seal or pack-off. These

hangers are available for up to four completions. In the modified mandrel type of hanger,
one tubing string is threaded onto one string while the other string(s) is threaded through a
port in the bushing(s) and supported in the mandrel(s). The split-type of hanger utilizes two
semi-circles with a radius equivalent to the tubing. Each half off the hanger has an opening
with a female threads. The advantage of this type of hanger is that it permits maximum
clearance when running the second string of tubing, which permits gas lift valves to be run
on both strings. A disadvantage is that it may be difficult to line up the hanger in the tubing
head.
Back pressure valves (BPV) are available for all the types of hangers. The BPV is
essentially the same as a wireline plug with an equalizer and is set prior to nippling down a
BOP stack prior to the installation of the xmas tree. It is also utilized prior to the nippling
down of the xmas tree and the setting of a BOP stack on the tubing head. A double check
valve (DCV) is similar to the BPV, however, this valve can not be pumped through and
holds pressure from both sides. The DCV is normally utilized to test the xmas tree.
25.2.5 Xmas Tree

The xmas tree consists of an interconnected group of valves and fittings which sit atop the
tubing head and allow the control of flow from a well. It is called a xmas tree because of
its shape and the large number of fittings branching out above the tubinghead. The xmas
tree normally consists of a tubing head adapter, master valves(s), with hydraulic operators
as necessary, tee or cross, swab or crown valve, lubricator adapter, cap, wing valve(s) w/
hydraulic operator, if necessary, choke and the flowline valve for a flowing well. Wells on
artificial lift may require substantially less equipment and redundancy in the xmas tree
components.
Considerations that should go into the selection of the xmas tree include the following:
• The items that make up the vertical run of the xmas tree must be full opening to permit
the use of full drift tools in the tubing. Generally, restricted opening valves are
normally utilized in the wing of the tree.
• On wells with 5,000 psi or more shut-in or treating pressure, generally two master
valves are utilized in the tree.
• Master valves and wing valves should have the same pressure rating as the rest of the
tree components.
• Xmas trees should be tested prior to being sent out to the field. Test procedures will
vary based on pressure ratings and the Client’s requirements.
Specialized wellhead and xmas tree assemblies now include those utilized on the tension-
leg platforms that have been installed and are more commonly being considered for
installation for deepwater developments. Manufacturers should be consulted for their own
specific designs to meet these particular applications.

25.3 Subsea Wellhead Equipment
25.3.1 General
The subsea wellhead system generally consists of a Temporary Guide Base (TGB),
Permanent Guide Base (PGB), wellhead housing and additional casing hangers utilized to
set future casing strings. The wellhead housing provides a pressure housing from which all
pressure on the well can be contained while drilling utilizing the locking of a subsea BOP
stack onto the housing. The subsea wellhead system also provides a system of support for
the casing strings and also for the temporary or permanent abandonment of the well. In the
future, either a subsea completion or a tie-back of the well to a platform can be made with
the initial utilization of this subsea wellhead system.
For water depths up to approximately 600 m or 2,000 ft, a subsea wellhead system utilizing
guidelines in normally utilized. For water depths in excess of 600 m or 2,000 ft, a
guidelineless system is normally utilized that does not require establishment of initial guide
lines with the Temporary Guide Base (TGB).
25.3.2 Temporary Guide Base

The Temporary Guide Base (TGB) is generally the first component of the subsea wellhead
equipment that is lowered and installed on the sea floor. The TGB provides a template on
the sea floor to allow the conductor hole to be drilled or the conductor jetted-in.
The TGB should provide and consider the following:

• Allows four guidelines at 90 Deg phasing to be attached at a 6’ radius for a guideline
system. A guidelineless system does not provide for the establishment of guidelines.
• Usually has anti-rotation spikes that penetrate into the sea floor to prevent possible
rotation.
• Can be filled with weighting material to anchor the guidelines to the seafloor securely
and normally has at least 100 ft2 of load bearing area. Additional bearing area can be
supplied with optional fold-out extensions or modular welded or bolted extensions.
• Is usually constructed from field weldable structural steel and plate which allows bulls-
eye level indicators to be easily attached.
• Provides alignment and support for the permanent guidebase. The conical funnel on the
TGB in conjunction with the gimbal on the PGB compensates for irregular sea floor
conditions up to approximately 5 Deg.
Running instructions for the equipment will be provided by the manufacturer, however all
manufacturer’s equipment are very similar in design and running techniques. The TGB is
normally run on subsea exploratory wells and will not be run if a template is utilized to be
drilled through.

25.3.3 Permanent Guide Base
The Permanent Guide Base (PGB) guides the subsea BOP stack and/or the xmas trees
over the subsea wellhead housing. The PGB is run together with the conductor housing
and conductor string. Most manufacturers offer a design that can be remotely stripped off
the conductor housing with straight pull or similar motion and retrieved to the surface for
re-use. The PGB also generally can be re-installed over a conductor housing with weight
set tools which avoid the use of ROV or divers.
The PGB should provide and consider the following:

• Automatically locks to the conductor housing during running operations through the
use of a heavy duty split load ring.
• Utilizes four socket type 8’ high guideposts on 6’ centers which can be replaced by
divers or ROV on a guideline or guidelineless system.
• Is normally fabricated from field weldable structural steel and plate which allows bulls-
eye level indicators to be easily attached.
• Has some type of key arrangement to align the conductor wellhead housing and
prevent rotation.
• May be provided with an optional gimbal which aligns and lands in the conical funnel of
the TGB and allows up to a 5 Deg mis-alignment relative to the TGB/sea floor.
• Normally has a bore to pass up to 36” conductor string or large 30” O.D. connectors
through the PGB.
Running instructions for the equipment will be provided by the manufacturer, however all
manufacturer’s equipment are very similar in design and running techniques.
25.3.4 Wellhead Housing

The wellhead housing is run on the casing . The wellhead housing provides a pressure
housing from which all pressure on the well can be contained within utilizing the locking of
a subsea BOP stack onto the housing. The subsea BOP stack of the majority of today’s
MODUs is normally locked wellhead connector. Alternately, the wellhead housing can be
provided with different profile or a clamp type arrangement. Major subsea wellhead
manufacturers include FMC, ABB-Vetco Gray, Kvaerner-National, Cooper and Dril-Quip.
The wellhead housing should provide and considers the following:

• Should be rated for either 10,000 or 15,000 psi or in excess of the maximum
anticipated casing pressure expected during the drilling or completion operations.
• Potential of H2S or other corrosive fluids may necessitate special metals selections.
• Provides a housing and support for the next casing hangers to be run in the well. The
housing must be capable of transmitting and spreading these loads of successive casing
strings.
• Anti-rotation to the conductor housing is provided through some type of anti-rotation
keys in the housing.

• Provides a housing for sealing and mating of a tubing hangar to be utilized if a subsea
completion is to be made.
• Provides proper sealing surfaces for the tie-back of the casing strings to the surface in a
platform type tie-back arrangement.
Running instructions for the equipment will be provided by the manufacturer and all
manufacturer’s equipment will vary in design, running tools and techniques. During drilling
operations in the wellhead housing, it is necessary to have a seat protector installed at ALL
times to protect the sealing surfaces of the wellhead from wear and allow the proper
setting/sealing of the future casing hangars and seal assemblies.
25.3.5 Casing Hangers/ Seal Assemblies

The setting of casing hangers in the subsea wellhead housing is usually the next operation
in the drilling of a well. 13 3/8”, 9 5/8” and 7” mandrel type casing hangers are most
commonly used. Other sizes such as a 16” submudline hangar and seal assembly are also
normally available from most subsea wellhead manufacturers. Adapters are also available
for spacing out the next casing hanger properly if a casing string size is to be left out of the
drilling program. Most casing hangers are designed to accept at least 500 tons or
1,000,000 lbs of maximum casing string weights with maximum total casing weight for the
wellhead housing of approximately 1,500 tons or 3,000,000 lbs.
The casing hanger should provide and considers the following:

Some manufacturers have standardized their casing hangers as being suitable for H2S
service.
• Generally, hangers are centralized at two points to eliminate hanger mis-alignment.
• Designed with large annular space below the seal assembly to allow for drilling solids.
• Have large single internal grooves for running the hanger and seal assembly in a single
trip. This groove is also used for full bore and multi-trip operations for 9 5/8” and 7”
hanger sizes.
• Hangers are usually compatible with both metal-to-metal and compression type
elastomer seal assemblies.
• Have internal anti-rotation slots.
• Normally provided with a tong neck to facilitate easier make-up onto the casing.
Most manufacturers offer both metal-to-metal or compression-type elastomer seal
assemblies. Normally, both types of seal assemblies are fully interchangeable with most
casing hangers and running tools.
The seal assembly should provide and considers the following:

Some manufacturers have standardized their casing hangers as being suitable for H2S
service with up to 15,000 psi pressure ratings.

• Standard temperature ratings are usually up to 250 Deg F and they may be generally
successfully gas tested up to 350 Deg F.
• Are either weight-set or pressure energized. Current design practices have avoided
designs that require setting with torque.
• Are usually retrieved to the surface with the running tool if they are not fully energized
and locked into the casing hanger. These assemblies can be retrieved with other tools
generally by stabbing the tool into the assembly and followed by a straight pick-up with
overpull.
• Generally, they push drilling solids out of the seal area as they are installed.
• Metal-to-metal seal assemblies plastically deform filling scratchers that may be present
on the sealing surfaces.
manufacturer’s equipment vary in design, running tools and techniques.
25.3.6 Running Procedures / Testing Tools

It is recommended that a full scale demonstration of the subsea wellhead components and
the proper running and test tools and procedures be provided by the subsea wellhead
manufacturer to those involved in the running of the proposed equipment prior to
commencement of rig operations. A detailed equipment and procedures manual should
also be available as a reference tool for both the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor and
Drilling Engineer, the Rig Contractor’s Senior Representative, Subsea Engineer and Driller
and the wellhead manufacturer’s service company field representative on the rig. Additional
copies of this reference guideline should be available to the Halliburton Drilling
Superintendent and IS Project Manager in the operations base/office.
A full set of the necessary running and test tools along with spare casing hangers and seal
assemblies should also be available on the rig. Generally, each running tool has redundant
capabilities to run alternate equipment so usually each running tool/test tool is backed up in
capabilities, although procedures will be slightly different. The exact procedures for the
running of each tool should be well documented in the manufacturer’s reference manuals.
25.3.7 Abandonment Caps

A temporary abandonment cap (TA cap) is installed on the subsea wellhead housing to
protect the housing when the drilling or completion program has been temporarily
suspended. It is also necessary to properly set and test isolation and abandonment cement
plugs per Section 18, Well Abandonment and Suspension prior to the setting of the TA
cap.
The TA cap generally has the following characteristics:

• Usually has an overshot type design.
• Is usually retrieved by a straight pick-up type overpull.

• Seals on the O.D. of the wellhead housing profile.
• Normally has exit line check valves to allow pressure built up below the TA cap to be
relieved. However, the TA cap is not designed to contain pressure.
• Has a top profile for running and retrieval on DP. However, the TA cap can also
usually be retrieved by attaching a line with a ROV or diver.
• Can have an optional stinger to allow for injection of corrosion inhibitor.
25.3.8 Subsea Xmas Trees

The subsea xmas tree can vary anywhere from a simple economical diver-installed system
to a guidelineless subsea tree designed for diverless installation and maintenance.
The key advantages of the simple subsea trees include the following:
• Initial capital cost of the subsea tree is low because they are basically land type trees
made of conventional surface type components with enhanced stainless steel inlays in
the ring groove and the use of hydraulic operators on some of the valves.
• A minimum of rig time and diving support is required for installation.
• Usually the installation of the tubing hangar and tree connector are self-aligning,
insuring control line ports and production tubing ports are stabbed into the tubing
hanger properly.
• Can be installed on mudline suspension well, if necessary.
The key advantages of the diver-assist subsea satellite trees with layaway flowline
connectors include the following:
• System offers high reliability compared to conventional “pull-in” type connectors due
to the connection of the flowline is made at the surface and tested in the moonpool
before the tree is lowered to the sea floor.
• System is composed of two sub-systems, a universal guide base with a wellhead
connector, tubing head and the flowline hub cradle and the subsea tree itself.
The key components of the guidelineless subsea trees with layaway flowline connectors
include the following:
• Designed for fully diverless installation and maintenance.
• Design includes passive orientation of the tree, assuring proper alignment of the tree,
wellhead tubing hanger and tree cap.
• Flowline bundles including hydraulic and electrical control lines can be passed from
pipe lay vessel to the rig, connected to the subsea tree and tested while in the
moonpool.
• Installation of the tree includes quick release with angles in reference to the subsea
wellhead of up to 6 deg and rapid unlock of running tools.

• Generally, tree height is confined to approximately 3.5 m or (12 ft) utilizing high
strength hybrid flanges reducing valve size and weight.
• Tree allows ROV maintenance access to equipment interfaces.
25.4 Mudline Suspension Equipment
25.4.1 General
The use of mudline suspension provides the capability to the user of this equipment the
efficient temporary abandonment of offshore wells drilled utilizing bottom-supported
drilling rigs. This equipment also allows for easy re-entry into and tie-back of the same well
to a platform or the use of the well as a satellite subsea completion. Today’s major
mudline suspension manufacturers include FMC, ABB-Vetco Gray, Kvaerner-National,
Cooper and Dril-Quip.
25.4.2 Butt-Weld Sub

The butt-weld sub is usually a landing ring for the mudline suspension hanger that is
normally installed in the drive pipe string. It is normally driven to approximately 5- 10 m or
(15- 30 ft) below the mudline on offshore wells. This landing ring provides a landing
support to the initial mudline hanger by which weight from the successive casing strings
can be transferred to the conductor. Sometimes the butt-weld sub is omitted in
geographical areas where the possibility of underdrive of the drive pipe is a strong
possibility or insufficient data exists in the area to get a good idea on expected penetration
of the drive pipe string before refusal. It is always important to have the butt-weld sub of
sufficient depth below the mudline to enable the well to be permanently abandoned deep
enough below the mudline to meet the local governmental regulations.
25.4.3 Hanger
The mudline suspension hanger is run on the conductor casing string and lands out on the
butt-weld sub. Alternately, if a butt-weld sub has not been utilized, a slick O.D. mudline
suspension hanger will be landed an appropriate distance below the mudline by slacking off
the weight of the casing string to the bottom of the hole. Most manufacturers utilize a
stack-down system in which each successive landing sub/casing hanger connection is
located below the next. The casing hanger should consider the following:
• Should provide wide-open access to the tie-back profile in each hanger, simplifying and
enhancing tie-back operations.
• Use of a metal-to-metal energized seal.
• Separate running and tie-back threads with the tie-back threads completely protected
during drilling and temporary abandonment.
• Wash ports located below the critical landing/casing connection hanger on the previous
string combined with tangential washports to create an efficient swirling for the most
effective washout.

• Ability to accept corrosion caps.
25.4.4 Running Procedures

It is recommended that a full scale demonstration of the mudline suspension components
and the proper running and test tools and procedures be provided by the subsea wellhead
manufacturer to those to be involved in the running of the proposed equipment prior to
commencement of rig operations. A detailed equipment and procedures manual should
also be available as a reference tool for both the Halliburton Drilling Supervisor and
Drilling Engineer, the Rig Contractor’s Senior Representative, and Driller and the
wellhead manufacturer’s service company field representative on the rig. Additional copies
of this reference guideline should be available to the Halliburton Drilling Superintendent
and IS Manager in the operations base/office.
A full set of the necessary running and test tools along with spare tie-back hangers and
seals should also be available on the rig. The exact procedures for the running of each tool
should be well documented in the manufacturer’s reference manuals.
25.4.5 Abandonment Caps/Tie-back Re-entry

For temporary abandonment, the drilling risers with the landing subs are retrieved and
replaced with pressure-control or corrosion caps. It is also necessary to properly set and
test isolation and abandonment cement plugs per Section 18, Well Abandonment and
Suspension prior to the setting of these caps. These caps are installed in the casing hanger
landing subs’ threads using a simple jay tool. Like the landing subs, the caps have
extended noses that should protect the metal seal bore in the hanger, keeping it clean and
smooth for the tie-back sub. After removal of the corrosion or other cap, the tie-back subs
for successive strings can be landed into the casing hangers and tied-back.

Drilling Operations Guidelines Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drilling Operations Guidelines Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drilling Operations Guidelines

1.1 Halliburton Field Organization Chart

1.2 Halliburton Drilling Project Manager

1.3 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Drilling Engineer

1.4 Halliburton Materials Superintendent

1.5 Rig Contractor’s Superintendent

1.6 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor

1.7 Rig Contractor Senior Representative

1.8 Halliburton Wellsite Drilling Engineer

1.9 Halliburton and Other Service Company Personnel

Represented below is a typical organization chart. Actual relationship will be defined on a

1.1 Halliburton Drilling Organization Chart

Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Halliburton Materials

Rig Contractor Office

Halliburton Wellsite Halliburton Service

1.2 Halliburton Drilling Project Manager

The Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator reports to the Halliburton Drilling Project

1.3 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator / Drilling Engineer

• Coordinates project requirements with operational requirements of the rig site.

1.4 Halliburton Materials Superintendent

1.5 Rig Contractor’s Superintendent

1.6 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor

1.7 Rig Contractor Senior Representative

1.8 Halliburton Wellsite Drilling Engineer

6. Recording slow circulating rates, BOP tests and BOP drills.

1.9 Halliburton and Other Service Company Personnel

2.0 GENERAL DRILLING RIG SAFETY PRACTICES

2.1 SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY

2.1.1 Halliburton Drilling IS Coordinator

2.1.2 Halliburton Drilling Supervisor

2.1.3 Drilling Contractor’s Rig Superintendent/Senior Representative

2.2 Emergency Situations Response

2.2.1 Emergency Drills and Exercises

2.2.2 Emergency Situation Response and Procedures Plans (Rig Site)

2.2.3 Emergency Situation Response and Procedures Plans (Halliburton

2.3 Incident/Accident Reporting and Follow Up Procedure

2.4 Safety Meetings

2.5 Permit to Work System

2.6 Rig Component and Equipment Safety Requirements

2.6.3 Drawworks, Rotary, Hose, Swivel, Kelly

2.6.4 Crown Block, Traveling Block, Hook, Drilling line

2.6.7 Spinning Chain

2.6.8 Iron Roughneck

2.6.10 Air Hoist/Tugger

2.6.12 Mud Pits

2.6.13 Sack Store/ Chemical Storage Area

2.6.14 Electrical Installations

2.6.15 Well Control

2.6.15.1 Diverter Drilling

2.6.15.2 Blow Out Preventer Equipment and Procedures

2.6.15.3 BOP Control System

2.6.15.4 Pressure Testing

2.6.16 Drilling Lifting Equipment Certification and Inspection

2.7 General Rig Working Practices

2.7.1 Well Servicing

2.7.1.3 Hydraulic Fracturing

2.7.1.5 Procedures and Requirements for using Nitrogen

2.7.2 Safe Practices in Handling/ Mixing Chemicals

2.7.3 Radioactive Materials Handling and Procedures

2.7.4 Explosives Utilization

2.7.5 Hydrogen Sulfide Safety, General

2.7.5.1 Well Planning and Equipment Requirements for H 2S wells